Archive of Our Own ^beta

Chapter Text

Akine was quite familiar with bodies --- dead ones to be precise. It should have been obvious to any bodyman that there was something quite odd about this one, but Shino was so eager to be rid of it that he could not argue. 

Akine had been at a local bar around the outskirts of the city. He had been hoping to drown himself in drinks or waste the night away watching the unusual bar patrons, but he knew that would not be the case when an Imperial guard burst rather unceremoniously through the doors of the bar. The tender behind the counter, who Akine knew to be the owner of the place, had initially thought to throw up a fit when he heard the noise, complaining and yakking about people destroying his property, but his mouth had immediately shut when he saw who exactly had “destroyed his property.” 

The guard had turned to Akine. He said that something needed to be moved. 

In the dead silence of the bar, Akine had scooted his stool back, slid out of it, and followed after the guard. He had not paid for his drink; he had not even gotten the chance to drink it. 

The guard brought him around to the back of the royal palace. If a body needed to be carted away from the place, it was always done around the back under the cover of night, far from any prying eyes, at an hour when even ghosts would take their rest. He rarely saw work from the royal palace. Most of the inhabitants could afford a nice funeral. A proper cremation, with hundreds of mourners, a beautiful urn, and lots of food for a celebration of life afterward. He and Shino mostly worked within the city, taking the poor, impoverished souls out to the Barge where they would be burned, no one left to mourn them. No urn to hold them, no one left to celebrate them. 

It was depressing work, but it had to be done. 

There was always an occasion, however, when they would be summoned to the royal palace. Usually, it was a servant who got on the wrong side of a lord or duke or general, who had been burned or marred so severely, the healers knew they would not survive the night. Sometimes, the healers would wait for the victims to die, let them go fitfully and painfully. Other time, Akine would spy a line across the body’s throat. Shino was usually called in earlier to deal with those incidents. 

Shino was not there when he arrived. Akine suspected that much was happening inside the walls of the palace. 

The guard left him around a back entrance and disappeared inside. Akine crossed his arms and pulled tighter in on himself, shivering. The poor soul they would be taking out tonight would be like all the other servants. Out to the Barge to be set aflame, to be a bright beacon out in the ocean. They always did it in the night; the royals could not have people knowing workers were being slaughtered in the palace. 

Doing it during the day was bad enough. Night was even worse. Akine had never been superstitious, but as a child, he had always believed in ghosts and spirits. Not spirits like the ones in stories, not like Mo’o the Sea Serpent, the Badgermole King, Akira and her Sky Bison, or Agni. Angry, vengeful spirits that preyed on children under their beds. It was a child’s belief, but it was one that he carried into his adult life. The first time he had to cart a body in the dead of night, he had nearly passed out from fear. If the ghost of this person wanted revenge, he would be the first person they came to. He was the one who had taken them out to their final demise, after all. 

He never told Shino that was the reason he could not stop vomiting every five minutes during the first year of his work. He blamed it on seeing the mangled, scorched bodies with charred flesh, gaping holes, organs sometimes spewing from the inside. Those were terrible sights to see, but his short time in the army had trained him for that.

His stint as a soldier did not last long. Every young person was drafted into the military at the age of eighteen, training starting years younger than that. Akine had always thought he would be the perfect soldier, exactly what the generals and country needed to win the war. 

It was not until he lost his whole legion in one fell swoop did that begin to change. In the battle after that, he had simply run. He could not do it, not anymore. 

For that he was dishonorably discharged. After that, no one wanted to hire a deserter. A bodyman was the only place he could find work. 

It was a depressing, disgusting occupation. But someone had to do it. 

Besides, at least now he was only carrying the bodies rather than killing them. 

About thirty minutes later, Shino emerged from the back passage. The man was in his mid-sixties, and after being alive for that long, he seemed rather monotone and unexcited about the world. Everything happened to him and he was just reacting. However, now, he looked rather frazzled and… afraid? 

Akine pushed off the wall, shook himself to warm up. “Are you alright?” 

Shino blinked, eyes focusing in on Akine. “W- what? Alright, you ask? Of course I am, why would you even believe otherwise?”

“I- “Ah. That was the Shino he knew. Abrupt, to-the-point, and rude. He had certain distaste for Akine that Akine could never quite place or understand why. “Nevermind.” 

Shino’s eyes narrowed, but he did not press further. “They’ll be bringing it out soon. Be ready.” 

Akine glanced up and down his clothing. “There’s blood on you,” he noted, nodding to the red staining Shino’s shirt. 

“And?” The older man drew in a deep, shaky breath. 

“Well, you- it’s just- you never- “ 

“You thought what?” Akine jumped at Shino’s tone. “Stop stuttering, boy! Did the army teach you nothing?” 

Akine did so. He held his hands up in defense. “Forget I said anything. You’re clearly not in the mood to talk,” he added to himself. 

“What did you say?” 

“What?” 

“You- “Shino shook his head. “No. Not doing this tonight.” 

Akine desperately wanted to snap, Doing what?, but he kept his mouth shut, slumping back against the wall. Shino had been doing this for so long, he knew how to not get blood on him. Only on the really messy ones, he said, where it was hard to undertake the task, did he get blood on him. But Akine had never seen him shaken up this badly before.

It was another thirty minutes before he heard more footsteps. He glanced up to see two people, the royal mortician and the Imperial guard, heading toward them. The mortician was in the front with the guard in the back, both holding tight to the handles of a stretcher. He already knew there was a body laying on it. 

Shino stepped back as the two approached. They moved between Akine and Shino, set the stretcher down on the ground. The body was barely clothed, only a loose pair of pants and no shirt. 

It was horrifically scarred. That was saying something coming from Akine, who had seem limbs missing, holes in the chest and stomach, and even once a neck burnt so horribly that the head was barely held on. But this was something different. 

The left side of the body was completely unrecognizable, but the right side remained untouched. Most burns of this degree would be erratic and angry, as to reflect the emotions of the nobleman, general, or lord. The scarring started at the face. Parts of the body’s hair had been burnt away, but some had been shorn, possibly in an attempt to heal the burn. It traveled down the victim’s face, down its neck, shoulder, arm, all the way to its hand. Two of the fingers looked as though they had almost been fused together. The skin was charred black, flakes flying away with the light, night breeze. So much of the skin had been taken by the initial burn itself that he could see muscle tissue and the telltale signs of white bone beneath. 

But it was not only that that caught Akine’s attention. It was the age of the victim. 

It could not have been only than a boy, possibly twelve or thirteen at the most. Akine had a sister who was probably that age now. What was left of the black hair had once been tied back into a phoenix tail, something that only young boys and teenagers wore. 

His eyes trailed to the body’s neck. A slash from ear to collarbone spilled blood all over its chest. Blood that had long since dried, turning from red to brown. 

His knees went weak. Akine felt bile quickly rising in his throat, and he did his best to swallow it. He rested a hand against the wall for the support. The boy would have most definitely not survived the burn, and even if he did, he would not be able to see or hear or out his left eye or hear. He probably would not have even been able to use his left arm ever again. 

But, Shino, do this to a… to a child? 

He was going to be sick. 

The mortician glanced between him and Shino. The older man was looking upon the body with his eyes widened in horror. “You know what you have to do.” Akine barely heard the words. 

By the time he could process again, the mortician and the guard were already gone. 

Wordlessly, Shino moved to the front of the stretcher. Akine went to the back. Together, they picked it up and started toward the dock where the Barge would take it out to sea. 

It. The process was easier if he thought about the bodies that way. They were not he ’s or she’ s or whatever else. It. They were objects; they had never been people. 

As they trekked through the city, through open streets and dark alleyways, Shino said nothing, spine rigid as they traveled. Akine suspected he took the front because he did not want to see the body. Akine did not get that luxury. 

The toe of his shoe scuffed against the ground, and he tripped. The body jostled a little, one of the hands flopping over the side. The burned hand.

Akine repressed a shudder and kept going, keeping his eyes confidently ahead. 

But the question kept eating at him. They passed into a darkened square. There were no street lamps lit, and all the shutters on each building had been pulled tightly closed. They passed a news bulletin, and he glimpsed a poster that declared the whole nation be in morning for the next week. To be in mourning for their poor, lost prince, who had fought valiantly against terrible burn wounds for three days before eventually succumbing to them. The funeral was for the royal family only. No one else allowed. 

Akine halted. His grip slipped from the handles, and the back half collapsed onto the ground. Shino abruptly stopped and dropped his own. The rest clattered down as well. 

“Dammit, Akine!” Shino hissed, wheeling on him. “What the hell is wrong with you?!” 

Akine glanced from the body to Shino and back. 

Shino stepped around the stretcher, grabbed Akine’s collar. “This is just another body! What’s so different about?” 

“What did you do?” Akine demanded. 

“Excuse me?” 

“I said- “he reached up and snatched Shino’s wrist. “What did you do?” He shoved the older man away from him. 

Shino reeled back as though he had been burned, clutching his wrist. “What do you mean what did I do? I did what had to be done.” 

“This is a child!” 

“So?” Shino shrugged. His eyes were wild, breaths erratic, as though he were a wild animal. “I gave him a merciful death. He was suffering anyway.” 

“But- “ 

“I don’t care,” Shino hissed. “I don’t care, I don’t care, and I don’t care. We have to deliver this body. If we don’t, bad things will happen. You don’t want bad things to happen, do you?” 

Akine blinked. Shook his head. 

“Good. Now pick it up and act like an adult for once.” 

Shino was very much not “acting like an adult,” but Akine did so. Better they only have to take out one body tonight. 

He kept glancing down at the body as they continued their trek. There was something quite familiar about it. He could not place what that was exactly, however. 

In the light of the moon, its cheeks looked a little fuller. The skin did not look so ashen, so gray. It almost looked healthy, with that slight red tint that the living had. But it was just the light of the moon. The first time Akine had seen the sensation, he had thought the body was coming back as some kind of zombie. Shino had simply told him in the most deadpan, tired voice he had ever heard from the man that it was just the moon. That it happened. 

They made it to the grassy shore at the very back to the city, where the dock to the Barge lay. Few people even knew this area existed. 

But when they arrived, it was missing one important detail. That being the Barge. 

“Set it down,” Shino commanded. Akine did so. 

“The Barge is gone,” he said. 

Shino scoffed. “Incredible observation, detective.” 

Akine stepped up onto the dock. It was a rickety old thing, too small to even be called a dock. He cautiously stepped over the planks, stared out into the ocean. Judging from the empty horizon, the Barge had been long gone. 

“Where is it?” He turned back to Shino. 

The man wrapped his arms around himself and shook his head. 

“What do you mean?” Akine stepped off the dock. “Where’s the Barge?” 

It was a moment before Shino answered. “It’s been gone for hours.” 

Akine blinked. “Then why- “ 

“This was an emergency!” Shino suddenly snapped. Akine jumped. “It- it had to be done! Now, we just have to dump it in the ocean.” 

Akine’s jaw dropped. “Dump it in the ocean?!” he exclaimed. “No. You can’t do that!” 

“Why not? There’s no Barge, and we need to get rid of it somehow.” A wild glint filled his eyes, mania creeping into his tone. “Last time I checked, neither of us are firebenders!” 

“You can’t!” Akine persisted. “His- his soul won’t be released! It’ll sink to the bottom of the ocean and stay there!” 

Shino laughed maniacally. “Oh, a little boy’s fears of ghosts,” he sneered. “Tell me, is this one going to haunt you at night? Do you need to sleep with a lantern lit?”

His cheeks burned red, but he shoved his anger down. Retaliating was not going to get him anywhere.

“We need to get rid of it,” Shino repeated with finality. 

Akine opened his mouth to question, but he glanced back at the body. The burn was so precise, so specific to one side, that it almost looked… intentional. As though that was all that was supposed to be burned. 

“There aren’t any servants in the palace this young,” Akine said slowly, turning to Shino. The man was still shaking his head, arms wrapped tightly around himself. “And they would certainly have more clothing.” He wracked his brain, trying to remember what could possibly- 

Akine reeled away from Shino. “It’s him,” he said suddenly. “Isn’t it?” 

Shino stilled. Everyone knew of the duel. The rumors of what had happened to their nation’s prince. Akine just did not know that they were anything more than rumors. 

“What did you do?” Akine demanded. 

No answer. 

“What did you do?!” he shouted. 

“It had to be done!” Shino yelled back, lunging toward Akine. “I had no choice. I was ordered to do it! He- he said he’d kill me if I didn’t!” 

“Shino, this is- “ 

“A child, yes I know! It’s just- it’s just- “he started shaking again. “You- you don’t understand. I’ve never seen anything like him.” His eyes widened, and he began to tremble again. “He- he spoke to me.”

Akine scoffed. “Who?” he asked skeptically. “The kid?” 

Shino’s shocked expression looked as though Akine had committed blaspheme. “No, no. He spoke to me. He- he called himself- “ 

A low groan sounded. Both men’s eyes shot in the direction of the body. 

Akine heard a sharp inhale. The chest rose. Then- 

It moved. 

Akine’s blood went cold. 

“No.” Shino began shaking so hard that Akine though he was going to crumble into dust. “No. He can’t be.” He produced a knife from nowhere, then slid to his knees beside the stretcher. In the dim light of the moon, Akine glimpsed smears of blood. 

Akine lunged out to stop him.

The body’s eyes shot open. The right one was a bright blue-white color. 

And Akine’s childhood fears came to life. He shouted. What he should, he did not know. But sound came out. 

A blue-white light radiated from the boy’s hands, and he slammed his palms into Shino’s chest. The man went flying --- literally flying --- through the air, arcing up over Akine and crashed in a heap on the ground. The knife landed by Akine’s feet. 

Akine glanced at it, back at the boy, terror overwhelming him. Any kind of combat training he had ever had left his brain in an instant. 

The boy shot up, chest heaving, then scrambled to his feet. 

Akine finally unfroze and dove for Shino’s knife, holding it outward toward the boy. He tried to ignore the fact that his arms were shaking. 

The kid glanced at the pen with what seemed like a dismissive expression on his face. His right eye was still the brilliant blue-white color, and Akine swore that it was glowing. The left one was milky-white. He did not look so small, so young, now; any muscle mass he would have had in life- 

In life? Could he really say that about what appeared to be a zombie? Akine could not think about that too hard, however, as the corpse had literally just resurrected in front of him, what the hell. 

Any muscle mass he would have had before was retained. His eyes slid from the knife up to Akine. He wore the expression of someone who had lived several lifetimes over. But that wasn’t right. The boy could not have been older than fourteen. 

He took a step forward, and it took everything in Akine not to take one back. “Who are you?” he demanded, voice ringing through the air. 

The words tumbled from Akine’s mouth without his consent just as the knife slipped from his grip. He had no choice but to obey. “A- Akine,” he stammered. “Son- son of Hirostati.” 

The boy’s head lifted. “Akine, son of Hirostati,” he addressed. He glanced over Akine’s shoulder to where he assumed Shino was. “Your and your companion will- “ 

He cut off with a gasp, eyes widening. He stumbled back a few steps, arms wrapping around his middle, and fell to his knees, head dropping down. He stayed in that position for several moments, suddenly transforming back into the body Akine had transported out here. 

“Akine,” Shino wheezed. When he glanced back, the old man had managed to crawl his way over. He held out a hand, and Akine took it, hauling him to his feet.

“He should be dead,” Shino hoarsely whispered, standing ever-so slightly behind Akine. “He- he should be dead… “ 

Akine threw him a dirty look, then cautiously took a step toward the kid. Regardless if he should be dead, regardless the fact that he was currently looking at his childhood nightmare, he was still a kid. A scared, lost, terrified, should-be-dead kid. But still a kid. 

“Hey,” Akine said quietly, “kid.” He reached out to help him- 

The kid scrambled back in the grass, wild eyes finally focusing on Akine with the most horrified expression he had ever seen, gold eye wide with fear- 

Wait, gold eye? 

“I- I know you,” the kid forced out. His voice sounded completely different, no air of command. It was smaller, quieter, raspier. His arms curled around himself again. “You’re- you’re the- “

He blinked, and his eyes were back to the blue-wite color. “Bodymen.” The other voice was back. “You’re the bodymen.”

Akine tried to swallow, but something had stuck in his throat. He opened his mouth to try and speak, but no noise came out. 

The boy’s head turned slightly, focus landing on Shino. “You,” he said quietly, then slowly got to his feet. 

Shino drew in a sharp breath. 

The boy’s eyes trailed off somewhere in the distance, and his fingers lightly grazed over the gaping hole slashed across his throat, then to the dried blood spilling down his chest. Akine felt even more horror and disgust at the though of someone so casually touching a wound that should had- that did kill them. “You’re the one that did this.” The boy sighed, then glanced back to them. Hints of gold had made their way into his iris. “Amazing, really, to finally have some closure on that. To know my father loves me so much as to have someone else take me out. Really?” He chuckled darkly. “I thought he would have wanted to save that honor for himself. 

Akine blinked several times, wondering if this was some kind of weird alcohol-induced dream. He finally unstuck his throat and said, “Yes. We’re the bodymen.” He took step toward the kid. “But, we- “he glanced back at Shino” - I want to help you.” Did he, though? Akine thought to himself half a second after the words left his mouth. Could he? Did he know how to if he really wanted to? It just seemed the right thing to say. 

He went to place a hand on the kid’s shoulder. 

The boy reached up and snatched his wrist. 

“I- I just to want help you,” Akine stuttered. 

“Hm.” Up close, he could see a ring of blue around the gold iris. “I don’t need your help.”

The next thing he knew, the boy had slammed a hand into his chest, and he was flying, flying, flying through the air, slamming down about forty feet away from the scene. The air flew out of him, and his head snapped back into ground. Darkness exploded into his visions. His skull was ringing. 

He heard an enraged cry from Shino. “I killed you!” the man shouted. “You should be dead!” 

“And you should’ve heeded my warning, and yet, here we are now.” 

Akine slowly sat up, ignoring the pain rippling through his body, and shook his head, taking in the scene ahead. 

Shino let out another cry, then dove for the abandoned knife in the grass. He lunged at the kid, taking a few reckless wipes. The boy calmly stepped back to dodge each of them. 

Akine got to his feet, stumbling through his first few steps. Stars floated in the corners of his eyes, but he quickly picked up his pace.  

“You don’t understand!” Shino shouted. “He’ll kill me if you aren’t gone!” 

The kid scoffed. “And he killed me. Big deal.” 

Shino took another jab at the kid, but Akine jumped forward, snatching his arm and dragging it back. “Stop, stop. There’s nothing you can do.” 

“He’ll kill me,” Shino whispered, slumping to his knees, taking Akine with him. “He’ll kill us both… “ 

The kid narrowed his eyes, then squatted down in front of him. Shino drew in another sharp breath, and Akine froze. He could not move, not even if he wanted to. 

The boy’s eye flashed entirely blue. “You delivered the body.” 

Yes, Akine told himself. They successfully delivered the body. 

“It currently at the bottom of the ocean, where it will be for the rest of time. Decaying, decrepit, take your pick.” 

Yes. That’s where it was. The body’s soul could not be properly released, but that was not what mattered. They finished their task successfully. 

“You will forget about me.” 

But wait, how could he do that? How could he ever forget the corpse that had risen and spoken to them. How could he ever forget… 

A sudden wave washed over him- 

Akine opened his eyes. At some point, he had collapsed on the ground without a clue as to how he had gotten there. 

Shino was beside him. The front of his clothing was covered with dried, brown blood. The blood of the poor soul they had had to deliver here.

Shino sat up. “We better head back to the palace.” Got to his feet. “Wouldn’t want to keep the Fire Lord waiting.” 

As they gathered the stretcher and started back for the palace, they never noticed that they were being watched. A small raven sat on a rock not far from them, cocked his head. He kept his eyes on the placed where someone else had disappeared moments earlier. 

The raven let out a cry and spread its wings, taking off into the sky just as night faded into dawn.

Chapter Text

The huge mass of scorched land tearing through the land was the last thing Sokka expected to see. 

Appa landed in the middle of what he assumed had once been a magnificent forest. The loud laughter and chatter than had filled the space between the three of them moments before had quickly halted, silence filling the void left behind. The three of them slid off Appa and into the remnants below. 

The soil was ashen and gray, a rough, abrasive texture against Sokka’s hands when he picked up a few grains. There wasn’t much left of the trees, just scorched, blackened stumps and twigs littering the ground around. The air held a faint burning smell, even though Sokka could not tell when exactly these events had transpired. A few of the hills around had retained some green, but it was too neatly shorn to their tips. 

“Listen,” he said, noting the eerie silence. “It’s so quiet.” He glanced around, squinting at the distance. There was no life anywhere. 

“Aang,” Katara asked quietly, “are you okay?” His attention was drawn to where Aang had padded several paces ahead, head still turning side to side as he took in all the destruction. Sokka saw the ever-so slight slump in the kid’s shoulders. 

He squatted down again to investigate when he glimpsed at a trail of very familiar footprints. “Fire Nation!” he exclaimed, jumping back up. “Those evil savages make me sick!” He wheeled around to face Katara. “They have no respect for- “ 

Katara quickly shushed him. 

He halted in his rant, deflating. “What? I’m not allowed to be angry?” 

She pointed ahead to Aang. His shoulders slumped even more, and he sunk down to his knees with a loud sigh. “Why would anyone do this?” He ran a hand sadly over the soil. “How could I let this happen?” 

Katara and Sokka exchanged a look. Despite all the Avatar and saving-the-world stuff, Aang was really just a twelve-year-old beneath it. “You didn’t let this happen,” Katara offered. “It has nothing to do with you.” 

“Yes, it does,” he argued. He moved to sit cross-legged. “It’s the Avatar’s job to protect nature, but I don’t know how to do my job.” 

Like there’s anyone that does. Sokka kept that comment to himself. 

“That’s why we’re going to the North Pole,” Katara persisted. “To find you a teacher.” 

Aang sighed again. “A waterbending teacher. But there’s no one who can teach me how to be the Avatar. Monk Gyatso said that Avatar Roku would help me.” 

Monk Gyatso apparently said a lot of things, but he did not give much instruction on how exactly to do it. “The Avatar before you?” Sokka asked. When Aang didn’t answer, he assumed that he was right. “He died over a hundred years ago. How are you supposed to talk to him?” 

“I don’t know. I don’t know anything about spirits or Avatar stuff or anything… “And with that, he worked himself into a pout. Moments later, Momo leaped up into his lap and started purring. Nothing like lemur cuddles to make one feel better. 

Katara sighed to herself, then stepped off through the burned trees. Sokka had half a mind to go after her, but he figured she would want him to stay with Aang. He plopped down in the dirt a few yards away from the kid, let him keep his silent vigil. 

Katara returned a few minutes later. “Hey, Aang,” she greeted. “Are you ready to be cheered up?” 

Aang sighed. “No,” he muttered. 

Katara chucked a small projectile at his head. 

“Ow!” Aang rubbed the spot fiercely, throwing a glare at Katara. “How is that cheering me up?” 

Sokka chuckled. “Cheered me up.” 

That earned him a well-deserved projectile chucked at his own head. As he rubbed the spot, he saw an acorn lying on the ground next to him. 

Katara went and knelt down in front of Aang with a handful of them. “These are everywhere, Aang,” she explained. “That means the forest will grow back.” Behind them, Momo was busy digging up a storm, stuffing his arms and face full of as many as he could find. “Every one of these will be a tall oak tree someday, and all the birds and animals that lived here will come back.” She placed the acorn in Aang’s hand, then closed his fingers at it. 

He stared at his closed palm for a moment, then turned his eyes up to Katara. “Thanks.” 

She nodded. Suddenly, she gasped, eyes focused over Aang’s shoulder.

Sokka followed her gaze, then leaped to his feet as an old man came leaning on a cane came hobbling toward them. 

“Hey!” Sokka demanded. “Who are you?” 

But the old man took no notice of him, striding past as though he were a coat rack, all attention on Aang. “When I saw the sky bison, I thought it was impossible. But those markings… “he came to a stop in front of Aang. “Are you the Avatar, child?” 

Aang glanced back at Katara. She nodded, then he turned to the old man and nodded as well. 

Sokka crossed his arms. Good to know I have some bearing on the situation, he thought bitterly. 

“My name is Key-fon,” he introduced himself. “My- my village desperately needs your help. Well, we have help, but there- there have been a few… complications with it.” He shook his head. “We would simply like a little more.” 

Aang, being Aang, immediately agreed to help. Katara, of course, wanted to go with Aang because whatever Aang wanted to do was the set-in-stone law. Sokka started to raise his objections, but a quick glare from Katara silence them all. 

“Well,” he muttered to himself, “if we all end up dead or in the hands of the Fire Nation, your ghost better not come crying to my ghost… “ 

Key-fon couldn’t stop babbling his thanks, what an honor it was to meet the Avatar, how he was sure they would now be safe, yak yak yak. Aang and Katara both said they were happy to do it, and Sokka just waved him off. “Yeah, yeah. Avatar business.” 

Katara flicked another acorn at the back on his head. 

They made it to Key-fon’s village just as the sun was starting to descend below the horizon. It was not a large village, probably even smaller than the Southern Water Tribe. There were four rows of buildings with a town hall at the back of the village. 

His first impression was of that of a ghost town. The whole place seemed to be uninhabited, and Sokka’s mind began to spin up some crazy story about Key-fon being a delusional old man who only imagined other villagers existing just so he could meet the Avatar. The state of the buildings certainly seemed to support that idea. Some looked as though they had been scorched, cleaved in half, and only the skeleton remained of others. 

“I don’t like this,” he muttered to Katara. 

“You don’t like anything.” 

“Yeah, but I usually have a reason. And I have a pretty good reason for this… “ 

Key-fon led them down the center of the village into the open doors of the town hall. Sokka let out an involuntary breath of relief when he saw that there were other villagers, several, in fact. Some of his suspicions evaporated. 

The town hall was organized into two levels, a ground floor, where most of the occupants were, and a balcony that ringed around the top. 

Key-fon rapped his cane against the ground, and all the attention turned to them. “This young person is the Avatar,” he announced, stepping aside to indicate Aang. Aang gave a small wave. 

A man stepped away from his conversation circle and hurried up to them. “So, the rumors of your return are true.” He fisted his right hand against his left palm and bowed. “It is the greatest honor of a lifetime to be in your presence.” 

Aang responded with a tilt of his head. “Nice to meet you, too. So… is there something I can help you with?” 

The man sighed, an unsure expression coming over his face. “I’m not sure.” 

“Our village is in crisis,” Key-fon explained to him. “He is our only hope, Chan.” 

“That’s what you said about the last person, and I have yet to see that help.” 

“Well.” Key-fon glanced at Aang. “I’m willing to put more trust in the Avatar than him. Speaking of… “Key-fon turned to the crowd. “Lee!” he called. When no one from the crowd responded, he said again, “Lee? He better not be- “he cut off with a frustrated noise and called Lee’s name a third time. “Where- “Key-fon sighed, waved a hand. “Oh, forget it. He could be standing right behind me, and I would never know.” 

“Yeah?” 

Sokka turned at the sound of a voice behind him. There was a guy with a head of shaggy black hair standing in the doorway wearing all black, the outline of a sword sheath on his back. At least Sokka assumed he was. He could not tell whether he was or if it was the shadow of the sun. 

Key-fon huffed out a breath. “And how long have you been standing there?” 

Lee shrugged. “About a minute.” 

“How much of our conversation did you hear?” 

“Oh, I heard all of it.” Lee stepped father into the room, closer to them. Away from the sun, Sokka could get a glimpse of his features. “I just have better things to be doing than standing in here, waiting for Hei Bai to come and grab me.” 

Key-fon’s cheeks reddened slightly. Sokka might have been appalled by the guy’s words --- If he had talked to Gran-Gran that way… well, he didn’t like to think of the consequences --- but he found that his eyes were glued to Lee’s appearance. The guy looked all well and fine at first, but now that he had fully turned around, Sokka could see that a burn scar --- ugly, red, and lumpy --- completely marred the left side of the guy’s face. It had turned his left eye a milky-white, and is disappeared down into the collar of his shirt. 

Chan glanced between Lee and Key-fon. “Well,” he began, drawing both of their attentions, “we may not have to worry about that for long.” He motioned to Aang. “This is the Avatar.” 

“Yeah.” Lee crossed his arms. “I can put that much together. It’s not hard.” 

Sokka glanced at Aang, expecting him to respond in his completely aloof, naïve Aang-way, but the kid was completely frozen, eyes trained on Lee. Sokka gave him a swift punch to the back. 

Aang shook himself, then nodded. “Yeah. I’m the Avatar. That’s me.” 

“Would never have guessed that,” Lee muttered. 

“Avatar,” Chan said, “this is Lee.” As if they did not already know that. “He is who we originally asked to help us with our problem out there, but that thing won’t leave.” 

“So,” Sokka piped up, “he’s been a failure?” 

Lee’s eyes turned to him, a falcon’s glare. Sokka swallowed, and he felt his knees go ever-so slightly weak. Why was he afraid of this guy? He’d just met him like two seconds ago. “I have not been a failure, as you would put it. That ‘thing,’ out there, as you call it- “he turned toward Chan” -is just to stubborn to go. Also, stop calling him ‘the thing.’ He doesn’t like that.” 

“And who told you that?” Sokka dared to question. “The thing?” 

Lee turned to answer, and Sokka could sense some sharp retort on the tip of his tongue. 

“What’s happening?” Katara said, finally driving them toward the point. “What’s out there?” 

Key-fon spoke, “For the past few nights, a spirit monster comes and attacks our village.” 

“Hei Bai,” Lee supplied. “The Black and White Spirit. Kind of a little bitch in my opinion, but that’s beside the point.” 

Sokka narrowed his eyes. So, they weren’t allowed to call it “the thing,” but they could insult it? He kept that to himself, instead asking, “Why is it attacking you?” 

Chan shook his head. “We do not know.” He strode past their group, toward the doorway. “But each of the last three nights, he has abducted one of our own. But we are especially fearful now because the winter solstice draws near.” 

“What happens then?” Katara asked. 

“The spirit world and the corporeal world draw closer to each other until the line between them is blurred completely,” Lee explained. “Stuff like this starts happening.” 

“ Stuff like this started happening when you showed up,” Key-fon muttered. 

Lee closed his eyes and sighed. “If you’re implying that I brought this thing with me,” he began in a strained tone, opening his eyes, “then I hate- just kidding, I love saying you’re wrong.” 

Key-fon simply blinked. Sokka could see the murder churning in his eyes. 

“Hei Bai is already causing devastation and destruction,” Chan said, drawing them back to the point. “Once the solstice is here, I fear what he will do.” 

Aang had simply been staring at the man with wide polar-bear-puppy eyes. “So… what do you want me to do exactly?” 

Lee hummed. “Wonderful help… “he muttered. 

Sokka threw him a glare. 

Key-fon stepped up to Aang. “Who better to resolve a crisis between our world and the spirit world than the Avatar himself?” He knelt down to Aang’s height, leaning heavily on his cane. “You are the Great Bridge between man and spirits.” 

“Rrrrright,” Aang answered slowly, raising an eyebrow. “That’s me.” 

Katara tugged on his sleeve. “Hey, Great Bridge Guy, can I talk to you over here for a second?” 

Aang stepped over to the side with her. Sokka started to, but he noticed Lee’s eyes trailing on Aang. He did not seem agitated or suspicious, but almost… questioning, in a way. 

Sokka shook his head and followed the other two. They would likely never see him again once they left this village, so what was the point of putting all the work into figuring him out? 

“You seem a little unsure about all this,” Katara was saying when he joined the conversation. 

“Yeah,” Aang agreed. “I think that might be an understatement. I don’t know anything at all about the spirit world.” 

Yeah, Sokka thought as he and Katara exchanged a look. That might be a problem. 

Aang took notice of this. “It’s not like there’s someone to teach me this stuff!” 

Another look between him and Katara. “Do you think you can help these people?” she asked. 

Aang shrugged. “I have to try, don’t I? Maybe whatever I need to do will just… come to me.” He gave a hopeful grin. 

Katara, always the optimist, said, “I think you can do it, Aang,” with the same hopeful grin. 

Sokka, always the realist, gave a strained smile. “Yeah. We’re all gonna get eaten by a spirit monster.” 

They waited the next hour and a half for sunset to truly begin. Aang bounced around some ideas with the two of them, but since none of them knew anything about the spirit world, the responses always ended up Baing, “I don’t know,” or, “Uh… maybe?” 

At one point, Aang turned and pointed across the room. “Why don’t I ask him some things? He seems to know at least the name of the spirit.” Sokka followed his direction over to where Lee was standing, forearms resting on a windowsill. A blackbird landed next to him. 

“Uh… I don’t know,” Katara said hesitantly. 

“Hey, that’s a new response!” 

“She’s right,” Sokka persisted, ignoring Aang’s enthusiasm. “There’s something about him I don’t like.” 

“You don’t like anyone, Sokka,” Katara said. 

“That’s not true! I like you, and I like Aang, and Gran-Gran, and Dad, and- “ 

“Anyone outside those people you just mentioned. Oh, and the village,” she added when he opened his mouth in objection. 

Sokka shook his head. “Not my point. I just… I don’t know if I trust him. He’s been here for three days, and he still can’t get this thing to go away. For someone who’s so confident in his abilities, he should’ve been able to. Also, like the old man said, he and the spirit monster appeared around the same time.” Sokka pointed an accusatory finger at him. “He can deny it all he wants, but I know the truth.” 

Katara grabbed his wrist, forced his arm down. “It’s rude to point. Sokka does make an argument, as much as I hate to admit it, but it’s ultimately up to you, Aang.” 

Aang stared at Lee for several moments, dead silent. Sokka could sense his hesitance, although whether it was because he didn’t trust Lee or because he didn’t want to disappoint Sokka and Katara, he did not know. Still, Aang finally shrugged. “I guess you’re right.” He then retreated to a corner of the room and plopped down, clutching his staff tightly and saying no more.  

Katara grabbed Sokka’s wrist once more. “Come on.” She started dragging him across the room to Lee. When they reached him, Katara grabbed his shoulder and spun him around. 

Lee slapped her hand off himself, and the blackbird let out a surprised squawk and flapped away. 

Lee scoffed. “Oh, great. Look what you’ve done now.” 

“What’s your problem?” Katara demanded, hands on her hips. 

“There’s a lot. You’re going to have to be more specific.” 

“Your deal with the spirit,” Sokka clarified. “Haribo or whatever.” 

“Hei Bai,” Lee corrected, leaning back against the windowsill and crossing his arms. “Spirits get angry when you say their name wrong.” 

“I said ‘or whatever!’” Sokka answered vehemently. “Besides, how come you can go around insulting them and calling them those kinds of names, but we can’t call it ‘the thing,’ when that’s clearly what it is?” 

“They get mad when you say their name wrong or don’t say it at all,” Lee said casually with a shrug, as if this was basic elementary stuff the two of them should have known. “You can say whatever you want about them, as long as the name is right.” 

“And what?” Sokka laughed bitterly. “Did he tell you this himself?” 

“Actually, he did. More than a few times.” 

“Well, I- wait, what?” He sounded quite genuine. “How did- “ 

“That doesn’t matter,” Katara interrupted, although Sokka could tell it did very much still matter. “I don’t know if you know this, but he is the Avatar. Surely you’ve heard of that somewhere up on your high horse. The bridge between- “ 

“The corporeal world and the spirit world, yes. I was paying attention earlier.” 

“What makes you think you’re so much more qualified to deal with Habi than the Avatar is?” Sokka fired at him. 

“Hei Bai,” Lee corrected once more. “And I never said I was- “ 

“You certainly implied it several times.” Sokka pointed a finger at him. “Don’t play that game with me.” 

“Look, I just- “ 

“Can’t stand a blow to your pride, huh?” Katara interjected, then groaned in frustration. “Guys!” 

“I- “ 

“Hey!” Sokka exclaimed. 

“Oh, don’t pretend. We both know- “ 

“If you let me finish my statement,” Lee said loudly. 

Katara and Sokka both shut up, although seething quietly. 

Lee let out a slow breath. “He doesn’t know anything, does he?” 

Katara and Sokka glanced at each other. “Were you listening to our conversation?” she asked. 

“No. But I can see it on his face. Besides, I’d dare to venture the person who was supposed to teach him is dead. Long dead.” 

Katara and Sokka exchanged another look. “Yeah,” Sokka answered, thinking of Gyatso’s skeleton at the Southern Air Temple. “Long dead… “

Lee glanced over at Aang, who still held his meditative stance. “The Avatar’s return have sent all the spirits into a frenzy. Without him, Hei Bai would still be pulling something, but because the Avatar’s here, it… it’s so much worse.” He pushed off the windowsill, stepping up to that he was in front of them. “I don’t know if he can handle it.” 

“Of course, he can,” Katara argued, immediately leaping to Aang’s defense just as she always did. “You don’t know Aang like I do.” 

Lee turned, looking slightly surprised. “I don’t, do I?” he challenged, then shrugged. “I guess I’ll take your word for it.” 

Sunset came all too quickly for Sokka’s liking. Even though it had been a bit since they left the South Pole, he was still not used to seeing the sun rise more than twice a year. He watched it sink behind the horizon, the sky turn a fiery orange, bathing everything around it in the same light. 

As the last rays of day died, Aang finally removed himself from the corner. He said nothing as he trudged past the two of them, looking pale and extremely ill. Sokka offered his boomerang, machete, or club, but Aang just stared fearfully at them, clutched his staff tightly to his chest. 

Thanks for that, Sokka thought bitterly, stuffing his boomerang back into its sheath. 

Aang stepped out of the building, out onto the steps. He stared mournfully back at the doors as they creaked shut behind him, then cautiously started down the steps onto the street.

“Hellloooo?” Aang’s voice floated back through the window Sokka had leaned out. “Spirit? Can you hear me? This is the Avatar speaking. I’m here to… try to… help… stuff.” He nodded, clearly reassuring himself and only himself. 

“This isn’t right.” Sokka turned to Katara. She had an uneasy expression on her face. “We shouldn’t sit here and cower while Aang waits for some monster to show up.” They had already been through enough together. Why would they abandon him now?

Beside him, Lee made a noise of contempt. 

Sokka clenched his fists. “What now?” 

Lee was leaning against the wall, arms crossed. “Oh, you’ll see.” 

Sokka wanted to make some snappy remark, but Key-fon spoke, breaking up the tension. “If anyone can save us, he can.” 

Like that was reassuring. “He still shouldn’t have to face this alone.” 

The sun sank completely behind the surrounding hills, and the sky became a deep bluish-purple.

 Aang trudged up to the entrance of the village. “The sun is set!” he called, as if it weren’t obvious. “Where are you, Hei Bai?” 

Sokka have expected some snarky comment from Lee, but the guy remained silent. 

Aang glanced around. “Well, Spirit, uh… “He slammed the butt of his staff into the ground and thrust a hand out, halting the nothing in front of him. “I hereby ask you to please leave this village in peace.” He spun his staff over his head, then slammed it into the ground once more. 

Unsurprisingly, nothing happened. 

Sokka and Katara exchanged a look. Was it really that easy? 

Aang muttered something to himself, shrugged, then turned and started back for the town hall. 

“So… that’s it?” Sokka glanced back at Key-fon. “Is- is it… gone?” 

Key-fon blinked, still staring out the open window. “I- I assume so?” He looked to them. “You are the Avatar’s companions. Shouldn’t you know?” 

“Well… “Katara trailed off, shared a glance with Sokka. “We’re- we’re not- I don’t know if- “she laughed nervously. 

“Well,” Sokka began, taking the attention off her, “we- “he cut off when he heard a sound like whispering in his head. He glanced at Katara, and she too was wearing a confused expression. The villagers were all frantically looking around, eyes wide and mouths open with terror. They all heard it too. 

“Shit,” Lee swore, and he, Sokka, and Katara spun back to the window. 

From the darkness at the entrance of the village emerged a creature from Sokka’s deepest nightmares. It was black and white with huge square shoulders, two large muscular arms, and two smaller ones sprouting from the space between its neck and arms. Its head was long, shaped like that of a wolf, but it had no ears and no eyes. At least no eyes Sokka could see. Its mouth was also like that of a wolf’s, but the teeth… there were so many, and they were so sharp. 

Hei Bai. The Black and White Spirit. 

The decimation of the village made much more sense now.

Sokka was paralyzed by fear. He had expected something grotesque and gruesome, but this… this was certainly worse that his imagination could ever conjure. 

Katara groped for his hand, finding it and tightening her grip around his wrist. 

Aang casually strode back to the village, not noticing the giant demon hovering behind him. The creature’s footsteps made no noise at all, Sokka realized. It must have barely been touching the ground. 

Lee hummed. “Still brave enough to go take him?” 

Sokka could not find it in himself to snap back. 

Hei Bai let out a loud, angry breath, and Aang’s eyes widened. He stopped, then slowly turned around, glanced up at the thing hovering over him. “You must be the Hei Bai spirit,” he greeted enthusiastically. “My name is- “ 

Hei Bai’s mouth opened in a bone-chilling screech, and a jet of blue-white light shot out, blowing Aang back. Clearly, the spirit did not care what his name was. Hei Bai then reared on his hind legs and let out another screech and jet of light, showing his full size.

And with that, he fell back to the ground, stomping away from Aang toward a half-demolished building. Each step shook the ground, and Sokka briefly wondered if he could decide when to be solid and when to not be. 

“My name is Aang!” he called. “I’m the Avatar, and I’m here to help!” When Hei Bai showed no interest, Aang yelled, “Hey! Wait up!” Then chased after him. Hei Bai slammed his head into the wood. What was left of the building crumbled, the bits and pieces tumbling to the ground. 

Sokka blinked, and Hei Bai was on the other side of the road, decimating another building. A flash of light. He destroyed the water tower with a jet of spirit light. With every flash of light, he was somewhere new, destroying something else. 

“Um,” Chan said from behind, “the Avatar’s methods are- “ 

Several pieces of debris flew toward them. Sokka, Katara, and Lee ducked out of the way. Poor Momo got hit head on and fell off the windowsill with a caterwaul. 

“-unusual,” Chan finished.

“It doesn’t seem to interest in what he’s saying,” Sokka said, finally shaking himself from his stupor. “Maybe we should go- “ 

“No!” Key-fon argued. “Only the Avatar stands a chance against the Hei Bai.” 

“Oh, and he’s doing a wonderful job of it,” Lee muttered. “He’ll get himself killed if he stays out there any longer. At least let me- “ 

“No!” Key-fon snapped. Lee recoiled. “You’ve done enough already.” 

Sokka could sense the guy was bursting to say something, but he kept his mouth shut, seething silently. 

“Aang will figure out the right thing to do, Sokka,” Katara said. Yet, she did not sound too sure. 

“Please!” Aang begged, leaping up onto the roof of a building. “Will you just try to stop destroying things and listen? I’m just trying to do my job as a spirit bridge! Will you turn around, please?” 

Hei Bai, on the other hand, seemed quite unconcerned with Aang’s pleadings, and busied himself with pulverizing another building. 

“I command you to turn around now!” Aang demanded. 

And Hei Bai did. 

“Oh,” Lee said thoughtfully. There was a hint of surprise in his voice. 

“What?” Sokka demanded. 

“I- “he shook his head. “I can’t explain it.”

Without warning, the spirit smacked Aang through the air. He flew into the roof of another building, slamming roughly into the hard tile and sinking to the ground. 

Sokka slammed his hand onto the windowsill. “That’s it! He needs help!” He ran for the door. Katara called out his name, but he had already made up his mind. He threw open the doors, drawing his boomerang. 

“Don’t let him touch you!” Lee shouted, bolting after him. 

Sokka skidded to a halt behind the spirit, who was towering over Aang once more. “Hei Bai!” he shouted. “Over here!” And with that, he chucked his boomerang at him. It anticlimactically hit the spirit in the rear and bounced off, clattering to the ground. 

Huh. “Not my best moment,” Sokka muttered, then sprinted up to Aang. 

“Hey!” Lee grabbed for him. “Don’t- “but Sokka’s shoulder slipped through his grip. 

The Avatar held his hands up, shaking his head. “Sokka, go back!”

Like hell he was. “We’ll fight him together.” 

“But I don’t want to fight him.” 

Sokka gave him a look. Of course he didn’t. This was Aang, for spirits’ sakes. 

“It doesn’t matter how many people fight him.” Lee appeared beside Sokka. “That’s not how you solve this problem.” 

Aang started to say something, but Sokka let out a harsh laugh. “Oh, it’s not?” he snapped, wheeling on Lee. “Care to give us any helpful advice?” 

The guy looked like he was about to snap back, but his face quickly changed. He saw a flash in Lee’s remaining eye, and the next thing Sokka knew, Lee had shoved him so hard he fell to the ground. Sokka caught a glimpse of a giant hand pass over his head. 

“Wait.” Aang frantically glanced around. “He’s- “ 

Aang never got to finished that statement as Sokka interrupted him with a yell. A hand, a large hand, was grasping his waist. Hei Bei had caught him. 

“Sokka!” Aang shouted. He extended his glider and took off after them, Lee not far on his heels. 

Hei Bei was dragging Sokka farther and farther into the woods, attempting to flee Aang. Sokka couldn’t help the terrified gasps and whimpers that escaped him. He might have played strong big brother for Katara (and maybe to save his pride a few times), but he didn’t think anyone could be brave when they were snatched up by a spirit of nightmares. 

Though he could barely see him in the dark, Sokka glimpsed Aang gliding between the trees, pursuing them. 

“Aang!” he shouted. “Over here!” 

Hei Bei suddenly emerged from woods, into the destruction of the forest. 

“Hang on, Sokka!” Aang held his hand out. 

Sokka stretched his out as well, straining to grab Aang’s. He was almost there- almost- he could feel Aang’s fingers touching his-

****

Aang could not help the gasp that escaped his mouth as Sokka’s fingers passed right through his. A moment and a flash of light later, Sokka and Hei Bai vanished entirely. But that… that couldn’t be possible. 

Aang glanced up just in time to see a tree directly ahead of him, then swerved to avoid hitting hit head-on. He lost control of his glider and plummeted toward the ground with a loud shout- 

He shot awake. “Sokka!” he shouted, receiving no response. When he surveyed the land around, there was no one around but him. I’ve- I’ve failed, he thought to himself. Aang sat on the ground for several more minutes, seething in his failure. How could he have lost Sokka like that? He had a grip on him, he had just let go, right? But no. Hei Bai had disappeared, so it could not have been Aang’s fault entirely. But… he still should have tried harder. 

Katara. What would she say to him when he told her he had lost her brother? Would she hate him, or would she continue to stick by his side? 

These questions bounced around in his brain as nighttime slowly ticked on by. Aang finally found it within himself to pick up his staff and push off the ground, slowly trudging back toward the village. He tried mentally practicing what he was going to say to Katara, but nothing seemed like it would console her. His stomach churned at the simple thought of having to tell her at all. He was not sure if he could do it. 

As he made it to the entrance of the village, he saw Katara sitting by the front, knees pulled up to her chest, Sokka’s boomerang clutched tightly in her hands. He approached just as Key-fon stepped up, and Aang heard the old man’s voice float toward him. 

“Your brother is in good hands.” He knelt by her, draping his old cloak over her shoulders. Katara pulled it tightly around herself. “I would be shocked if the Avatar returned without him.” 

Aang’s throat went dry. He couldn’t do this. 

Before Key-fon could say anything else, Aang stepped up. “Katara?” he said. “Katara, I lost him.” Better to get it over with quickly, he supposed. 

But neither Key-fon nor Katara responded. It was almost as though they did not even know he was there. 

Key-fon looked over toward the back of the village, where the sun was beginning to make its way over the wall. “The sun is rising,” he noted, as if it were not obvious. “Maybe he will return soon.” 

Aang made a face, then stalked right up to them. “I’m right here!” he said, leaning down close to Key-fon’s ear. He frantically waved a hand in front of Key-fon’s face, but the old man did not even notice him then. 

He heard the sound of harried footsteps behind and stepped out of the way as Lee came tearing out of the forest. Katara and Key-fon looked to him, both looking hopeful. 

But when he shook his head that hope immediately died. 

Aang narrowed his eyes as Lee walked right past him toward Key-fon and Katara. As he turned, the sun shined directly in his eyes, and he lifted a hand to shield them from it. 

It did nothing. The light shined right through. 

What? Aang glanced at his hand. In the light of the day, he looked transparent and… blue? 

He was transparent and blue. No one could see him, no one could hear him. No one even knew he was there. He had always heard stories of ghosts, but he couldn’t be a ghost… 

He was in the spirit world. 

Katara sat by the entrance to the village for the rest of the day. Aang could see that fatigue was beginning to wear on her. Her shoulders were drooping, and she dozed off every once in awhile only to jerk awake a moment later. 

Aang sat a few paces back from her, holding his staff straight-up next to him. Somehow, out of everything, he had retained that in the spirit world. “I’ll figure this out, Katara,” he said, “I promise.” She could not hear him, but it did make Aang feel somewhat better. 

He reached out in an attempt to give her a comforting pat on the shoulder, but his hand just passed right through. Disappointed, he sat a few paces away from her, staring at her hunched back. 

There were footsteps behind him, and Aang scooted out of the way as Lee approached. “You should get some rest,” he said to Katara.

She muttered something, pulled Key-fon’s cloak tighter around herself. 

A slightly annoyed expression passed over Lee’s face, but he simply knelt down next to Katara, lightly placed his hand on her shoulder. “You’ve been up all night,” he persisted. “I don’t know how long it was before that you slept, but you need it.” 

“I don’t need you to tell me what to do,” she snapped. 

“It wasn’t an order. It was a suggestion. There’s a difference.” 

She muttered something to herself again. 

“What?” 

“You were only one that came back,” she ground out. “Why? Why didn’t you help them?” 

He slid his hand off her shoulder and sat back on his heels. “I can’t.” 

Katara did not look too convinced by that. “Why? You were so eager to last night. You even ran out after them. Why were you the only one that came back when you weren’t too far behind Aang?” 

“I can’t really explain that.” 

“Is there something that you can?”

Lee shrugged. “I realize now that I can’t do anything because Hei Bai responded to the Avatar. He never responded to me.” 

Katara held his gaze for several moments. “That is a fat help. Of course, he responded to Aang. Aang is the Avatar. He’s the bridge between the worlds. Why would he do any different?” 

Lee nodded slowly. “Yeah. The bridge. Not a mediator… “ 

“What?” 

Lee shook his head. “Nothing.” His eyes trailed down to the ground. 

Several seconds of silence passed between them. “Do you know where they could have went?” Katara’s voice was much gentler now. 

“I’m not- “Lee was cut off when Appa approached with a loud rumble, nudged Katara with his nose. 

Aang leaped to his feet. “Appa.” He waved his hands over his head. “I’m right here, buddy!” Even if they could not see him, surely Appa, his oldest friend, could. Right? 

But, of course, he could not. Appa made no sign of a response toward Aang. 

Aang sighed. “But you can’t see me either.” 

Lee abruptly stood up. 

Katara glanced over at him. “What?”

“I- nothing.” 

She raised an eyebrow but did not question further. She got to her feet as well, turned to Appa. “I’m sure they’re on their way back. Maybe they even brought you some moon peaches as a treat.” They turned and walked back into the village, Appa’s approving rumble echoing back toward him. 

Aang let out a breath of frustration as he watched their retreating backs. “Now what am I supposed to do?” 

“Stop talking to yourself and start being useful.” 

Aang wheeled around, glider raised defensively. Lee was staring right at him. At him. Not through. 

“You- you can see me?” Aang asked stupidly. 

“Obviously.” 

Aang did a quick scan of the guy. He knew he had just spoken to Katara moments earlier, but he could see Aang in the spirit world. He did not seem to be blue or transparent, rather appearing quite solid, in fact. “But- but how?” 

“That’s not important. How did you get there?” 

“Get where?” 

A slightly annoyed expression passed over Lee’s face. “The spirit world, genius. Why are you there?” He made a face. “Well, it’s obvious why you’re there.” 

Aang blinked. “It is?” 

Lee’s eyes narrowed. “Hei Bai is a spirit,” he began slowly. “You- “he motioned to Aang” -are in the spirit world. I assumed- you know what, nevermind. I’ll let you figure it out on your own. I’ll say it again: How did you get there?” 

“How? Why?” Aang shrugged, shook his head. “I don’t know. I- I just am! You seem to be the one who knows all about spirits, you tell me.” 

“Passing into the spirit world is something that I know very little about,” he argued. “Ever since- “he hesitated over his next words. “Nevermind, that’s not important. Have you made contact with any of the other villagers or Hei Bai yet?” 

Aang scoffed. Why was he asking him all these questions? “I’ll say it once, and I’ll say it again,” he started, turning Lee’s words back on him. “You’re the one who can see me, and you seem to know all about the spirits. You tell me.” 

Lee studied him for several long moments. Aang felt as though eh were being looked at under a magnifying glass. “You are really a hopeless case, aren’t you?” 

“I- excuse me?” 

“You don’t know anything about spirits, do you? You’re just there by some happenstance?” 

The situation seemed quite dire to Aang, and yet, this guy would not shut his mouth. There were more important things at the moment than what Aang knew about the spirit world. He seemed to be an expert on the place --- at least he fancied himself to be. Why didn’t he just tell Aang? “I don’t know,” Aang deadpanned. “Why don’t you tell me?” 

“I- “his gaze shifted over Aang’s shoulder to the forest behind. 

Aang turned. A small white light was shining through the dark, and it was becoming bigger and bigger, quickly nearing Aang. 

“Sokka?” he called hopefully. 

“No,” Lee said. 

Aang squinted. As the light neared and neared, he could vaguely make out the shape. It was long, almost like a worm, and four-legged with claws, spikes on its back, and a large pair of wings. He knew that shape anywhere. And it certainly was not Sokka. 

It was a dragon. And he did not look too happy. 

Aang’s heart leaped in his chest. “Come on!” He swung his glider over his head, then reached out to grab Lee’s wrist before stupidly realizing that he would just pass through. 

But he felt something solid contact his palm. Surprised, Aang reeled his hand back and glanced up at Lee. However, the other guy’s gaze was entirely fixed on the approaching dragon. 

“We- or at least you- have to get out of here!” Aang urged. 

“No.” Lee shook his head. “He’s not going to hurt us.” 

The look on the dragon’s face clearly said otherwise. 

Welp. If he wanted to go, then he wanted to go. Aang was getting out of here. 

He extended his glider out and leaped into the air, flying for just a few feet before majestically crashing onto the ground.

What? He quickly to his feet and punched out. No air came from it, so he tried again. Still nothing. 

“I can’t airbend in the spirit world,” he realized aloud.  

“You can’t bend at all in the spirit world,” Lee said, finally breaking from his trance. “Well, you can’t. There are others that can, but the Avatar Spirit doesn’t exactly follow the rules of the- “he scoffed. “Rules. Who am I kidding? There are no rules.” 

Aang spun, raised his eyebrows. “What?” 

The dragon landed on the ground directly in front of Lee, raised its head up, staring down at them. It was blue and transparent, just as Aang was. 

Heroically, Aang stepped in front of Lee, shoving him to the side and held his hands out in a defensive stance. 

“What are you doing?” Lee sounded extremely disappointed, and to Aang’s great surprise, he felt it deep within his chest. 

“De- defending you?” 

Lee scoffed. “Well, clearly- “he stepped by Aang” -I don’t need defending.” 

Oh. Aang stepped back, heat rising to his cheeks. Now, he could tell that the dragon clearly wasn’t going to hurt them. 

The dragon lowered its head so that he was eye level with Lee. Lee place a hand on the dragon’s nose, held his gaze for several long moments. 

“What’s happening?” Aang asked, entirely confused. “Should I be in this conversation as well?” 

No response. 

Well, alright then. He placed his hands on his hips. “You don’t know where Sokka is, do you?” he addressed the dragon. 

No response. 

Fine. Be that way. 

After what felt like forever, the dragon lifted his head once more, and Lee stepped back. “His name is Fang,” he explained. “Avatar Roku’s animal guide.” 

“Like Appa is to me,” Aang connected, gaping up at the dragon. 

Lee nodded, then stepped to the side. Aang stared at him before the other guy waved him toward Fang. “Well? Go on. You’re needing a spirit guide, are you not?” 

Oh. Right. Aang cautiously approached Fang and looked up. “I need to save my friend and I don’t know how.” He paused for a moment, mulling over what he would say next, before it popped into his mind. “Is there some way for me to talk to Avatar Roku?” Fang was his spirit guide, after all. Roku surely knew something about it, and Fang knew how to get to Roku. 

Fang leaned down and curled around Aang and Lee. Aang stared at him for several moments, confused about what the dragon wanted, before he realized it, quickly hurrying over. He grabbed one of the dragon’s horns and hoisted himself onto his neck. 

“I hope that you can find the help I couldn’t provide,” Lee said, drawing Aang’s attention. “Be back before sundown. Hei Bai will return, and I won’t be able to fend him off.” 

“I will,” Aang vowed. 

Lee offered him a single nod. 

Aang glanced back at the village one last time. I’ll be back, Katara. And with that, Fang’s head lifted off the ground, and they took off into the air. 

Fang flew across the world faster than Appa ever had, faster than the laws of the universe should have ever allowed him to do. They passed over forests, towns, patches of deserts, out into the open ocean. On the horizon, Aang spotted a small, crescent-shaped island. A volcano sat in the middle, lava and smoke spewing down the sides and the top. As they neared the island, he could see a temple sitting amongst the magma. 

Fang dove for the entrance to the temple, winding through the halls, then shot upward to the ceiling. Too late, Aang realized that he was going to flying directly into it. 

“What are you doing!” he shouted, but the dragon did not seem to care at all. He accelerated faster and faster as they approached the ceiling, and a terrified scream made its way from Aang’s mouth. He closed his eyes and clapped his hands over them.

They passed right through the ceiling without incident, and when Aang opened his eyes, they had emerged in a large, circular chamber. On the wall in front of him was a golden statue of Avatar Roku, surrounded by flames behind. 

“I don’t get it,” he said allowed to Fang, sliding off the dragon’s neck. “This is just a statue of Avatar Roku.” He stepped up to it, then turned back to Fang. 

A tendril reached out from the dragon’s snout and lightly touched his forehead. Aang’s vision flashed, and suddenly, he saw a great ball of fire blasting its way through the sky. 

“A comet?” he said aloud as Fang’s tendril pulled back. “Is that what he wants to talk to me about?” Fang’s head dipped, and Aang took that as a confirmation. 

“When can I talk to him?” was the next question. 

Fang ducked his head down, and on the wall behind, Aang saw a small circle window. Light poured directly from it in a beam that struck to the left of Roku’s statue. Fang reached out a tendril and touched Aang’s forehead once more. 

He was watching days and nights pass in seconds. The sun rose and set, the sky brightened and darkened. With each passing day, the beam got closer and closer to the statue of Roku until it touched its face. 

“It’s a calendar!” Aang exclaimed when Fang pulled away. “And the light will reach Roku on the solstice.” 

Fang gave an approving huff. 

“That’s when I’ll be able to speak to Roku?” 

An approving growl. 

His gut sank. “But I can’t wait that long! I need to save Sokka now!” 

Fang dipped his head down once more, and Aang hopped back up on his neck. And with that, they were off once more, speeding back in the direction of the village. The sky was beginning to turn an orange color, the sun starting to sink below the horizon. Sunset was nearing. 

Before he knew it, Fang had brought him back to the decimation of the forest. Aang did not understand what they were doing here until a great panda statue was right in front of him. His body was sitting atop it in a meditative stance. 

“Whoa,” he breathed. That’s where he had been this whole time? 

Fang, once again, did not seem as though he was going to stop. Aang let out another shout, closed and shielded his eyes- 

He was atop the statue, sitting in that stance. He snatched his staff, then leaped off, softening his landing on the ground. He turned and stared up at the panda statue. 

Pandas were black and white. Hei Bai. The Black and White Spirit. If this forest was destroyed, and this was where Hei Bai emerged from every night… 

He swung his glider over his head and took off back to the village. He had a hunch. Whether it was the correct solution, he did not know yet. But he had to act on something. 

“You’re back!” Katara shouted triumphantly as he landed, throwing her arms around him. Aang felt a blush creep into his cheeks, and he was glad that, at least, Sokka was not here to see that. 

Katara pulled away from him, dropping her arms. “Where’s Sokka?” she asked as Lee approached a few steps behind her. 

Aang shared a glance with him before averting his eyes downward. “I’m not sure,” he admitted. 

She said nothing back, only turned and slowly trudged back into the town hall.

At this point, Lee stepped forward. “So. I take it your conversation with Avatar Roku didn’t go so well?” 

Aang looked up. “There wasn’t one.” 

Lee blinked. “What?” 

“I didn’t even get to speak to him.” 

“Then what... “The last rays of sun disappeared. Lee’s question slowly trailed off. 

“Excuse me,” Aang said then turned and headed for the entrance of the village. He stood there for what felt like hours, into the cold of the night. Wind began to blow, leaves gliding off trees and landing on the ground near him. His muscles were chilled, his joints stiff. Hei Bai had certainly emerged at this point last night. Maybe he was finally pleased, happy with what he had done. 

Aang resigned himself to that fact and turned back to the village. Wind chimes rang through the air as he passed a building. In hindsight, he should have taken that as a sign something bad was going to happen. 

Not even a breath later, the building exploded into a mess of concrete and wood. Aang let out a surprised shout and shielded himself with a airball. Hei Bai emerged from behind the destruction, reared on his back legs, screeching and shooting out a jet of that stupid spirit light. 

He distantly heard Katara’s voice telling him to run. 

Hei Bai let out another screech, then turned and stomped toward the town hall, toward Lee who was still standing on the front porch. In a flash of light, he was several feet closer. Another flash, even closer. 

Aang bolted, using the air behind to speed his steps. Just before Hei Bai could reach the town hall, he leaped into the air, carried by the gusts of wind, and flipped up and over Hei Bai. He glided down near the creature’s face, lightly rested his palm on the spirit’s forehead, just as Lee had done. In his mind’s eye, he saw it. Beneath the exterior of Hei Bai’s menace, he saw a panda’s mouth open in a cry of war. He flashed back to the panda statue. 

Aang landed in front of him. “You’re the spirit of this forest,” he said plainly. 

Hei Bai cut off mid-screech, rampage coming to a complete standstill.

“Avatar?” Lee asked behind. 

“Now I understand,” Aang continued, putting the pieces together as he spoke. “You’re upset and angry because your home was burned down.” Hei Bai’s head tilted ever-so slightly. “When I saw the forest had burned, I was sad and upset, but my friend gave me hope that the forest would grow back.” From his sleeve, he produced one of the acorns, holding it up for Hei Bai to see, then placed it one the ground. 

One of Hei Bai’s small, black hands picked it up, studied it carefully. The form of the spirit shimmered, dissolving into a giant panda. The panda turned and trotted down the main street. As he crossed the threshold of the village, a wall of bamboo rose. From that wall, several people emerged, all looking dazed and extremely confused. 

“Sokka!” Katara shouted just as Aang registered who it was. She sprinted from behind him and across the main road just as others did, running to their loved ones. 

“Well.” Lee stepped up beside Aang. “I have to say, I’m impressed. That didn’t take you much time.” 

“Thanks, I- wait. Are you implying that you knew what the problem was all along?” 

Lee shrugged. “Maybe I am. But you needed to learn something from it, and I did too. Spirits nowadays, they don’t need a mediator. They need a bridge.” 

There were those terms again. Mediator. Bridge. Used almost in the same sentence, the same way. “What do you mean by that?” 

“You have a lot to learn, Avatar,” Lee continued, dodging Aang’s question. “But I think you’ll learn it quickly.” 

“Rrriiight,” Aang said slowly. “I think I’m- I think I’m just gonna go seem them if that’s okay.” Not that he really wanted, needed, or cared about Lee’s permission. Aang raced over to Sokka, who was currently trying to pull himself away from Katara’s bear hug. 

“What happened?” he slurred when she finally stepped back. His eyes were unfocused, and he looked as though he had just woken from the world’s longest, best nap ever. 

“You were trapped in the spirit world for a whole day,” Katar explained. “How are you feeling?” 

“Like I seriously need to use the bathroom.” 

“Thank you, Avatar,” Chan said once everyone had been accounted for. “If there were only a way to repay your for what you’ve done.” 

“You could give us some supplies and money,” Sokka piped up. 

Katara elbowed him. 

“What?” He rubbed his stomach. “We need stuff.” 

“It would be an honor to help you prepare for your journey.” Chan bowed to them. He stepped away to gather items for them. 

“I’m so proud of you, Aang,” Katara said once he was gone. “You figured out what to do all on your own.” 

He felt another blush heating his cheeks, glad that it was dark, and Katara could not see it. “Actually,” he began sheepishly, rubbing the back of his neck, “I did have some help.” He motioned his head over to where Lee was tossing pieces of bread to a small blackbird. 

Sokka and Katara followed his gaze. Sokka was the first to look back, wheeling on Aang. “Him?!” He jabbed his thumb over his shoulder. 

Aang glanced around, then lowered his voice so that only they could hear. “Look, I was in the spirit world today.” 

He let them process that information. “You were?” Katara asked. 

Sokka squawked, “And you didn’t come and get me?!” 

“Yes, not the point,” he addressed Katara and Sokka respectively. “But, anyway, when I was there, no one could see or hear me. I tried to speak with Key-fon and you, Katara, but you made no reaction.” 

“Oh,” Katara responded. “I’m sorry.” 

“It’s not your fault!” Aang respond quickly. Too quickly, as Sokka raised an eyebrow, glanced between the two of them. “My point being that no one, not even Appa, knew I was there. But Lee did. He could see me. He- “he hesitated for a moment. It seemed like private information he was sharing, but this was Sokka and Katara. If he could not trust them after what they had been through together, then he could not even trust himself “ -he spoke to me. I- I even touched his wrist without passing through. I couldn’t touch anything solid when I was in the spirit world, but I could touch him. He could also see Fang as well, and he communicated with him.” 

“Fang?” Sokka asked. “Who’s that?” 

“Avatar Roku’s spirit guide.” 

“Avatar- wait, what?” 

“I’ll get there. But, he- he could do all this. Interact with spirits in ways that most people can’t, not even me. I had to be in the spirit world to understand them, but as far as I’m concerned, he wasn’t in the spirit world. He was still here. He also seems to know a lot about spirits.” 

“Your point?” Sokka continued. 

“I think we should ask Lee to come with us.” 

“Absolutely not.” 

Aang let out a puff of frustration. “And why not?” 

“Because he’s a completely stranger.” 

“And so was I!” 

“You’re the Avatar. That’s different.” 

Aang looked to Katara for backup. 

“From what Aang has told us,” she began, and Aang knew he was automatically going to win this. Sokka could not exactly go against Katara, after all, “Lee seems to know a lot about spirits. He talks about them like he’s met a lot of them or had a experience with them.”

Sokka crossed his arms. “And?” 

“I already said it, and I’m not going to repeat myself. Fang might have been here to help Aang this once, but Fang might not always be there. From what I understand, Aang made it to the spirit world by accident, right?” 

Aang nodded. 

“Right. Fang is in the spirit world, and Aang might not always be able to access the spirit world. But Lee seems to be here most of the time. We’ll always be able to turn to him if we bring him along.” 

“I’m going to need help with spirit stuff,” Aang added. “Without Monk Gyatso or anyone else to teach me, Lee seems like the best option. The only option, might I add.” 

Sokka held Aang’s gaze for several moments. “I see your point. I still don’t like it, but- “he shrugged” -I see that regardless of what I say, my vote is not going to count. Do whatever you will. If you wake up in the middle of the night with your throat slit, don’t come crying to me.” 

“Great!” Aang was practically bouncing on his toes as he hurried over to Lee. “Hi!” he greeted enthusiastically. 

Lee wheeled. “Uh… hi?” 

“DoyouwannagowithustotheNorthPole?” 

“I- “he blinked” -repeat that?” 

Sokka sighed. “Oh, Tui and La. This is turning out great… “ 

Aang swallowed and said it again, slower. “Do you wanna go with us to the North Pole?” 

Something between suspicion and hesitation passed through Lee’s eyes. “Why?” 

“To find Aang a waterbending teacher,” Katara added. 

“Cool.” Lee nodded slowly. “I’m not a waterbender. What do you need me for?” 

“I don’t know spirit stuff?” It came out as more of a question rather than a statement. “And you do? I need someone to teach me it?” 

“Okay.” Lee nodded slowly again. “Not exactly a convincing argument, kid.” He turned and started to leave. 

“Well, whaddya know?” Sokka mumbled. 

Aang sped around in front of Lee, holding his arms out in an attempt to stop him. “Just, please, listen to me. I don’t know spirits, and you do, and I don’t have anyone to teach me. You know a lot about spirits, and you really helped me today. And… I don’t know. I just feel that I need you.” 

Indecision crossed Lee’s face. There was something familiar about the look in his eye --- which, up close, had a ring of blue around the edges of his gold iris --- yet Aang could not place it. 

“Please?” Aang added, hoping it might make some difference. 

Lee glanced back at Katara and Sokka. “And, what do you think of this?” 

“I think he’s right,” Katara spoke first. “He needs someone to teach him, and you seem pretty knowledgeable.” 

Sokka made an I don’t know sound. 

When Lee glanced back at Aang, he still looked rather unsure. 

“I won’t stop bothering you unless you say yes.” 

“Oh, I’d certainly believe him on that account,” Sokka said. 

Finally, Lee shook his head and sighed. “There’s nothing holding me here now that Hei Bai has been dealt with.” 

“So… does that mean yes?” 

Lee shrugged. “If you want it to.” 

A giddy feeling rose in Aang’s chest. He bounced on his toes and moved to throw his arms around Lee’s waist. 

The older guy quickly stepped out of his reach. “No, I’m good.” 

“So,” Sokka said, “you’ve managed to make your way into the spirit world and drive away a pretty angry one. Can we get back on track now and get to the North Pole?” 

“No,” Aang answered. “There’s something else.” 

Chapter Text

Three Years Ago 

For as long as she could remember, Ummi had loved the water. She had loved its calm, its tranquility. She had lived on the water for as long as she had been alive, and even after, she remained. 

Her village was just as beautiful as the water, a relatively small collection of houses that floated atop the surface, untouched by the horrors of the war, of the world. It was a calm, tranquil place that she was happy to spend the rest of forever at. She loved to quietly trod upon the docks and piers connecting the floating huts. 

She loved the way the moon shone upon it, reflecting off the light of the clear river. Growing up, she had always been familiar with the moon. It was a part of her culture, of her people. One of the few connections to the life she had once had, to the people she had once known. She had been so far from her original home for so many years now --- for how many, she did not precisely know. She had stopped counting after about fifty years --- so she only had the few remaining things to cling to. Her people had revered the moon, the spirit of Tui, but she had always thought of it as more of a friend to the world. A comforting light, so unlike the raging, blaring heat of the sun, which always did so little to warm her original home. It was much more subdued, much quieter. 

Her companion would snort if she ever told him that. He had several things to say about the moon, and none of them were very nice. It wouldn’t be as “subdued and quiet” if you ever heard its voice. Damn thing won’t leave me alone. 

The water was a friend to the moon. They worked in tandem, push and pull. Tui and La. The moon and the ocean.

There were times when she missed her original home, when the homesickness grew to such a level that it was crippling and entirely overtaking, but she would always remember that she had found her place in the world, and that place was here. With her village. She had not always had a place, and there had been a period of several years where she had wandered the world aimlessly. She knew she should have passed on, and yet, she was still there. Unable to leave, stuck in a miserable existence where no one would acknowledge her. Even if they did, they would run away in terror. 

But then, Ummi had found him. Or maybe he had found her. 

The details did not matter. 

He was a wanderer, like her, only he had a choice and a purpose. When so many others retreated into the other world for no other reason than they were not needed here, that they did not belong nor did anyone want them, he chose to stay. He was too attached to this world, he had said, to the people in it. They may have been nothing more than corporeal beings, left to waste away as time passed on, he refused to go. “They don’t need me,” he said, “at least, not yet.” 

“And if they never need you?” Ummi remembered asking him. 

“Well, they’ll need something. And I’ve got plenty of information to share.” 

Together, they had found her village, and Ummi had never felt more at home. She had been hesitant to stay there after being with her companion for so long. She was afraid to leave him, the only person in the world who had given her any meaning, any purpose. 

“What do you want me to do?” she had asked him. 

“Whatever you think is best,” he had responded. 

Although it was untouched by the war, the village was a constant target for raids and robberies, often leaving the villagers injured, ill, and sick. Any doctor or healer that tried to come and help them would soon be driven away out of fear and terror that something might happen to them. 

The village needed her abilities; that much she knew. So, she stayed. She healed the people in the cover of night, when the rest of the village had gone to sleep. 

The next morning, when they awoke and found everyone back to perfect health, they had been overjoyed, but also confused. Who could have done this? 

She had wanted to reveal herself. Not to take all the credit and glory, but to let them know that they had someone watching over them. 

“It’s not wise,” her companion had warned her. “They’ll know soon enough. Superstition goes a long way, and if they believe they had a guardian always watching over them, they’ll never need to know if you’re real.” 

She continued this pattern for weeks and weeks. It came to a point where her companion said he had to leave. 

“Where are you going?” she had asked him. 

“Places.” 

“What kind of places?” 

“Boring places.” 

“Very specific.” 

“I know.” 

She flicked the side of his head. 

“You can come with me if you want,” he had offered. “I’m sure these people could fend for themselves for awhile.” 

Although it pained her, she said no. She had found her place in the world, and she was not leaving it. 

“And that’s your choice,” he said with a nod. He was not meant to stay put for too long. Ummi knew that much. He was getting restless, eager to be out in the world again. So, she had let him go. 

It was another fifty years before she saw him again. Every time he visited her, it would be for a few days, weeks, once even a month, but he always inevitably left again. Twenty or thirty years, even almost a century at one point. But he always came back to her. Somehow, in the back of her mind, she always knew he was there. 

She waited for him one night, when there was no one to heal. There was a cliff overlooking the village, the spot that they always met. He was overdue for a visit, she realized, having been returning to her more frequently in the past thirteen years. 

Dawn was just beginning to creep over the horizon when she felt it. 

It was an ache deep in her chest, something almost as powerful as homesickness. It was as though something had retreated from her mind, left her body entirely. Against her will, she felt tears prick at the back of her eyes, which was strange, considering she had not cried since her death. 

Her companion. He wasn’t there anymore.

Chapter Text

When Chan and the other villagers returned with a set of supplies, the three of them secured the set as quickly as possible, giving hurried thanks to the villagers and receiving them in return. It did not take Lee long to retrieve his stuff, as the bag he carried was significantly smaller than the ones she and Sokka had brought along with them, Katara noted. 

Sokka plopped down in the saddle just a few feet away from Lee, who was confined himself to the back corner. “You ever flown before?” 

Lee pulled his knees up to his chest. “Uh, I think so.” 

Sokka raised an eyebrow. “On what? And what do you mean ‘I think so?’ You either have or you haven’t.” 

“It’s… it’s been a while.” 

“Oh, so it has? I- “

Katara cleared her throat. 

Sokka cut off, retreating to his own corner of the saddle. “Well, I guess I can ask this at least: Have you ever flown on a sky bison before?” 

“Sort of.” 

Sokka’s eyebrow raised once more. “Sort of?” When Lee did not respond, Sokka just shook his head, apparently realizing they weren’t going to get any kind of direct answer. 

She heard a whooshing of air as Aang airbent himself up onto Appa’s head. “Alright- “he glanced back” -are we all ready?” 

“Oh, definitely!” Sokka responded, all-too enthusiastically with an all-too happy grin on his face. “I can’t wait to waltz right into the Fire Nation and into almost certain imminent death!”

She gave him an unamused look. “Good to know you’re always the optimist.” 

He shrugged. “I’m just being realistic. We’re just going off what Aang thinks the dragon was trying to tell him, right?” 

“It’s important that I speak to Avatar Roku,” Aang argued. “Maybe he’ll tell me some spirity stuff.” 

“Isn’t that what we brought him along for?” Sokka motioned to Lee, who looked as though he would rather be left out of this conversation entirely. 

“Yeah,” Aang relented, “but he might also have something else important to tell me.” 

“Like what?”  

“Like… a… a great ball of fire.” Aang nodded, although it seemed to be more for himself than the others. “Yes. There was a big ball of fire there.” 

Sokka snorted and sat back against the edge of the saddle. “That’s helpful.” 

“I just- “ 

“Well,” Lee interrupted, and Katara suddenly remembered that he was here, “maybe the only way you can figure out if you’re right or not is if you… oh, I don’t know. Get off the ground?” 

They all stared at him for a solid moment then glanced over the edge of the saddle. Indeed, Appa was still sitting firmly upon the earth, probably wondering why they were just staying there forever. The villagers were staring at them with quite confused expressions plastered upon their faces. 

“Oh,” Katara said loudly. “Maybe you’re right.” 

Even in the dark, she could see Aang’s blush. “Sorry,” he called to the villagers. He flicked Appa’s reins and said, “Yip, yip!” And with that, they were off into the night sky. 

Katara sat back in the saddle and fixed her brother with a glare. Sure, he could complain and argue all he wanted (It was one of Sokka’s few talents, complaining.) about venturing into the Fire Nation, but it was what Aang needed. She did not like the thought anymore than he did, but there had been something unspoken that passed between them when they set out to rescue Aang, that they may end up doing things that they were not comfortable with, or things that scared them. Traveling into the Fire Nation fell into both of those categories simultaneously, but they could make it. They would fine. As long as she told herself that, she felt better. 

Sokka took notice of her glowering. “What?” 

“Oh, nothing.” 

“You know, when you say it like that, I know there’s something.” 

“There’s always something,” she swore she heard Lee mutter, and she glanced over at him. The wind was blowing his hair out of his face, and she caught a glimpse of the extent of the scar damage. It looked as though it had been caused by a burn --- a pretty nasty one at that. Katara had seen several burn scars throughout her life. It took up the whole left half of his face, all the way to his ear, which had taken some fo the damage. It was slightly curled under and shriveled in. 

“Can you hear out of that ear?” 

The words were out of her mouth before she realized it. Both Sokka’s and Aang’s heads whipped around to them. 

Lee’s eyes widened ever-so slightly, and he stiffened. “Partially,” he ground out. She had clearly touched a sensitive spot. 

Sokka, however, must have either not taken notice of it or did not care that it made him uncomfortable. “Can you see out of that eye?” 

Katara fixed him with an evil glare, but Lee just answered with the same strained, “Partially.” 

Sokka must have taken the hint there because he shared a look with Katara and sat back. 

Aang, however, still had not gotten the memo. “How’d you get it?” 

There was what looked like a flash of blue in Lee’s right eye. “Don’t you have a bison to be steering?” 

A sudden strange feeling washed over Katara. She had no right to ask about those things. If he did not want to tell them, then he did not have to. Why should they continue to pester and question him about it?

Aang’s spine stiffened. “Oh, right.” He turned back around. 

Another moment of silence passed between the group before everyone’s attention once again turned to Lee as he shifted his position, crossing his legs. “So,” he began, then began to say something else. 

“So,” Sokka interrupted. 

Lee kept his eyes on Sokka for a moment, an annoyed expression in them, then continued, “You said you were going to the North Pole to find the Avatar a waterbending teacher?” 

Sokka nodded, and Katara affirmed, “Yes We are taking Aang to the North Pole.” 

“So… that means you’re from the Southern Tribe?”

Another nod from Sokka. 

He hummed thoughtfully. “I didn’t think that anyone had left there since the war started. And from what I know, Tribesmen tend to stick close to home. What drove you out?” 

“We came along with Aang to help him find a waterbending teacher,” Katara said simply. “I’m sure we told you that somewhere in our conversation.” 

He did not look entirely convinced. “That’s not it, though, isn’t it? Why would you leave the comforts of home for that?” 

“You say it like this isn’t the one of the most important things we will ever do.” 

“I didn’t say it wasn’t. I’m just wondering what it was that drove you out.” 

Sokka scoffed. “You know, there are several reasons people leave home. We don’t have to have another.” Regardless the fact there actually was, Katara added to herself. “You’re about the same age as us.” 

There was a slight flicker in Lee’s eyes, but it was so subtle and slight that Katara was sure she imagined it. 

“Shouldn’t you be at home too?” Sokka continued. “Or did you leave just as we did?” 

“I left,” he answered simply, and she was honestly surprised to get such a straight answer so quickly out of him. “I didn’t have much of a choice, but I did leave.” 

Katara and Sokka exchanged a look. 

“So,” Lee paused, “is there something you want to tell me?” 

“No,” Sokka answered firmly, still looking at Katara. 

“That’s a lie.” 

“No, it’s not.” Sokka finally turned and looked at him. “We’re not lying.” 

Lee was silent for several long moments. “I’ve met a lot of people in my life,” he finally said, “talked to most of them. Believe me, I can tell when someone is lying.” 

Sokka started to speak again. 

“The back-and-forth glances are a bit of a dead giveaway, in case you’re wondering. If you want to keep a secret, don’t keep doing that.” 

Katara, upon realizing that they had in fact been doing that, fought the urge to glance back at Sokka. Her brother held up a hand. “One second.” He scooted across the saddle to Katara. “Should we tell him?” he asked, volume low. 

“Tell him what? The whole truth about why we left and that creep, everything we’ve been on, or the other thing?” 

“What’s the other thing?” Aang piped up. She had almost forgotten that he was here. “Sorry,” he said over his shoulder, voicing her question. “I’ve only caught pieces of the conversation. What’s going on?” 

“You just worry about steering the bison,” Sokka called ahead, then turned back to Katara. “Maybe just the creep part. Maybe we should save the whole you-know-what until later.” 

Katara nodded once. “Okay.” She started to move away but quickly backtracked. “Are you sure?” 

“You were the one that wanted to bring him along.” 

“That was Aang!” 

“You still agreed to it,” Lee called over the wind. 

Sokka opened his mouth to say something else, but it quickly cut off, an expression of complete and utter defeat coming over his face. “Don’t tell me he’s been eavesdropping on us the whole time.” 

Katara just shrugged. 

“Also,” Lee added, “you might not want to call whatever it is a you-know-what. That makes it sound like a… I’m not gonna finish that statement. Probably better if you don’t hear.” 

Katara sighed through her nose, then scooted across the saddle toward him before she could have any more doubts. “Should I start from the beginning?” 

“I mean… “Lee shrugged. “Logically, yeah. But go on ahead and start anywhere. I’m sure I’ll pick up on it.” 

She could not tell if he was being sarcastic or serious, so she just started from the beginning anyway. “So, Sokka and I, we found Aang in an iceberg… “and she went on and on, from Aang’s capture at the hands of the Fire Nation commander to the Western Air Temple to Kyoshi Island and Suki to Omashu to Haru’s village all the way up until they reached Key-fon’s village. Sokka occasionally dropped in to add details. 

“Did I miss anything?” she said when she finished, glancing at both Sokka and Aang. “Because I think I missed something.” 

“No, I think you got it all,” Aang called. 

Lee had been silent through her whole story, showing very little emotion and asking no questions. Finally, he spoke, “The Fire Nation commander. What did you say his name was?” 

“I- “she thought back on it” -I didn’t.” 

“I think I might’ve heard it,” Aang said. “Maybe it was Zhen. Or Chao? Or Jan?” 

“Zhao?” Lee guessed. 

“Yeah! That one!” Aang shuddered. “I didn’t like him. He was creepy.” 

“I don’t think anyone does.” Lee sat back in the saddle, crossed his arms. “Probably not even his own mother.” 

“Do you know him?” Sokka asked. 

“I’ve encountered him a few times, here and there.” 

“There was another guy on the ship as well,” Aang piped up again. “He was older and shorter, a little round too, might I add. And I don’t mean that in a rude way, I’m just saying he was somewhat- “ 

“Did you catch his name?” Lee perked up a bit, showing a bit of what looked like genuine interest. 

“No. I didn’t.” 

“Oh.” 

“Would you have known him as well?” Katara asked. 

Lee shrugged. “Depends. What was Zhao doing in the South Pole?” 

“He was there for a raid,” Sokka said bitterly. 

“I thought those stopped years ago.” 

“Well, they didn’t.” Sokka did not drop the bitter tone. “We haven’t had one since… in a while.” 

Katara lightly touched the spot where her mother’s necklace used to be. When she noticed Lee’s eyes follow it, she quickly pulled her hand away. “Yeah. There hasn’t been one in a while. There was this huge beam of light that shot out of the iceberg. Zhao used that as a pretense for a raid.” 

“And then used that as an excuse to capture the Avatar,” Sokka added. “Fun times.” He nodded. “Well,” he then exclaimed loudly out of nowhere, “I’ll take over steering Appa, you guys get some rest.” 

“What?” Aang jerked around, clearly forgetting that he was, in fact, still steering Appa. “But, Sokka, I’m not- “ 

Sokka made a weird coughing noise and jerked his head none-too-subtle toward Lee. Katara saw a flash of annoyance pass across the other guy’s face. 

Aang opened his mouth to question further, so Katara interrupted. “Yeah, maybe you should, Aang. You’ve had a long ordeal.” She mimicked Sokka’s movement, although hers was much less pronounced. 

“Yeah, Aang,” Lee inputted. “You definitely should.” 

On Aang’s shoulder, Momo opened his mouth in a giant, exaggerated, dramatic yawn. 

Aang looked between the three of them. “Ooooh,” he breathed. “Oh, yeah. I am tired, I guess.” He might as well have said the words with a knowing wink. 

“Alrighty.” Sokka nodded toward Katara and Lee. “You guys should get some rest. Seriously.” 

Katara grabbed her rolled up sleeping bag from their pile of stuff and laid down, closing her eyes. Despite the fact that she was exhausted, she still only feigned sleep, fighting off the darkness that was threatening to overtake her. She swore she heard Lee mutter something about not being the one trapped in the spirit world all day before he went completely silent. 

After a few minutes, in which Katara found that she was nearly drifting off despite her best efforts, she was shaken awake. “C’mon,” Sokka whispered. 

Katara slowly opened her eyes then peeled herself off her makeshift sleeping bag pillow. Aang had turned completely around on Appa’s head, sitting near the base of the bison’s neck, and Sokka had slid up to the front of the saddle. He beckoned her toward them, urging her to move faster. 

As she slipped over to them as quietly as she could, she kept her eyes on Lee. He had laid back with his head resting on the back of the saddle, which couldn’t be comfortable, she thought to herself, rubbing the back of her own head. 

“Look,” Sokka said as they all leaned closer together, “I know you guys are going to be entirely shocked, but I have a bad feeling about him.” 

“I can hardly contain myself,” Katara muttered. Sokka did not like anyone, but they had already gone over this several times. 

“What don’t you like about him?” Aang asked innocently. 

“I can’t really describe it,” Sokka answered. 

Aang shrugged. “I think he’s fine.” 

“You like everyone.” 

“That’s not true. I don’t like- “ 

Sokka held up a hand. “I don’t need to hear the list now.” 

“He can probably hear us talking,” Katara pointed out. “He already heard the noise over the wind when Aang couldn’t hear it.” 

“And he knew who Zhao was. Pretty well, if I gauged his reaction right.” 

Aang shrugged. “Maybe’s Zhao’s just a famous Fire Nation commander. We can’t rule out that yet.” 

“I’m not entirely sure about that,” Sokka argued. “I mean, with everything going on in the last hundred years, I’m sure the Fire Nation has had more famous commanders than that guy. C’mon, we escaped from him, and while I like to think we’re something fearsome… eh, I don’t.” He shook his head. “There’s just something… off. Yeah, that’s the right word. There’s something really off about him.” 

“You thought that about me,” Aang said. “You thought I had summoned the Fire Nation to you.” 

“Well, now I know better, and are you ever going to let that go?” 

“Nope.” 

“I don’t know, Aang,” Katara finally said. “I think Sokka’s actually right about this one.” 

“Wait, did you just agree with me?” 

“Don’t let it go to your head, it won’t happen again for a long time. We’ll just have to keep a close eye on him if he’s going to stay with us long-term.” 

“But what if that’s not enough?” Sokka cast a glance at Lee. “I don’t know what happened to him, but I’m willing to be that scar has something to do with it.” 

A look of unease immediately came over Aang’s face, and he squirmed slightly. “I don’t know. That seems like a personal thing he doesn’t want to talk about.” 

“But that’s exactly my point.” 

“But that’s not fair to him, to make him tell us if he doesn’t want to. He’s only been with us for a few hours at this point.”

“It was obviously given to him by a firebender,” Sokka continued on, acting as though he had not heard Aang’s concerns. “Only someone with that kind of ability could’ve done something like that. And, if he has any connection to the Fire Nation, then that would explain how he knew who Zhao was, and- “ 

“And you’re going way too far,” Katara interrupted. “I agree with you that we need to keep an eye on him, but you’re just starting to assume way too much for my liking.” 

“I’m just coming up with ideas. Keep them in the back of your mind. One of them might be right.” 

“But we don’t actually know if he knows that much about them. It might just be Zhao that he- “ 

“Now,” Sokka ignored her, “the question remains what the relationship- “he cut off with a shocked cry as something splashed into his eye. Sokka sputtered, then wiped the water away. “Did you do that?!” he demanded, tone accusatory. 

“No.” At his skeptical look, she continued, “I’m telling the truth!” 

“That would be a first. I- “More water, a much bigger wave this time, splashed him in the face. Sokka whipped around to Aang, but the kid just put his hands in the air, shook his head. 

Sokka leaped to his feet. “Alright, who did that? I know it was you!” He pointed at the clouds around. Shockingly, he received no answer. 

After a moment, he slumped back to the ground with a defeated sigh. “I give up. The universe just hates me today.” 

“I’m sure it does most days,” Katara commented, crawling over to her sleeping bag. “Now, if you’ll excuse me, I’ve had enough to Sokka’s conspiracy theories for one day.” 

“My ‘conspiracy theories’- “he made air quotes” -might end up saving your life one day.” 

“Oh, I’m sure they will,” she muttered, fluffing her bag back up. She glanced at Lee, who was still fast asleep. She thought, for a moment, she saw a smirk on his face. 

But it must have been a trick of the moonlight. 

Katara shook her head. Whatever, she said to herself as she collapsed on her makeshift pillow, sleep immediately taking over her. Those problems could wait until tomorrow.

Chapter Text

The sun rose bright and early the next day, the day of the solstice. 

Sokka was greeted by the burning ball of gas much earlier than he would have liked to be, what with it searing through his eyelids. He would grumble to himself, then turn over in an attempt to shield himself from the light. However, Appa would then also turn, and Sokka would once again be facing the sun. After this cycle continued over and over, he eventually gave up and just decided that waking would be easier instead. 

Once he managed to shake the sleep off, he scooted over to the edge of Appa’s saddle and peered down. Below was a great mass of blue, and it took him a good moment or two to recognize that it was the ocean. 

“How close are we to the temple?” he called up to Aang. 

“We’re closer than we were, but still not enough.” He flicked Appa’s reins. “We need to go faster, buddy!” 

Appa offered a disgruntled rumble for a response and picked up a little speed. 

Lee made a contemptuous noise from his spot on the other side of the saddle, and Sokka jumped. He had forgotten the guy was here. 

“Aang!” His attention was drawn to Katara, who was leaning over the edge of the saddle watching behind them. “We’ve got company!” 

Sokka leaned around her, as did Lee. He was so far over the edge of the saddle that Sokka thought he was going to fall out. “Yeah, no shit… “he muttered. 

“It’s gaining fast!” Sokka added, eyes falling upon the large Fire Navy ship trailing close behind them. He squinted, seeing that there was something large and smoking on the deck of the ship. A flash of light told him that it had been lit on fire. 

He saw some sort of movement, and the smoking thing began to rise and rise, becoming larger and larger in Sokka’s eyes. Too late did he realize that it was coming toward them, faster and faster- 

“Fireball!” Katara shouted up at Aang.

Aang shouted something Sokka could not discern back, then jerked Appa’s reins to the right. The bison swerved to avoid the fireball, and it soared up and over, arcing over them and falling harmlessly back down into the ocean. 

“We have to get out of its range before it shoots anything else at us!” Katara shouted ahead, as if that were not obvious. 

“Can’t you make Appa go any faster?” Sokka shouted as well. 

“Yeah,” Aang called back, “but there’s just one little problem.” 

They emerged from the clouds, and Sokka leaned over the edge of the saddle to peer around Aang. A huge line of Fire Navy ships blocked a path between them and safety on the other side. There were two rows, sailing parallel to each other in opposite directions. It stretched for about as long as Sokka could see. 

“Oh, a blockade,” Lee muttered dryly behind him. “Best way to start the morning. Those ships are part of Zhao’s fleet, and I’m willing to be that this one is too.” He motioned to the ship trailing them. “But those… “he trailed off. 

“What?” Sokka wheeled on him just as Aang and Katara did as well. “Those what?” 

Without taking his eyes off the blockade, he answered, “They’ll shoot something far worse and far more than the one.” 

Of course. He had been up for a grand total of five minutes, and today was already getting better and better. 

“If we fly north,” Aang said, drawing all attention to him, “we can go around them! It’s the only way we’ll get there safely!” 

“There won’t be enough time!” Katara argued. “It’ll take too long! We’ll miss the solstice!” 

“I knew this was a bad idea,” Sokka muttered to himself. Regardless, he said louder, “We’ll get through this together.” They had gotten this far, there was no way they were turning back now or missing the solstice. “Let’s run this blockade!” 

After a moment of hesitation, Aang spurned Appa forward 

And immediately, Sokka regretted his decision. 

When Lee had said that the other ships would shoot far more than the one tailing him, to say Sokka was not expecting this would be quite an understatement. He was expecting a lot, but not what looked like a million comets arcing up through the air, attempting to hit and strike them out of the sky. He could hear the sizzling, feel the wave of heat flying toward their faces, see the thick, dark trails of smoke the fireballs were leaving in their wave as they came closer, closer, closer- 

He heard Aang and Katara scream. Sokka let out a panicked noise and threw himself against the saddle, hands over his head, closed his eyes- 

But somehow, Appa expertly maneuvered through all the fireballs, twisting and turning, dipping down and rising up, all without Aang’s direction. Sokka could feel the heat sear by hit, hear the fireballs whooshing past and exploding at different heights. A few embers fell onto his sleeves and the saddle beside him. 

He felt them rise higher, the air chill almost instantly. When he opened his eyes, he saw they had soared up and over the clouds. 

“Are we in the clear?” Sokka asked timidly. 

“For now,” Aang answered, “and I think that- “ 

“Oh, shit,” Lee muttered behind, and just what he was swearing about became obvious a moment later when more fireballs came whooshing up through the clouds again. They did not all fly in the same direction, instead coming from in front, behind, left, and right, in different, sporadic directions. The air was becoming smoky and hazy now, and Appa was having a difficult time seeing, his movements jerky as he dodged the fireballs to the best of his abilities. The three of them in the back of the saddle were thrown around with each dodge. No matter how hard Sokka tried to hold onto the edge of the saddle, his grip would always slip from the rim with each new moment. He had almost become used to the sensation when two fireballs shot up from the clouds and collided in an explosion of flames. Sokka’s vision went hazy, and he reached out for the saddle when- 

The saddle was not there anymore. 

At this realization, he let out an uncharacteristic, high-pitched scream. 

Through the haze of the clouds, he could see Katara reaching out for him, but she quickly disappeared from his line of sight as he plummeted down through the sky. 

He fell through the cloud. It was ice cold, water soaking his clothes. When he emerged on the other side, tumbling down, down, down, he saw the great blue expanse of the ocean. Usually, landing in water would be better than on solid ground. However, at certain heights, the surface tension of water was about the consistency of concrete, and anyone who fell on it would most likely splatter into a million pieces. 

Sokka was sure he was far over that height when he fell. His death was surely going to hurt. 

Suddenly, Appa appeared at the corner of his vision, flying just in time with him. As Sokka fell farther and farther, he could see Katara reaching out for him. He reached out for her. 

Their hands made contact, and Lee reached up and grabbed Sokka’s other arm. He and Katara pulled Sokka down into the saddle, and Katara wrapped her arms tightly around him. 

Appa dipped down into the ocean for a moment, splashing water onto all of them, then soared back up. 

The onslaught of fireballs continued, their range much lower and more contained now that Appa was closer to the surface of the ocean. Sokka looked up over the edge of the saddle to see a fireball heading directly for them. 

Aang let out a yell and threw himself off Appa’s head. Flying through the air, he did some kind of spinning kick, making contact with the fireball. It exploded into a cloud of dust, embers, and debris, showering them with it. 

It was at that moment that Aang apparently realized he was no longer being supported. He scrambled aimlessly through the air for a moment, flailing her arms, until Appa caught up. Aang slammed back onto him, and Sokka and Katara each caught one of his arms to save him from sliding off. 

Appa let out a loud rumble and picked up more speed. They went faster and faster, farther and farther, sailing right through the towers of two passings ships- 

And they were on the other side. Sokka looked back, half-expecting them to shoot something else at Appa, but nothing came. 

Aang let out a victorious whoop. “We made it!” He pumped a fist into the air, and Sokka could see the grin on his face. 

“We got into the Fire Nation,” Sokka said, fear creeping into his voice. The prospect of what they were about to do suddenly seemed much more real now that they were here. “Great… “ 

Katara’s arms dropped from around him as she sat against the edge of the saddle. Her face was very pale. “We made it. Barely… “ 

“Don’t expect the rest of it to be a party.” Lee’s eyes were still trained on the blockade far behind. “That was far too easy.”

Sokka’s head whipped around. “Excuse me?” 

Lee looked back. “What?” 

Sokka blinked. “What do you mean ‘far too easy?!’ I don’t know if you noticed, but we almost died. Several times.” He pointed to himself. “I could’ve been nothing but insides and intestines in the middle of the ocean.” 

“It’s probability,” Lee said, as if it were the simplest thing in the world. “Even if they didn’t try and shoot at us when we were on this side, it takes a firebender to light those. Considering the amount of ships and the number of things they shot at us, there’s probably hundreds of firebenders on each of those ships. Also taking into account that this is Zhao we’re talking about, and he’s one himself. They didn’t need the catapults, they always could have shot at us themselves… “ 

Sokka shrugged. “So?” 

“So?”

He felt a flare of irritation. Lee had been with them a total of twelve hours or less, and Sokka understood about three percent of the things that came out of his mouth. “Are you going to finish that statement or leave us hanging?” 

Lee sat back in the saddle and crossed his arms, fixing Sokka with a falcon-like stare. “You’re the smart one, or at least you think you are. You tell me.” 

His cheeks flushed, and Sokka opened his mouth to retort back. He pointed an accusatory finger at Lee. 

“So, what you’re saying,” Katara spoke first, “is you think they might’ve let us go?” 

Sokka’s finger paused midair. “That’s what I was going to say.” 

“Really?” Lee raised an eyebrow --- the only one he had left. 

“Wait!” Aang called from his place on Appa’s head. “Why would he have let us go? He was pretty intent on capturing me back at the South Pole?”

“Oh, I don’t know, Aang,” Sokka began. Katara must have sensed what he was about to do and said his name in warning, but he did not listen. Instead, he turned to Lee, squared his shoulders and sized up the guy. “Why don’t you ask the one who knows it all over here?” 

Lee’s head tilted up slightly, and he was looking down his nose at Sokka. It was then that Sokka noticed the unusual color of his right eye --- gold with a ring of blue around the outside of the iris. “When we get to the temple, it will be easier for him to corner the Avatar.” 

“Aang,” Sokka corrected. 

“What?” Aang asked. 

“No, I wasn’t talking to you.” 

“But you said my name.” 

“Fly the bison.” 

Aang glared at him, then turned back to his task, grumbling. 

Sokka drew in a shaky breath, attempting to keep his temper in check. “When we get to the temple, it will be easier for him to corner Aang. If you’re going to travel with us, then it would be polite to start referring to him by his name. Of course, politeness is probably a forgein concept to you.” 

“Then shutting your mouth for five seconds is one to you,” Lee answered. Sokka started to retort, but realized if he did, he would let Lee win. So, he said nothing for the rest of the flight to the temple. And that was the end of it. 

They flew until dusk, until the sky began to turn a pinkish-red color. They had all been rather still and quiet until Aang broke the silence with a sudden exclamation of, “There is it!” 

The other three shot up, peering over Appa’s head to where Aang was pointing. In the middle of the ocean was a thin, crescent-shaped island. A large, active volcano spewing smoke sat in the middle, and Sokka suspected that was what had created the landmass. Red hot lava spewed down the sides of the volcano, and in the distance, Sokka could see some kind of vague structure. 

They landed in a small crater, where Appa could stay hidden from the sight of anyone. At the top of the hill was the giant red temple Aang indicated as the place they needed to go. 

When the four of them slipped off Appa, the giant bison let out a big sigh and plopped down on the ground. 

“You did it, Buddy,” Aang said, patting Appa’s head. “Nice flying!” 

Appa let out another groan and flopped over on his back. 

“Aw,” Katara cooed, scratching his belly. “You must be tired.”

“No,” Sokka said as he finished his stretching. “I’m good! Refreshed ad ready to fight some firebenders!” He made a few mock punches in the air. 

Katara turned and gave him a deadpan look, hands on her hips. “I was talking to Appa.” 

Sokka stopped, cheeks flushing with heat. “Well, I… I was talking to Momo.” 

Momo, who was hanging upside down on a tiny tree branch like a sloth, gave an inquisitive warble. Sokka could sense some silent judgement radiated from Lee. 

“Stay hidden, buddy.” Aang patted Appa’s nose a few times, and then started off for the temple. Katara followed, then Lee, Sokka bringing up the rear. 

As Lee passed Appa, the bison let out a puff of air and nudged his hand with his nose. The other three stopped as Appa did it again. 

“Huh,” Aang commented. “That’s weird.” 

“What?” Lee asked. 

“He does that when he recognizes someone.” 

“Oh,” Lee said slowly. “Well, it’s not like I haven’t been with him for the past twelve hours.” 

“He’s never done that to me,” Sokka piped up, “or Katara.” 

Aang shrugged. “I don’t know. I can’t read his mind or anything.” He shrugged again, then set off like nothing was wrong. After a moment’s hesitation, Katara followed him. Lee, however, was still staring at Appa. 

“Well?” Sokka came up behind him, shoved him forward. A bit of glee rushed through him as he did it. “Get going.” 

Lee threw Sokka a glare, then continued on. They took the only path up to the temple, which was a long staircase that traveled up as far as Sokka could see. The whole island seemed eerily still and silent, and Sokka felt as though they were the only people left in the world for a moment. 

“I don’t like this,” he muttered to himself, attempting to break the silence. 

“I don’t either,” Lee said back. “Something doesn’t feel right.” 

Sokka snorted. “Uh, yeah. I could’ve told you that way back there. Besides, you had a choice whether or not to come. I don’t really have one but to be here.” 

“You know, I’m with you on this.” 

“I- hold on, what?” Sokka’ steps slowed to a halt, as did Lee’s. He was so caught off-guard that the guy was actually agreeing with him. Between the incident with Haribo and the conversation last night on Appa, he had probably shared a total of two hundred or less word with this guy, but Sokka already had a good read of him. He was standoffish, arrogant, and rude. Sokka half-expected every word that with every word that come out of his own mouth, a disagreeing one would come from Lee’s. 

The other guy shrugged. “I agree with you. I get the impression you think this is a completely stupid, idiotic idea, and I cannot help but agree. This is a bad idea, but it’s what the Avatar wants. And you can’t always make sense of everything the Avatar does.” 

“So… you’re agreeing with me, but not?” 

“Am I though?” He gave Sokka a grim smile, then continued on after Sokka and Katara. 

Sokka just blinked and shook his head. He would wait until later to figure out what the guy was talking about. 

The rest of the trek was continued in silence until they made it up to the entrance, ducking down behind a wall right across from it. 

“I don’t see any guards,” Sokka observed allowed, keeping his eyes on the entrance. It was an open doorway surrounded by the outline of a golden flame. 

“The Fire Nation must’ve abandoned this temple when Avatar Roku died,” Katara guessed. 

“They wouldn’t,” Lee said. “Their current views on the Avatar notwithstanding, this was still a very important place.” 

Sokka and Katara exchanged a look. “How would you know that?” she asked, turning her attention to him. 

But Lee was saved from having to answer when Aang spoke. “It’s almost sundown.” He vaulted the wall. “Let’s go.” They followed, sprinting inside the temple. 

The inside was large and spacious, with high ceilings and wide rooms, all lit with eerie red lanterns attached to various points along the wall. Aang took them through the hallways, going down lefts and rights, up staircases. They walked quietly, on tiptoe, except for Lee, who was looking around at everything as though he were a tourist appreciating the architecture. Sokka thought he might be going crazy because Lee’s footsteps seemed to make noise at all. 

There was a scratch behind them. 

Sokka stopped. “Wait. I think I heard something.”

“You did,” a new voice answered. Their group wheeled around. 

Standing in the hallway they had just emerged from was a group of five red-robed men with tall, odd-looking hats perched atop their heads. “We are the Fire Sages,” the lead one announced, voice carrying throughout the open chamber. “Guardians of the Temple of the Avatar.” 

He heard a sword being drawn. Sokka’s eyes flitted over to where Lee has unsheathed his swords, then split them into two with long, curved blades. Which, if he had to admit, was pretty freaking awesome. 

“Great!” Aang said loudly, and Sokka jumped. “I am the Avatar.” 

“Kid,” Lee hissed warningly. 

The lead Fire Sage dipped his head. “We know.” And with that, he drew in a breath, then punched a fireball out at them.

Before Sokka could think to do anything, Lee shoved Aang out of the way and sliced downward with his swords at the fireball as it came to meet him. It dissipated upon impact, a faint burning smell sizzling through the air. 

Sokka blinked. Wait-

“I’ll hold them off!” Lee said as the Fire Sages prepared for another attack. “Go!” 

But that could wait until later. With hesitation, he turned and grabbed both Katara and Aang’s wrists, and off they went, speeding through the temple. Aang shook his out of Sokka’s grip and took the lead. 

Just before the Sages disappeared out of sight, Sokka risked a glanced back. He heard a loud whoosh and felt a flash of heat. The Fire Sages had been blown off their feet, and Lee was turning to run after them, sheathing his swords. Sokka was not sure if he imagined it, but he swore he saw tiny ribbons of fire fizzle out around the edges of the room. 

“Follow me!” Aang shouted over his shoulder as though it was not obvious. 

“Do you know where you’re going?” Sokka called ahead. 

“Nope!” He rounded a corner, only to come skidding back moments later, nearly crashing into Sokka and Katara. “Wrong way!” He went back down the way they had came. 

A Fire Sage rounded the corner Aang had just come from. “Come back!” he called, like that was going to do anything. The other three turned and sprinted after Aang. 

They took more lefts and rights until they emerged at a dead end. At the end of the hallway was a grated window with no other way to escape in sight. 

Aang turned back to them, a panicked expression on his face. “Uh- “

They heard footsteps, and Sokka wheeled. The Fire Sage was standing at the other end of the hallway, blocking their only way out. 

He held out a hand. “I don’t want to fight you. I am a friend.” 

“Firebenders aren’t our friends!” Sokka said firmly in response. 

“He’s not lying,” Lee said, defending the Sage, but Sokka could see him move into a defensive stance. 

The Fire Sage started toward them, and the group took in a collective breath. 

However, he simply just sank to his knees and bowed reverently in front of Aang. “My name is Shyu. I know why you’re here, Avatar.” 

And just like that, Aang’s guard dropped. Someone really needed to teach this kid something about trust. “You do?”

“Yes. You wish to speak to Avatar Roku?” 

Aang glanced back at Sokka and Katara. She nodded, but he shook his head. However, this was Aang, and he was likely to trust Katara over Sokka, so he turned back to Shyu. “I do.” 

Shyu took this as an opportunity to get back to his feet. “I can take you to him.” He moved, and Sokka tensed, but the only thing the Fire Sage did was pushed aside a lantern on the wall. It revealed a small hole beneath. Shyu placed his hand over the hole, and a spark of flame emitted from his hand. It seared through the wall, then outlined the panel next to it. The wall panel slid back, then to the side, revealing a glowing red rock chamber behind. 

Shyu motioned to it. “This way.” 

At that moment, a voice echoed through the chamber. “Find him!” 

Sokka’s eyes widened. Lee was right (which he hated to admit. Sokka had a hard time admitting anyone other than himself was right.) --- Zhao was looking for them. 

“Quickly!” Shyu urged. Without much discussion, they stepped into the chamber, and Shyu shut the door behind them. 

Heat blasted into Sokka’s face as they stepped in. Shyu took the lead, and they went down a long staircase, emerging beside what looked like a river of lava. “Avatar Roku once called this temple his home,” Shyu commented as they went. “He formed these secret passages out of the magma.” 

“Did you know Avatar Roku?” Aang asked. 

“No, but my grandfather did. Many generations of Fire Sages guarded this temple long before me. We all have a strong spiritual connection to this place.” 

“Is that how you knew I was coming?”

“A few weeks ago, an amazing thing occurred. The statue of Avatar Roku --- its eyes began glowing.” 

“That’s when we were at the Air Temple,” Katara added. “Avatar Roku’s eyes were glowing there, too.” 

“They did it everywhere,” Lee said in a distant voice. “All over the world… “ 

Sokka looked at him for a moment, then shook his head. At some point, he was going to figure out what this guy was talking about. 

Shyu clearly did not seem to care that this statement was odd, so he just nodded. “At that moment, we knew you had returned to the world.” 

“If this is the Avatar’s temple,” Aang persisted, “why did the other Sages attack me?” 

“Things have changed,” Shyu said. “In the past the Sages were loyal to only the Avatar. When Roky died, the Sages eagerly awaited for the next Avatar to return, but he never came.” 

Aang stopped. “They were waiting for me?” he asked solemnly.

Sokka put a comforting arm around him. “Hey, don’t feel bad. You’re only a hundred years late.” 

In the red glow of the magma, Aang’s solemn expression looked slightly murderous. 

“Hey, I mean, a hundred years isn’t too long?” Lee said with a shrug. “Right?” 

Sokka and Aang just blinked at him. 

Shyu cleared his throat, drawing attention back to himself. “They lost hope that the Avatar would ever return. WHen Fire Lord Sozin began the war, my grandfather and the other Sages were forced to follow him. I never wanted to serve the Fire Lord. When I learned you were coming, I knew i would have to betray the other Sages.” 

Shyu led them up a winding, spiral staircase to the sanctuary. “Once you’re inside,” he explained to Aang, “wait for the light to hit Avatar Roku’s statue. Only then will you be able to speak with him.” 

They emerged in a grand hallway filled with columns, opposite to two large doors. There were five dragon heads curling around each other, framed in flames, and the doors were closed. 

“No,” Shyu said quietly, mouth open as he stared at the doors. 

“What’s wrong?” Aang asked. 

Shyu motioned to them. “The doors. They’re closed.” 

“Can’t you just open them with firebending, like you opened that other door?” Katara asked. 

Shyu shook his head “Only a fully realized Avatar is powerful enough to open this door alone. Otherwise, the Sages must open the doors together with five simultaneous fire blasts.” 

An idea popped into Sokka’s head. “Five fire blasts? I think I can help you out.” 

“This is a little trick I picked up from my father,” Sokka explained as he put the last touches on his back. “I seal the lamp oil inside an animal skin casing- “ 

Momo let out a concerned chirrup. 

“ -then Shyu lights the oil-soaked twine, and ta da!” He held up the sack, presenting it. “Fake firebending.” 

“You’ve really outdone yourself this time,” Katara said, and he filed that memory away for later use. 

“This might actually work,” Shyu said hopefully. 

He looked to Lee, expecting some smartass response. 

Lee just shrugged. “Don’t look at me. It’s pretty smart.” 

Who’s the genius now? Sokka thought giddy to himself. 

Sokka placed one sack in each of the dragon’s open mouths. Shyu continued, “The Sages will hear the explosion. So- “he looked back to Aang” -as soon as they go off, you rush in.” 

As soon as he was done, Sokka rushed back behind a column with Katara, plugging his fingers in his ears. In front of him, Katara asked Aang something, but Sokka did not hear it nor Aang’s response. 

Shyu stood a little back from the door, then released a small jet of flame from two fingers. It soared through each of the oil-soaked twines, starting with the longest twine, then shooting toward the shortest. The sparks traveled up, up, up, into the sacks with hizzing. There was a loud BANG, and dust filled the room.

Aang sprinted through the haze and over to the door, tugging on the handle. “They’re still locked!” he reported back. He started slicing his arms through the air, sending out big gusts of wind at the doors. “Why- won’t- it- open?!” he shouted, punctuating each word with a slice. 

Katara grabbed his arm. “Stop!” 

He looked as though he wanted to keep going, but then his shoulders sagged, and he sighed defeatedly. “I’m sorry I put you guys through all this for nothing.” 

Sokka stepped forward the investigate. He ran his finger over one of the dragon’s mouths, and it came away covered in soot. 

“I don’t get it,” he said as Momo slipped through one of the dragon’s mouths. “That blast looked as strong as any firebending I’ve seen.” 

“Sokka, you’re a genius!” Katara exclaimed 

“Wait.” Aang held up a hand. “How is Sokka a genius? His plan didn’t even work.” 

“Come on, Aang.” Sokka leaned against the door, attempting to sound wistful. “Let her dream… “ 

“You’re right,” Katara said, nodding to Aang. “Sokka’s plan didn’t work, but- “ 

“It looks like it did,” Lee interjected, taking a step toward the door. 

Sokka nodded, catching on to what they were meaning. 

Aang just looked skeptically between the three of them. “Did the definition of genius changed in the last hundred years?” 

Hurried footsteps sounded down the hallway, and Sokka ducked out of sight behind his pillar. He looked to the right, sharing a nod with Katara who was behind a pillar of her own, then over to his left toward Lee, who was a bit farther down, nodding at him. 

“Come quickly!” Shyu said as the other Fire Sages arrived. “The Avatar has entered the sanctuary!” 

“How did he get in?” the lead Fire Sage demanded gruffly. 

“I don’t know. But look!” Shyu pointed to the soot-covered doors. “The scorch marks. And down there.” A shadow moved ominously, visible in the crack between the bottom of the door and the floor. 

“He’s inside,” the lead Fire Sage said. “Open the doors, immediately!” And with that, the five other Fire Sages drew in a breath, then punched out, releasing five simultaneous five blasts into each of the dragon’s mouths. 

The first dragon spun upside down. The two on its left ad right shifted downward, and the two outside ones moved down as well. The golden flames behind moved aside, and the doors opened with a brilliant red light emitting from behind to reveal- 

An ash-covered Momo, who let out a small sneeze. 

The Fire Sages stared at the lemur, bewildered, before one spoke. “It’s the Avatar’s lemur! He must’ve crawled through the pipes! We’ve been tricked!” 

Clearly, Sokka thought as Momo jumped at him with a loud screech. 

They took that as their cue, each of them sprinting out from behind their pillar. Sokka leaped at his Fire Sage, shoving his hat down over his eyes and throwing his weight onto the man. 

Shyu stepped out from behind a pillar and did the same thing to the final Fire Sage. “Now, Aang!” he shouted. “Go!” 

But when Aang stepped out from behind his pillar, he was not along. Behind him, holding his wrists clasped behind his back, was none other than Zhao. 

Freaking Zhao. 

“The Avatar will be coming with me!” Zhao announced loudly in his annoyingly superior tone. “It would do you all good to surrender.” 

The Sages took advantage of their distraction. Katara’s snatched her arm and twisted it around behind her back. Sokka slipped behind him and wrapped an arm around his neck. Lee’s flipped him over his shoulder, but he had a little more trouble taking down the other guy. 

Lee landed lightly on his feet, then drove his elbow back and up into the man’s face. The Fire Sage’s knees buckled, and he fell to the floor. Lee took a step toward Zhao, hand poised over the hilt of his swords. 

Zhao lit a flame on two fingers, then held it against Aang’s throat. “I wouldn’t do that if I were you.” 

Lee hesitated for a moment, then dropped his hand. 

An annoyingly superior smirk came over Zhao’s face, a look Sokka wanted to beat off with a chair, and he extinguished the flame, dropping his hand to his side. “Close the doors!” 

They creaked and hissed as the mechanisms behind began to work. Sokka vainly struggled against the Fire Sage holding his throat, but the man’s grip was quite firm. 

Lee looked up over Zhao’s shoulder and gasped. The whole room seemed to follow him, even Zhao’s head whipped around, but there was nothing there. 

It was enough of a distraction for Aang to rip out of the man’s grip. He sprinted toward the sanctuary as the doors began to near each other. A Sage moved to interrupt him, but Aang flipped up into the air. He planted a hand on the man’s bald head, then soared higher and higher, diving into the room just as the doors locked shut, dragons whirring back into place. 

Lee drew his swords, holding one in a reverse drip down low, then other higher by his shoulder. “I thought you would’ve smart enough not to fall for that.” 

Zhao fixed him with a cold look, then turned to Katara and Sokka. “Chain them up.” 

They were both unceremoniously slammed against the pillar by their Fire Sages. Another one appeared out of nowhere and began wrapping a chain tightly around them. 

Zhao pointed to Lee. “Bring that one to me.” 

Lee started to move, but a hand reached out of the shadows and grabbed his wrist. Lee’s head turned, and he jerked against the man, but then a Fire Nation soldier --- where had he been this whole time? --- stepped out. He twisted Lee’s wrist to the side, and the guy dropped his sword, grimacing in pain. Another soldier appeared out of nowhere and roughly snatched his other sword. The first soldier pulled both of Lee’s wrist behind his back, then shoved him forward across the room toward Zhao. 

The commander raised an eyebrow, studying Lee as though he were a specimen in a petri dish. “You look familiar.” 

Lee let out a harsh laugh. “I do? Tell me, how many people do you know with half their faces burnt off?” he snapped.  

Sokka did not see what was so harsh about that comment, but Zhao must have found it quite offensive as he backhanded Lee right across the face. “You’re an insolent one, I can tell,” he said as Lee looked back to him. “You wouldn’t have lasted a day in the Fire Nation.” 

Lee chuckled. “Oh, I wouldn’t have?” And with that, he spat in the commander’s face. 

Zhao blinked, and the soldiers around him seemed quite surprised, not sure what to do. Zhao wiped the spit off his face and opened his mouth to speak.

“Commander Zhao,” a new voice said. Sokka’s attention was drawn to where another group of soldiers was coming around the bend. Lee seemed to freeze at the sound. The voice belonged to an older, shorter man who was quite round. 

Zhao spun, composing himself. “General Iroh.” 

“That’s him,” Sokka whispered to Katara. “The other guy Aang was trying to tell Lee about.” 

Zhao waved to the column he and Katara was tied against. “Chain him with the others.” 

Lee hissed at Zhao --- actually hissed, like a cat --- and was just as unceremoniously slammed against the column with Katara and Sokka. A second chain was wrapped around them. 

“So,” Sokka said, “that went well.” 

Lee shook his head. “Oh, yeah. Definitely.” 

***

Four of the soldiers Iroh had brought with him took their places in front of each of the dragon’s mouths. He suspected that Zhao would take the fifth and final place, and from there, they would open the doors. However, Zhao, and the other Fire Sages, were currently occupied with interrogating the one Fire Sage who had betrayed them. 

“Why would you do it?” Zhao demanded of him. “Why would you betray the Fire Lord?” 

The man had been forced to his knees, hands bound behind his back. He only looked up to Zhao, a saddened, yet firm expression on his face. “It was once the Sages’ duty to help the Avatar.” His eyes flitted over to where the Avatar’s companions had been chained to one of the pillars. “And it still is.” 

Iroh thought that was reason enough --- he was telling the truth, after all, as the Sages had done just that for thousands of years until Fire Lord Sozin --- but Zhao was clearly not impressed. He just gave the man a cold look, then moved to his position in front of the door. “When the Avatar emerges from there, I want you to throw everything you have at him,” he ordered his soldiers. 

Iroh stepped back from where the light-and-fire show would take place, around to the three other prisoners, the Avatar’s companions. They were teenagers, and young ones at that. Two of them, a boy and a girl who looked quite similar, who Iroh assumed to be siblings, wore blue clothing and had the tan skin, dark hair and eyes of people from the Water Tribes; both were watching the door with rapt attention. The other kid had pale skin and black hair, like someone from the Fire Nation or one of the colonies, but his attention was diverted to the ground. 

The soldier guarding them was holding a pair of dao swords, and Iroh’s interest piqued for a moment. “Mind if I see those?” He held out a hand. 

The soldier, truthfully having no choice as Iroh outranked him, even if the title of “General” was a mockery of who he had been, handed them to him. “Uh- sure, sir.” 

They were lighter than he expected, with simple hilts. He split them apart, scanned over the insides, then placed them back together. He had always been rather fond of the design of the swords, what with having two that could become one. 

“Hey.” Iroh looked up. The black-haired kid finally spoke. “Those are- “he dropped his gaze back down once he made eye contact with Iroh, but not before he saw the giant burn scar marring the left side of the kid’s face. 

The Water Tribe boy looked from Iroh, to the kid, and back again. He motioned with his chin to the swords. “Have you seen those before?” 

Iroh did not see the harm in telling the kid that one bit of information, so he nodded. “They are very prevalent among nonbenders in the Fire Nation.” 

The boy mouthed the words Fire Nation, then looked to the other, who would not look back to him. “I’m sorry,” he started again, “did you say ‘Fire Nation?’” 

Iroh got the impression the black-haired boy would rather be swallowed whole by the ground than be here right now. 

He stepped around the pillar so he could get closer to the black-haired boy. “My nephew studied the art of the dao for several years,” he began. “Even though he trained under the best swordmaster in the world, his father always found it unbecoming of someone of his status. A shame, though. He loved them so much.” He looked to the boy. “How did you come upon these?”

No response. 

“Hm,” Iroh said. “They are nice swords, if I do say so myself. Not the most extravagant or intricate, but sure and sturdy weapons.” 

Still nothing. 

“I saw you spit in the commander’s face,” he tried next. “Believe me, I’ve wanted to do that for years.” 

As if determined to not give him anything, the boy turned his head away. 

Iroh just sighed, shook his head. Fine. Be that way. He had dealt with teenagers like this before times over. 

Something in the air shifted --- what it was, Iroh could not tell, but he felt that something as different. A bright, blue-white light radiated from crack underneath the door. It encompassed the room, and Iroh shielded his eyes. The Fire Sages gasped as smoke blew from the crack underneath the door as well.

The doors began to shift open of their own accord, and Iroh could see an even brighter, white light radiating from the inside.  

“Ready!” Zhao commanded his troops, and they all moved into defensive stances. 

The light faded out, but it was replaced by two glowing, white eyes against the black void of the room behind. 

“No!” the Water Tribe girl shouted. “Aang!” 

“Fire!” 

The soldiers released five jets of flame at the Avatar. 

Before it could hit him, the Avatar inside took control of the flames. They swirled around him in a spinning, protective shield. In their light, Iroh saw that the Avatar was not the small boy that had been on Zhao’s ship down in the South Pole. Instead, he had been replaced by an old man wearing Fire Nation clothing, an old man that radiated an aura of etherealness and power, that he was not of this world. An old man Iroh had only ever seen pictures of. 

“Avatar Roku,” one of the Sages breathed. 

Iroh dropped the dao swords in surprise. 

The shimmering mirage of Roku turned his eyes upon Zhao, the soldiers. An expression of great anger came over his face, and he thrust his hands outward. The flames shot away from him. A great wave of energy flew through the room, and Iroh barely ducked behind the pillar as the flames blasted Zhao and his men back. The wave blasted right through the wall, rubble, concrete, and debris flying everywhere, and the hot air from outside rushed in. 

He felt a searing heat just a few inches away from his skin. The flames had melted the chains around the Avatar’s companions, and they broke free, pulling away from the pillar. The black-haired boy dove for his swords and quickly returned them to the sheath on his back. 

As Avatar Roku turned his angry eyes upon the traitorous Sages, the temple began to rumble, the ground beneath Iroh’s feet shaking. 

Zhao had made it to his feet, swaying. “Get them!” he ordered his soldiers, pointing at the Avatar’s companions. The soldiers got to their feet as well, also swaying. One of them had managed to recover himself enough to create a large between his hands. He lifted one foot up, reeling back, then stepped forward, launching it at them. 

The Water Tribe boy shoved his sister to side, and they collapsed on the floor. The black-haired boy rolled out of the way, right back up to his feet. 

The soldier kept his attacks focused on the two Water Tribe siblings. He moved into another kata, ready to continue his assault- 

A wave of heat rushed through the room as a small wall of fire shot up from the floor, barring Zhao and the soldiers from the two Water Tribe kids. The soldier stumbled back, fireball dissipating midair. 

Iroh looked over to the source of the fire wall. The black-haired boy stood at the end of it, both arms held out, an expression on his face that said he had just made the biggest mistake of his life. 

Both of the Water Tribe kids were watching him, mouths open. This was something they clearly did not know. 

Zhao laughed. “Well, what do we have here? Could this possibly be a… traitor to the Fire Lord?” 

The kid drew his arms back in, elbows bent by his sides. “You know, you would get a lot more done if you would shut up for five seconds.” 

Zhao waved his soldiers aside --- this was something he wanted to deal with himself --- and punched two flames out at the boy in quick succession. He dodged the first, then dissipated the second with a downward slice of his arms out to the side. Iroh finally found his wits enough to move just as the boy drew a sharp knife from nowhere- 

Iroh threw his arms around the boy, forcing the kid’s arms down to his sides, holding him tightly. At the same time, the Water Tribe kids had grabbed pieces of the rubble and started chucking it at Zhao, keeping him occupied for a moment. 

The kid hissed like a cat. He leaned forward, then threw his weight back into Iroh, forcing the old man’s back to bend in a way that it had not done in years. With an almost inhuman strength, the kid threw Iroh’s arms off him and slipped back down to the ground, landing on his feet and rolling. When he came back up, he wheeled around, point of the blade level with Iroh’s neck.

And all sound went deaf on his ears. 

Iroh had seen the scar, seen the kid’s face, but it was not until he connected the pieces, until he saw them both together, with the dao, the firebending, everything. His left eye was a milky-white, but his right remained the same brilliant gold color as his father. Without the scar, he might have even looked more like Ozai at this age. 

He had not said his name in over three years. Not since- “Zu- “ 

“You don’t know me.” His right eye flashed blue. 

The words washed over Iroh’s mind like a wave in the ocean. Of course, he did not know the boy, what was he thinking? The dao swords, the firebending, the scar… it was all just a coincidence. His nephew had died three years ago. Iroh had seen the body himself. He was foolish, to have that hope. His nephew was gone, barely even more than a memory to so many. 

Avatar Roku is going to destroy the temple! The voice sounded like the traitor Fire Sage, but it was distant, muffled. 

Sound came back to his ears as the boy spun on his heel and chucked the knife right at Zhao, who was no longer being assaulted by the two Water Tribe kids. He turned just for the knife to bury itself in his shoulder. 

He let out a strangled scream, sinking to his knees, hands clutching his shoulder. 

Iroh looked back to the boy  just as he dropped low, sweep-kicking Iroh’s feet out from under him. He landed on the ground with a grunt. 

The kid held eye contact with him for a moment. Something that might have been regret passed through his eyes, but Iroh must have imagined it. Not a moment later, the kid turned and ran after the Avatar’s other companions. 

“Here, sir.” The next thing he knew, a soldier was standing over him, hand held out. Iroh took it, and their small group ran from the crumbling temple. 

***

“We must get out of here!” Shyu shouted. 

“Not without Aang!” Katara shouted back. Both of their voices were difficult to hear of the rumbling of the temple. 

Aang (Avatar Roku? Sokka was sure he was missing some kind of connective piece here.) slammed his fist into the floor of the temple. A fissure spread through it, a river of magma below, dividing the floor in two. The floor began to shake so violently that Sokka was having difficult standing- 

Someone grabbed his arm and aggressively yanked him behind a pillar. An intense wave of heat rushed through the room as a loud roaring rang through the air. Sokka clamped his hands over his ears, sure he was already deaf- 

Then, it was silent, as though nothing ever happened. 

He and Katara peaked around one of the remaining pillars. Most of the temple had been destroyed, split in two by Aang (Avatar Roku?). However, Sokka was rescued from having any more confusion when he saw that the mirage of Roku had disappeared, leaving only a small, weary-looking Aang behind. 

He and Katara rushed out from behind the pillar to catch him before he could sink to the ground. “We got you,” she said gently. 

“Where’s Shyu?” Aang asked. 

Sokka glanced around. The other Fire Sage was nowhere to be seen. 

“Come on!” Sokka looked to where Lee was shouting from the top of the staircase they had emerged from. 

Aang started toward them, but was quickly stopped, as Katara and Sokka were keeping a firm grip on his arms. “Guys?” 

“Aang,” Katara started, and Sokka already knew what she was about to say, “he’s a- “ 

“Is this really the conversation you want to be having right now?” Lee shouted back. 

Aang broke free from their grip and ran for the staircase. Sokka and Katara shared a look, then followed, not exactly having a choice. 

However, when they arrived at the top of the staircase, they found most of it had already been sunk under piles of lava. 

“Ah, well,” Sokka said to himself. “Highway to hell… “ 

The sound of breaking concrete sounded through the air, and the four of them jumped out of the way as a pillar tipped over and fell behind him. The sound blasted through the air, impact shattering through the temple. 

“Here!” Katara ran for the hole in the wall that had been blasted open by Avatar Roku. But when they got there, Sokka only saw another river of magma slowly making its way up to their floor. 

They were so screwed now.

Sokka saw a shape in the distance. “Look!” he shouted, pointing to it, but the others had already noticed it. Even from here, he could see the familiar shape of Appa jetting toward them, Momo, wearing one of the stupid hats, right beside. 

The temple shook violently again. The floor started to tilt, sinking into the volcano below. Appa was speeding toward them faster and faster as the temple tilted farther, farther, farther- 

The four of them exchanged a look. Sending up a prayer to whoever was listening, Sokka and the other three sprinted for the edge of the building. They leaped out just as Appa made it under them. His feet hit Appa’s saddle, and the bison whooshed off into the air, away from the collapsing temple. 

They were alive. They had survived their first encounter in the Fire Nation. Aang had spoken to Roku. 

Mission accomplished. 

But, right now, there was another matter than needed discussing. 

Appa landed on the nearest island they could find. It was a sad, skimpy excuse for an island, probably less that a quarter of a mile across. An island wanna-be, he mused to himself. 

As soon as the bison’s feet hit the ground, Lee slid out of the saddle. He stumbled away several feet away from them, then sank to his knees in the sand, back to them. 

Sokka snatched his machete, then slid out right after him. He kept a tight grip on it as he ran toward Lee. 

“Sokka?” Aang called. 

Sokka held his machete over Lee’s right shoulder, against his neck. “I’m going to give you oen chance to do this peacefully.” 

“Sokka!” Aang cried. 

“Aang, stay back!” Katara said, grabbing Aang’s arm. 

“What’s going on?!” Aang demanded frantically. “What’re you doing?!” 

“Why don’t you ask him?” Sokka snarled. 

Before he could blink, Lee grabbed Sokka’s arm and flipped him over his shoulder. Sokka landed on his back, air whooshing out of his lungs, dropping his machete.

“How dare you!” Katara shouted, and there was the sound of rushing water. Lee moved out of Sokka’s line of sight. Sokka scrambled to his feet, snatched his machete. 

It was though as invisible wall had separated them. Lee was on one side, Aang and Katara on the other, with a giant area of no-man’s-land separating them. Katara had a wall of water raised. Sokka joined their side. 

Lee let out a maniac laugh. “And what are you going to do? Waterbend at me? You don’t know a thing about it. Just like you don’t know me.” 

“Don’t you dare insult my sister like that!” Sokka yelled. 

“Guys!” Aang shouted. 

“We just met you!” Katara yelled back. “How do we know you’re not like them?” 

Lee laughed again. “Oh, the anger. The hate. It never goes away, does it? You always have to hate someone!” 

“What hate? What anger?” Aang interjected. “What’s going on?” 

“We’ll give you another chance to come quietly!” Sokka shouted at him. “We’re your only way off this island!” 

“Sokka, you better tell me exactly what’s going on, or I’m going Avatar Roku all over this island!” 

Tired of Aang’s whining, Sokka pointed an accusatory finger at Lee. “He’s a firebender, Aang! He’s one of them!”

Chapter Text

Three Years Ago

There was unrest, unease, shifting through the village, and for the life of her, Ummi could not figure out why. 

She managed to deduce about three things --- one, it was some piece of hot gossip that had rocked the entire nation, as if it had managed to find its way all the way out here to her village, then it truly must be something big. Two, it was something rather scandalous, as the adults would tilt their heads close together and talk in low, whispered, hushed tones about it whenever they were around anyone else, as though some soldiers or secret agents were going to spring out of the void and take them in for questioning if they heard them speaking out it. Three, it had to do with one piece of parchment. 

There were three of these identical parchments floating around the village, being passed from hand to hand. From what Ummi could see of these papers, they were some kind of announcement, with a big headline at the top and several, smaller characters scrawled below providing further details to the headline. 

She tried to get her hands on one of these announcements, peered over the shoulders of the villagers to catch a glimpse of what it might be. But writing and language had changed so much since she had been alive, and in the past hundreds of years, she had neglected to learn how to read again. She could not understand a word inked onto the parchment. 

It went on like this for weeks, stretching into two, three, a month, two months, three, and she never figured it out. It was becoming quite frustrating. She thought about prodding their minds, searching for information, but that was a violation of privacy, and, unfortunately, she had a conscience. The irrational part of her wanted to reveal herself to her villagers, demand that they tell her exactly what was going on. Although they revered the Painted Lady, praised and worshipped what she did for them, she was not sure how well that would go. 

“They like it when you stay in the shadows,” her companion had once said. “When you just come out and say, “Fear not!”, they tend to become a little… zealous.” 

“You say that as if you’ve had the experience,” she had responded with a small chuckled. 

He had shrugged. “I’ve been around awhile. Seen a lot of things. Believe me, whatever scenario you throw at me, I probably have the answer. You just have to be patient.” 

Which was a rich statement, coming from him. He had never been patient. You would think, after “being around awhile,” it was a skill he would have learned, but it was quite the opposite effect in fact. It was as though he did not have enough time, that he had to act now and he had to act fast. Like he were under an obligation to do something. 

How he --- one so fond of sharp objects and stabbing, one who could be quite rash for a thousands-year-old spirit --- came to find her --- a woman so averted to very violent actions and who thought everything through --- she would never understand. How he had stayed with her for so long, she could never comprehend. 

How he could just leave her alone in this world, she would never know. 

The light of the moon was full and lustrous the night she found the boy. She was sitting on the cliff her and her companion used to all the time, whenever he would visit. Her village was set over the surface of a river that cut between two long stretches of cliff. The one she was sitting on know, legs dangling over the edge, overlooked the entirety of her village. As the moon slowly climbed higher and higher into the sky, she watched as people began to retreat into their homes, as their lanterns were lit. The lanterns slowly fizzled out as the night dragged on. 

She sat up here a lot, wondering what stories or complaints her companion might have told her about if he was still here. He had loved to talk about his travels, about the people, spirits, and other things he encountered. Those were her favorite things to hear about, as he had a rather blunt and straight-to-the-point way of telling them that was quite comedic. 

He had a lot of stories about Koh. These in particular were her favorites to hear about because she had a rather unpleasant distaste for the Face Stealer, and her companion always had some way or another to completely ridicule him. 

She had never liked Koh, not even in life. Her older brothers used to tell her that he lived under her bed (and just her bed), that he was going to come and steal her face if she did not leave them alone, that he preyed on annoying and naughty children who did not do what their older siblings told them to do and left them alone. Her parents had assured her that the stories were just completely nonsense, that although Koh might have been real, he certainly did not live under her bed. But it had always left the question in her mind that he did live somewhere, that he existed… 

Her favorite story that her companion told about Koh was the time he stole a little girl’s face. Now, Koh had stolen a lot of children’s faces in his time of being (which was an entirely creepy statement on its own, but there was more to unpack with that later), but this was the story she always remembered for one certain reason. 

Her companion had been hovering around some Earth Kingdom village for a few months at that point. He had been watching one family, how this little girl’s family had drank and drank and drank until he was sure that a) there was no more alcohol left in the world, or b) they would die from all the alcohol in their blood. But neither of that happened, and in their drunken endeavors, they turned their anger onto their daughter. Her companion had wanted to do something about the things they did to her, but it was not in his power. 

“There’s only so much La allows me to do,” he had said bitterly, referring to the Ocean Spirit. “I think it was restraining me.” 

The life had all become too much for the little girl so that one day, she just left. Up and ran away. According to her companion, she had no plan, nothing but the clothes on her back, nothing to keep her safe. “She was never going back,” her companion had described it so. “There were so many unknown variables that night, but she knew that she could never return.” 

She had strayed far, far from any familiar land to her. While Ummi’s companion had been following her, there was another, much more dark and deceitful figure on her tail as well. 

“Koh was there, too,” her companion said acidly. “He decided to spring and scare her. You know that if you show any kind of facial expression that your face suddenly doesn’t belong to you anymore. What a cheap trick, but I don’t know what else you would expect from the bastard. He scared her, then used that as an excuse to take her face.” He made a disgusted noise, then continued. 

“I thought someone was following her, so I- “ 

“Someone was.” 

“Yeah, that’s what I was getting to.” 

“No.” Ummi shook her head. “Before that. Before you knew someone else was following her, there was someone already doing it.” 

He blinked. “I don’t get it.” 

She shook her head again. “Nevermind. I’m not going to explain it to you. You’ll figure it out eventually.” Even after a thousand years, he still was not smart enough to understand her wit. “Keep going.” 

He held her gaze with a confused expression of his own for a moment before continuing. “Well, anyway, I took the risk of doubling back, just in case there was another party. When I heard her scream, I knew something was wrong, but it was too late by the time I got back there. He had already taken her face.

“Her back had been to me, her body caught in Koh’s pincers. He looked up at me, his face that white sheet with the red lips that’s just so creepy and wrong, smiled, then changed his face to hers. He dropped her body, and there- there wasn’t- “ 

“Is that what they found of me?” Ummi interrupted. 

He paused. “What?” 

“Is that all they found of me?” Ummi subconsciously touched her cheek. “Just a limp corpse with no face.” 

He waited several moments before answering, and she could see the hesitation crossing back and forth in his eyes. Eventually, he nodded. 

“Oh.” She pulled her knees up to her chest. 

“I don’t have to keep going if it makes you- “ 

“No.” She shook her head. “Surely there’s got to be some better part to the story.” 

“Oh, yes there is. Anyway, I wasn’t able to catch Koh then. He managed to slip away before I could get my hands on him, so I tracked him. It felt like years to me since I was on a time limit. When Koh steals someone’s face, there’s this intermittent period where he can still get rid of it and return it to its owner before the face sinks into his collection for the rest of forever.

“Still, after having Koh as something akin to an arch-nemesis for as l can remember, I found him pretty easily.” 

“And what did you do?” 

“Well, the little bastard was sleeping. I waltzed right up to him, said, ‘Knock, knock, bitch, it’s me,’ and stabbed him in the eye.”

“You didn’t.” 

He nodded. “Tui and La, it was so satisfying to. Well, needless to say, that woke him up, and he wasn’t too happy. He was pretty mad that I had ruined his favorite face. Also, something I’ve noticed about him is that he can only steal faces when he can see them, so I stabbed him in both eyes. Again, needless to say, he was pretty pissed that he couldn’t steal faces for awhile. So, yeah, I think I got him good on that.” 

“And what did you do after that?” 

“I offered to heal him, but only if he returned the little girl’s face. He wasn’t too happy about that- “he made a face” -y’know, I’m not too sure if Koh is happy about anything, but that’s not the point. He was pretty stubborn about it too. I don’t know why he was so adamant to have this little girl’s face, but it was probably because I wanted it, so he wanted it too, just to prove he was better than me, yadda yadda yadda, you get the point. Still, he was in enough pain and despair over not being able to do what his name implies that he agreed to give it back anyway. 

“And the little girl went home after that. Her parents had been so worried that they resolved to stop drinking and become better people. I never saw them after that.” 

“And what about Koh?” 

“What about him?” 

“Did you ever heal him face?” 

Her companion sirked. “Well, technically, I can’t do. La can heal people, it just needs someone to channel its power through. I put Koh on probation for about one hundred years until I finally allowed La to use me as a vessel for its power. He wasn’t too happy about the waiting, but since I still healed his favorite face, he owes me something.” He crossed his arms. “And he has yet to pay it back.” 

She chuckled. “I believe that. I’m just glad someone got their face back.” 

And just like that, the conversation shifted. His face fell, and he turned his eyes to the burbling river below. “Ummi, I tried… I tried for so long. You know I did.” 

“I know, I know,” she said quickly. “I know it’s not your fault.” 

He nodded unsurely. “The next time I plan on stabbing him in the eye, I’ll make sure you’re there with me.” 

Ummi had never been a violent person, but she would not deny that she would like to see Koh launched into the sun at a high velocity. So, she nodded back at him, holding out a hand. “You better.” 

He shook. The deal was the deal. 

Now, she brushed a finger over her cheek bone. No paint came off her face as it was a part of her now. Her companion had been unable to return her face to her, so he had helped her create a new one, along with La’s help. 

“You need a new one,” he had said bluntly one day. “I’m tired to looking at just the paint. Your lips don’t move, and your eyes don’t blink. It’s really freaking me out.”

With her new face, she had been able to talk once more. It was not exactly like her old one, as the color of her hair and eyes were different, and the paint could not be removed. But it was a rough imitation of who she had once been, what she had once looked like. She had a new face, and that was a fact that could not be denied. 

“Ummi?” 

Her head jerked up, and she shot to her feet, wheeling around. 

Standing several yards behind her was a young boy. His clothes were raggedy, torn, and dirty. He had a loose pair of pants that looked as though they had been charred on the left leg, a shirt that was a bit too big for him, and he had no shoes. His hair was short and shaggy, haphazardly cut, and she suspected that the boy had done it himself. An area just above his left eye was barely grown, as though it had been completely shorn several months ago. But that’s not what caught Ummi’s eye. 

It was the scar on the left side of his body. It started at his face --- his left ear was completely shriveled and curled under, his eye half-closed and a milky-white color. She was familiar enough with burn scars to know that was what this was, that it traveled down his neck, disappearing into the collar of his shirt only to reemerged over and down his left arm all the way to his hand. 

And yet, that still was not the most incredible thing. “You know my name?” If he knew her name, then he could see her. Humans could not do that. If he knew her name, then he knew her, but she certainly did not know him. 

He blinked. “I- I know you.” 

“Who are you?” she demanded. “How can you see me?” 

“I know you,” he repeated, taking a shaky step toward her. “You know me.” 

She shook her head. “Who are you?” she repeated. 

He stopped. Blinked. “You can keep me safe. That’s- that’s what I heard.” 

What he heard? “From who?” 

He took another slow step toward her. “I- I know you. I don’t- “before she realized what was happening, his eyes rolled into the back of his head. With his next step, his knees buckled. 

She rushed over to him with the speed only a spirit could accomplish and caught him before he hit the ground. 

An involuntary gasp left her mouth when she realized he did not just pass right through her arms. Although she could heal the people of her village, she could never physically touch them. As a spirit, her skin now was translucent, as though she were nothing but a ghost. She did have that one stereotypical characteristic of a ghost, that being things passed right through her. 

She shook her head, deciding she would worry about this later, and gathered him into her arms. His skin was hot, much hotter than normal, and Ummi had spent copious amounts of time around firebenders. She stepped over to the edge of the cliff and raised her arm up. From the river below came a funnel of water. She stepped into the funnel, and it lower her back down to the surface of the river. She flicked her free hand back, and the water propelled her forward to the docks. 

She stepped onto the wooden planks and fell to her knees, laying the boy in front of her. She held a hand out, and a tendril of water shot from the river and wrapped itself around her hand. A soft blue glow emitted from her palm underneath the water, and she held her hand over the boy’s chest- 

CLANG. 

Ummi’s head shot up. There was a woman standing on the other end of the docks, her mouth wide open. The bucket she had just dropped laid haphazardly to the side. It took Ummi a moment to realize that it was the village doctor. 

Ummi got to her feet. 

The woman covered her mouth, then pointed at Ummi. “You’re- you’re the- “ 

But before she could speak anymore, Ummi stepped back into the river and disappeared. 

It was a rash decision, to leave him out there, but she trusted that the village doctor would do her job and take care of the boy. And she did. 

She was quite discreet about it, taking him to the backroom in her hut where they would have some privacy. Over the course of the rest of the night and the next day, she did as much as she could for the boy, but it was not as though there was much to do. His scar seemed to be what puzzled the doctor most of all, as it seemed healed over, even though it took years for that kind of thing to happen. Sure, the kid had some cuts, scrapes, and bruises here and there, but the only two problems seemed to be that he was malnourished and he was running an incredibly high fever. 

When the doctor did all she could close to the end of the night, she simply stepped back. “I can’t do anymore,” she said to the kid. “The Painted Lady will have to help you now.” She looked around expectantly. 

“No?” she said after a moment, then shrugged. “Just have to hope she’ll come eventually… “ 

When the doctor stepped out of the room, occupied with something else, Ummi finally moved in. She went to heal the boy’s fever, but found that the task was nigh impossible. Waterbending healers used the water in the body to mend bones, cuts, and bruises, to heal the illnesses and ailments one might experience. But the fever did not seem to be from any kind of sickness. It was as though something else was causing it. 

It was another two days, and the boy had not stirred from whatever coma he was in. The village doctor had tried everything she could, but nothing seemed to wake the kid. It was not until the third day that Ummi decided she better intervene. 

When the doctor was gone, she sat down on the edge of the cot the boy had been laying on, gently ran a hand over his unscarred cheek. He was young, and it looked long healed-over. How could that have happened, she wondered? 

She sat back from him and closed her eyes. Her companion had long ago taught her how to contact someone’s mind. It was an ability he used frequently in some form or another, and she had as well, but she had only been able to contact spirits doing it. She had never tried it on a human before. 

But something about this whole situation told her that this boy was not entirely human. If he knew her name, then there had to be something else going on. 

She could feel his presence out of all the ones in her village. It felt chaotic, loud, unfocused, unfiltered. Just a tangle of various thoughts, feelings, emotions, memories. It was a conglomeration of color, sound, light, people, heat, cold- 

Hesitantly, she prodded his mind with her own. She imagined as though she were gently knocking on a door. 

A wall slammed back into her consciousness, as though someone had forcibly thrown her back. She opened her eyes and shook herself. Okay… She closed them and tried again. 

The wall was still there with the same amount of force, and all the noises that had been crowding his mind were suddenly silenced. She knew the storm was still raging, but it was just behind the wall he had put up. 

So, Ummi tried a different approach. I’m not going to hurt you, she said gently. 

She heard a scathing snort. That’s likely. His voice was rough and raspy, and it was one she certainly did not recognize. 

I’m just going to help you. 

The last person who said that tried to throw me off a bridge, so forgive me for not trusting you. 

Well, that’s rough. But I’m not going to do that to you, I promise. Even if I did, the bridges here aren’t high enough to do any damage once you hit the water. 

How amusing. He sounded quite the contrary. Get out of my head. 

Look, I just want- 

To help me. I’ve heard it before, now get out of my head. She felt him try to kick her out again, but something held the link in place. She felt another presence in his mind, one that felt quite… familiar. The one that was holding her there. 

She would know it anywhere, she realized opening her eyes. “Blue?”

The kid shot awake.

Chapter Text

“He’s a firebender, Aang!” Sokka pointed an accusatory finger at Lee, who was standing across the no-man’s-land divide they had created. “He’s one of them!” 

Lee sputtered out something that sounded like a tired, disbelieving laugh. “Oh, really?” he fired back. “You know that guy we’ve brought along with us? The guy with black hair, pale skin, and gold eyes? Hey, isn’t that what most of the Fire Nation looks like?” He threw his arms out in frustration. “So glad you’ve finally caught onto that fact!” 

“A firebender?” Aang breathed reverently. He took a step across the invisible divide. 

Katara reached out and grabbed his arm, dragged him back closer to them. “Stay away from him, Aang. He’s dangerous.” She cursed herself for not seeing exactly what Lee had pointed out sooner. She had noticed the gold eyes --- it was just something that had slipped her mind, was not important at the time. How could they not have seen this sooner? Gran-Gran had always told her to never trust strangers, and yet, her and Sokka had let one around them just because Aang flashed his puppy-dog eyes and begged that he come along. 

Stupid. That’s what they were. Stupid.

“I meant what I said earlier,” Sokka called across the divide. “Firebenders aren’t our friends, and we certainly don’t trust any of them.” 

“You trusted Shyu, or is that something you already forgot? It wouldn’t surprise me if it was.” 

“We didn’t have a choice. He was our only way into the temple, to Avatar Roku.” Katara could feel the energy of the water behind her, pulsating through her blood and veins, eager to have somewhere to go. “But with you, we do have a choice. We can choose to get rid of you.” 

Lee scoffed. “Well, you wouldn’t be the first person to do that. But I’m so glad I’ve been inducted into your little cult. Tell me, when is initiation?” 

“Don’t you think you should’ve told us?” Sokka interjected. “If you were going to be around our group, we had a right to know!” 

“Oh, like you would go around and tell people you were the very thing they despised!” 

Sokka opened his mouth, then closed it. That was a fair point. Besides, it was not like they had asked Lee if he was a firebender. And yet, still, Katara felt as though he had some obligation to tell them. Aang was back to defeat the Fire Nation, after all. Shouldn’t some part of him wanted to tell them?

“This is your one chance!” Katara said with finality. “You can come quietly with us, or we can leave you to die on this island!” 

“Katara!” Aang protested, completely scandalized. The thought of ever doing something so morbid was not something he could handle. But right now, she did not care. One less firebender was one less problem in the world. 

Lee made a disgusted noise. “Leave me here to die? This is why I stopped getting involved with people like you.” 

“People like us?” Sokka shouted indignantly, pulling his boomerang from its sheath. “And what’s that supposed to mean?” 

“That’s the thing, isn’t it? You always have to have someone to hate.” Lee brushed right past Sokka’s question as if he had never asked it, and Katara filed that away for later. She knew there was something off about him, and that only further added to her questions. “You always have to have someone to turn the blame onto.” 

“But we have reason!” she yelled back. “It’s not just blinding hate. You don’t understand!” He didn’t know what the Fire Nation had done to her, who and what it had stolen from her, from Sokka, from the Southern Water Tribe, from the world. He didn’t understand any of that because he was one of them. “You’re a part of the problem!” 

And with those words, she seemed to have touched a nerve. His head tilted, eyes narrowing. “Oh, I’m a part of the problem? Well, then… “he shrugged. “Maybe that’s it. The real problem. Closed-minded people.” 

“I am not ‘closed-minded!’” she argued right back. 

“And who died?” 

“I- what?” 

“Who died because of them?” Lee asked.

She swallowed whatever retort she had been ready to hurl at him. That had caught her very off guard. What was she supposed to tell him, that her mother died at the hands of the Fire Nation? That she had run back into their house to see her mother’s burned, scarred corpse that had once been so alive? That the knowing twinkle in her mother’s eyes was now gone, nothing more than a lifeless, black pit? That because of that, because of all of it, her father had been forced to leave eventually, to go out and fight them because no one else was doing it? That her family had been ripped apart before she truly understood what it meant to her? Only now, now that he was gone, did she know the importance of it, how she had relied on both her parents, how all those responsibilities fell to her now. 

He didn’t know. He wouldn’t understand. There was no way for her to put it in words. There was no way he would ever comprehend the weight of what had happened. 

Sokka’s loud voice broke her from her thoughts. “That’s enough! We can go on and on about being closed-minded, but Katara’s point still stands! This is your last chance, and I’m not bluffing. You come quietly with us- “he raised his boomerang over his head” -or you die here!” 

“Guys- “Aang protested.

“You throw that boomerang at me, and we’ll see who’s dying today.” 

“Guys, that’s enough- “ 

“How dare you threaten him!” The wall of water behind Katara grew taller. 

“I’ve threatened so many people in my life that, at this point, it doesn’t really faze me anymore.” 

Katara let out a cry of anger and shoved her arms forward, directing all the force of the wave at him. Unfortunately, she knew little to nothing about proper waterbending. 

Only about half of the wave moved out of the ocean. It flew threw the air in a haphazard clump, and he easily sidestepped it, drawing his swords in the same motion. It broke apart upon impact with the ground on the other side. 

Lee let out an unimpressed hum. “You can try all you like, but you won’t hit me. Not like that at least.” 

“Like you said.” She raised another wall of water. “Probability.” 

His head tilted forward slightly. “Unless you want this to get messy, I suggest you drop that.” 

“And what will you do?” she snarled, her tone dripping with all the venom she could muster. “Burn me? Give me a scar like yours?” 

His menacing expression faltered for a moment. Katara might have imagined it, but his left eye flashed blue for a moment. “I- I wouldn’t- “

But he never got to finish his statement because at that moment, Momo swooped in and landed on one of Lee’s blade. He drew himself up, then opened his mouth and released a cacophony of shrieks and screeching noises that she could only guess where a variety of curse words in lemur. 

“You’re defending him?!” Sokka demanded incredulously. His arm dropped back down to his side. “wHy?!” 

“Because he’s right, Sokka.” Aang stepped out from behind her and into the no-man’s-land between her and Sokka and Lee. 

“Get away from him, Aang!” Katara said quickly. “This isn’t your concern!” 

He wheeled on her. “Yes, it is!” he snapped, and she reeled back a step, surprised by his tone. “Lee is here by my invitation, and if you think I’m going to let you run him off because he’s a firebender, then you’re really wrong.” 

“You don’t get it.” But she realized her exact mistake once the words were out of her mouth. 

Katara had never seen Aang become angry, but she saw he was coming close to it as the next words tumbled out of him. “I don’t get it, do I? Well then maybe it’s you who doesn’t get what it’s like to see your entire people gone, to know that they don’t exist anymore! To see the skeleton of someone you cared about just sitting there, right in front of you! To know you’ve been gone a hundred years, and the world had suffered because of it!” 

She opened her mouth to say something, apologize maybe, but he wasn’t finished. 

“You don’t get that this is a chance, my chance, to fix that problem! Roku told me of a comet that’s coming here, and if I don’t master all four elements by the end of the summer, there won’t be a world to worry about!” 

He finished with his chest heaving, as though he had been bursting to say all that in the commotion but had not been able to do. 

Sokka’s boomerang fell out of his hand. “D- destroy the world?” 

“Yes, Sokka!” Aang said impatiently. “It’ll give the firebenders enough power to take over everything!” 

“Sozin’s Comet,” Lee said. Aang wheeled around as he spoke. “That’s how they started the war in the first place.” 

“Exactly!” He wheeled on Katara. “It was going to be hard enough finding a firebender who would be willing to teach me in the first place, and now we’ve got one sitting right here, and you want him gone?!” 

“I- “ 

“I’ve got every right to hate the Fire Nation after what they did!” he continued. “To me, to everyone! But I know they can’t all be like that.” Aang shook his head, as if reassuring himself. “Not all of them… “ 

“How do you know he would agree to teach you?” Katara argued. 

Aang shrugged. “Oh, gee, I might’ve done this really cool, neat, and brand new thing called ask him!” 

“He’s already agreed to help with the spirit stuff.” Katara’s head snapped over to Sokka. He was agreeing with all this, when he had been ready to boomerang Lee just moments before? “Firebending can’t be too much different… “he looked to Lee. “Would it?” 

“Only if you had asked, Avatar,” Lee responded. 

She looked back and forth between the three of them. Katara wanted to continue arguing, but she was outnumbered. No matter what she said, she was sure they would have some kind of rebuttal. 

So, she let the wave fall back into the ocean. “Fine. I guess he can stay.” 

Momo hopped off Lee’s blade as he sheathed them, landing on his shoulder. He blew a raspberry at her. 

Oh, that’s real mature. Katara started stalking over to Lee. “But if he’s going to stay, then I want those.” She pointed to his swords. “I don’t want him to have any more weapons than he- “ 

Appa intercepted her path, standing in between her and Lee. 

Katara placed her hands on her hips, looking up at the bison. “Excuse me?” 

Appa let out a rumble, then plopped down right in front of her. She knew she could always try and go around him, but he had made his position clear. 

She let out a frustrated noise. “Fine.” Projecting her voice louder, she said, “Fine! But if one of you wakes up with your throat slit, don’t come crying to me!” She stomped off to the opposite side of the island, shoving past Aang, and plopped down in the sand, brooding heavily. 

She had been there for awhile, seething, until she felt someone come up beside her. “Are you alright?

Katara clenched her fists in her lap. “How can you just switch sides like that?” she threw over her shoulder at Sokka. “How can you just abandon me?” 

His hands flew up in surrender. Clearly, he was just realizing now was not the time. “I’m not abandoning you,” he said quickly. “I’m just… taking a step back. To look at the problem as a whole.” 

“What’s that supposed to mean?” 

Sokka sat down cross-legged in the sand next to her, fiddling with the small grains. “I think Aang has a point. If this comet is really going to come and give all the firebenders extra power, then maybe we need someone like Lee on our side. Besides, Aang’s right --- it’s not like we’re going to find another firebender who would be so willing to teach Aang. And… I don’t think he would try to put us in danger intentionally. This is Aang we’re talking about. If he thinks it’s for the best, then maybe we should trust him.” 

She crossed her arms, turning away from him. Katara knew she was acting like a child, but she really didn’t care. “Aang’s a twelve-year-old kid.” 

“Yeah, but you’ve never hesitated to trust him until now.” 

She scoffed. “That’s because most of those decisions were helping him better himself as the Avatar. I just… “she shook her head. “I think he made the wrong call on this one.” 

“You supported this decision.” 

“But that was before I knew… I knew what he was.” 

He sighed, stayed silent for several moments. “Look,” he finally spoke, “I’ll always be hesitant about it too, and, I’ll be honest, I don’t really like the idea of a firebender being around us that much. But you heard Aang as well as I did --- if this is what he needs, then there’s really nothing we can do about it.” He lightly placed a hand on her shoulder. “Okay?” 

She stayed turned away from him for a minute more, then slowly faced him. “Okay,” she admitted, letting her defeat creep into her voice. “But there’s still something I don’t like about him.” 

Sokka shrugged. “Hey, maybe if we’re nice to him, who knows. One day, he might tell us what he’s talking about.” 

***

Aang waited, perched in Appa’s saddle so that he could see both sides of the island, until Katara and Sokka both dropped off into sleep. Beforehand, Katara had offered to take watch, but Aang had quickly silenced her with a look. 

“I’ll do it,” he said firmly. 

“Aang, you’ve had a long day,” she insisted. “Just let me- “ 

He kept a firm look on her until she finally relented, slinking off to her sleeping bag. Her and Sokka had taken refuge on one side of Appa, Lee on the other. Aang hadn’t seen him since the argument about two hours ago. 

When he saw both Sokka and Katara’s chests rising and falling evenly, Aang took his eyes off them and peered over the other side of the saddle. Lee was curled up on his side, back to Appa, one arm tucked under his head, the other hand resting on Momo’s back. The lemur was fast asleep, clutching the stolen Fire Sage hat. 

Aang dismounted Appa, moving the air currents around so that he made no sound when his feet hit the ground. He took a few light steps over toward Lee, extended a cautious hand. 

“What do you want, Avatar?” 

Aang froze, hand reeling back. “I’m sorry.” A beat. “Did I wake you?” 

“No. I don’t sleep.” 

“Okay.” Hold on. “Wait, what?” He plopped down crossed-legged behind Lee. “Why?” 

The other guy pushed himself up and turned, sitting across from Aang. Momo opened his eyes and let out a bleary, protesting chitter. “Don’t need to,” Lee said with a casual shrug. 

“Why?” Aang repeated. “How does that work?” 

Lee shrugged again. “I don’t get tired, don’t ever feel the need to. I’ve got a… difficult relationship with sleep, to say the least.” 

“But last night- “ 

“Life becomes so much easier when you realize just how much people pretend and act.” 

“I- oh.” The words registered. “Oh, I get it now.” 

From behind, Momo stumbled around and crawled into Lee’s lap. He let out a long, satisfied sigh and sunk back into sleep. 

“Well, if anything,” Aang said, breaking the silence, “I’m glad the animals like you. Momo is pretty opinionated, but Appa is neutral to just about everything. I’m surprised he did anything earlier.”

“Yeah. They do… “Lee ran his thumb over the space between Momo’s shoulders. 

“I’m sorry.” 

Lee’s eyes met his. “For what?” 

“For what Katara and Sokka said earlier,” Aang blurted.

Lee shook his head. “You don’t have to be.” 

“No, I do,” he argued. “I’m the one who wanted to bring you along, and because of that, we got forced into a situation where you had to reveal something you didn’t want to tell, and they treated you bad because of that, and- “ 

Lee held up a hand, and Aang stopped. “No. Your wanting to bring me along to teach you about spirits has nothing to do with the things they said. You’re not responsible for anything they said or did then, now, or whenever. They’re in control of their own actions. You don’t have to make excuses for them.” 

That was true, but- “I feel like I should have said something sooner.” 

“You’re the Avatar, not their dad. You don’t have an obligation to control them. Besides- “he shrugged for a third time” -I can take a few harsh comments.” 

“It’s the Avatar’s job to bring peace to the world.” Aang placed his elbow on his knee, rested his chin on his fist. “I’m supposed to bring goodwill between the nations. When they told me you were a firebender, I thought that this might be a chance for me to try that. To bridge the gap between two very different types of people.” 

“They reacted the way all people do when they hear something they don’t like.” 

“Violently?” 

“That’s one of the options. I was going to say ‘with anger,’ but that works just as well.” 

“They shouldn’t have reacted the way they did.” He thought of Katara’s water walls, Sokka drawing his weapons. “But I can’t say that in a similar situation I wouldn’t have done the same.” He had, in fact, done just the same, when they arrived at the Southern Air Temple.  

“And maybe I shouldn’t have yelled back,” Lee admitted. “I only just added to added to the fire. Staying calm would’ve been the best way to handle it, but, I didn’t, and just kept on.” He sighed. “I like to think I’ve grown way past that, but sometimes, it’s hard, to not throw something back out there and continue the argument. It’s not always something you can master easily. It takes time.” 

“Takes time?” Aang cocked an eyebrow. “You can’t be that much older than me.” 

“Give or take a few years… “ 

Aang just nodded, even though he had no idea what he meant. “You said that you don’t get involved with people like us. What did you mean?” 

Lee stiffened at that. “It’s… it’s a long story.” 

“I’ve got time. Besides, I was in the ice for a hundred years.” Aang shrugged. “I’m sure whatever it is, it’ll seem like a breeze.” 

Lee said nothing back. It was obviously a story he did not want to tell, like his scar, so Aang switched the topic. 

“Out of curiosity, how old are you?” 

“What?” 

“How old are you?” Aang repeated. 

“Sixteen.” 

“Huh.” 

“What?” Lee’s head tilted in confusion. “You sound like you don’t believe me.” 

Aang shrugged. “You seem older than that. Like, waaay older.” 

Lee pursed his lips. “I’m not sure whether to feel complimented or insulted by that.” 

Questions were starting to pop up into Aang’s mind, tumbling out of his mouth before he could process what they were. He felt comfortable with Lee now, as though he could ask him anything and expect an answer. “Also out of curiosity, when were you planning on telling us you were a firebender?” 

“I wasn’t,” he answered simply. “If it came up, I’d deal with it then. That’s not a good way to deal with your problems, so I wouldn’t recommend it.” 

“Thanks for the advice. Did you know there’s a ring of blue around your iris?” 

“Yes,” he answered stiffly. 

“I’ve only ever seen firebenders with gold eyes. Granted, all the ones I’ve met were trying to kill or capture me, so I didn’t get a good look at them, but still. Do you know why? Is there someone in your family with blue- “ 

“Avatar,” Lee interrupted. Aang suddenly realized he was becoming visibly uncomfortable with the conversation. “I think you’ve asked enough questions for one night.” 

“Oh.” Aang blushed. “Sorry.” 

As Lee looked back to Momo, Aang could not hep his eyes from straying to the scar. The realization that Lee was a firebender made Aang’s stomach churn even more when he thought about it. He did not know all that much about firebenders, but he knew they did not burn easily. Someone must have really wanted to hurt him in order to do that kind of damage. “I’m glad we brought you along, you know.“ 

“I kind of got that impression, but thanks. I guess.” 

Aang nodded. “So- “ 

Lee shifted. 

“Oh, sorry. This is my last question.” He stood. “When the time comes, do you think you could teach me firebending?” 

Lee gathered Momo into his arms and stood as well. He was a lot taller than Aang was, so he had to tilt his head down to meet Aang’s eyes. Looking up, Aang got that strange familiar feeling again, just like back in Key-fon’s village. As though he had met Lee before, but Aang would not know from where. “If that’s what you want,” he answered simply. 

Aang nodded eagerly. “Believe me, it is.” 

Lee nodded, giving Aang what looked like a fond, close-lipped smile, then brushed past him. He went over to one of Appa’s legs, then flopped down. Aang did not hear from him for the rest of the night. 

Chapter Text

Aang had been pacing back and forth across the saddle for the last thirty minutes, each of his breaths coming out in panicked pants. And honestly… it was making Sokka start to panic more than anything else. 

“Would you sit down?!” he demanded indignantly, turning his shoulders to face Aang from his spot on Appa’s head. The kid halted immediately, staring at him with wide, terrified eyes. “If we hit a bump, you’ll go flying off. What’s bugging you anyway?” 

“I can’t!” Aang exclaimed back. “And isn’t it obvious what’s bugging me? It’s what Avatar Roku said. I’m supposed to master all four elements before that comet arrives!” 

It was a logical thing to be concerned about, and if Sokka was in his position, he was not sure he would be acting any different, but he still grasped for some way to calm the kid down. Or at least get him to stop pacing. 

(Seriously, it was driving Sokka crazy.) 

“Well, let’s see… “he began slowly. “You pretty much mastered airbending, and that only took you a hundred-and-twelve years. I’m sure you can master three more elements by next summer.” 

“I haven’t even started waterbending, and we’re still weeks away from the North Pole!” Aang’s hands clapped to the side of his head, and he stared pacing once more. “What am I gonna do?!” 

Katara grabbed his wrist and pulled him down in the saddle next to her. “Calm down. If you want, I can try and teach you some of the stuff I know.” 

Sokka snorted to himself. He was always going to support his sister, but she did not know much. Still, at least someone was trying to teach Aang. That he couldn’t deny. 

“You’d do that for me?” the kid asked brightly. 

She nodded. “First- “she peered over the edge of the saddle” -we’ll need to find a good source of water.” 

Sokka snorted again. “Maybe we can find a puddle for you to splash in.” 

Katara threw him a glare, then turned her attention to Lee. “Any snappy comment from you, or are we allowed to do this?” 

Lee had been laying on the other side of the saddle from them on his back, head resting on the rim of it, shaping the small flames between his fingers into various shapes. Said flames, which had been in the shape of a bird, sputtered out at the sound of Katara’s voice. “He’s got to learn it at some point.” He refused to look at her, letting a flame weave back and forth between his fingers. “And, of course, factoring in all the pitstops you’ve already made, extrapolating to how many more you will based on that number, you should reach the North Pole by the time you’re… sixty-five.” He shrugged. “Give or take a few years. I guess it’s better he gets something now.” 

Katara made a move toward him across the saddle, but Aang grabbed her arm and pulled her back. “Let it go.” 

As much as she looked as though she did not want to, she complied with Aang’s wish. In the three days since the incident on the island, the other guy had been so quiet that Sokka had forgotten he was there most of the time. Aang had told them that Lee agreed to teach him firebending when the time came, which was a pretty nice gesture considering the things Sokka and Katara had said to him. 

In fact, if the guy wanted to continued to be mad at them and take jabs and snipe at them at every possible opportunity, Sokka would have completely understood. Personally, he felt he had reason to be mad at the Fire Nation for what they had done to him, to the world, but Lee… Lee was just a guy separate from all that. He couldn’t be much older than Sokka himself, so what horrendous things could he have possibly done? 

Maybe he had chosen to leave the Fire Nation because of what they were doing. Maybe he was chased away. Whatever the case may be, it was clear that, if he was choosing to help teach Aang firebending, then he couldn’t be all bad. That he couldn’t believe everything the Fire nation had said, right? 

Then, maybe it was rude and unfair that Sokka and Katara were so harsh to him.

But that was just hindsight. In the emotion-charged confrontation after the fiasco at Roku’s temple… yeah, maybe they had all said things that probably shouldn’t have been said. It had been like a group-bonding session, but instead of being peaceful about it they had screamed at each. 

But instead of doing any of the things Sokka had expected from him, Lee had completely pulled back from the other three. He didn’t seem like a very open guy in the first place, someone who was willing to spill all his emotions and past trauma and happenings at will. Sokka knew that something was going to have to crack for them to learn anything about him, but now, that moment seemed much farther away. With all the factors piling up, he was desperate to learn something, anything, the slightest details about Lee. 

But then they’d gone and screwed that all up. 

“Sokka, you’re going too far off to the right,” Lee said without taking his eyes off the flame shapes he was creating. 

Sokka jolted. “What?” He must’ve been staring at the guy the whole time. “Oh.” He tugged Appa’s reins to the left, course-correcting. 

He should’ve apologized to Lee. Even if they had both said things, threatening to leave someone on an island to die alone was pretty harsh. But admitting that he was in the wrong was difficult. 

Also, he wouldn’t lie, the guy terrified him. Not just because he was a firebender, but because there was something… different about him. Something Sokka couldn’t quite place his finger on. 

“Look!” Katara shouted, jolting Sokka from his thoughts. She was pointing down to a vague area on their left. “There’s a bunch of water over there!” 

Sokka maneuvered Appa in that direction, and they dropped into a thin, rock ravine (thin as ravines go, that is). A waterfall spewed from one end, creating a river that cut right down the middle of the ravine. Evergreen trees had sprung up in various areas along the sides. 

“Nice puddle,” Sokka muttered to himself, but Aang and Katara looked as though their birthdays had come early. 

Just a moment after they dismounted Appa, the bison flew right over the river and belly-flopped in. A giant wave rose around him, rising right over poor Momo, who went under as the wave fell. He emerged a second later, resembling an angry, wet cat. 

“Don’t start without me, boy!” Sokka looked over to see that, at some point, Aang had stripped out of his jumpsuit into his underthings and was frozen in a position as though he were about to dive into the river. 

“Remember why we’re here,” Katara chimed in quickly. 

Aang unfroze. “Oh, right,” he said, a blush rushing to his cheeks. “Waterbending practice… “he hastily pulled his jumpsuit back up over himself. 

“So, what am I supposed to do?” Sokka asked. 

“You could… “Aang glanced around at the ground and picked up a random branch” -you could clean the gunk out of Appa’s toes?” He held it out to him. 

Sokka crossed his arms. “So, while you guys are playing in the water, I’m supposed to be hard at work picking mud out of a giant bison’s feet?” 

“Mud and bugs,” Aang confirmed with a nod. 

Sokka considered it. What better things did he have to do? “Okay,” he said with a shrug, taking the branch from him. 

On his way over to Appa, he passed Lee and stopped by him. “And what about you? What’re you gonna do?” He held out the branch. “Do you want to help me?” Not that he expected Lee to agree. Really, he was just looking for an excuse to apologize to the guy. 

Unsurprisingly, Lee shook his head. “I think I’m good. I’ll just watch them. It’s been awhile since I’ve seen any other waterbenders.” 

“Okay.” Sokka turned to go- “Wait, you’ve seen other waterbenders?” 

“It’s a big world, Sokka.” 

And that was all the context he got. 

Sokka contemplated this as he stood on Appa’s stomach, scrubbing between the bison’s toes with the leafy part of the branch. Other waterbenders… Had he been to the North Pole? Sokka shook his head, eliminating that possibility. What business did a firebender have there? 

Unless… and Sokka was really stretching for something here… he was a war prisoner? 

Which seemed highly unlikely, upon further thought. Sokka had never met any war prisoners personally, but he just had the feeling Lee wasn’t one of those. 

Maybe there were other waterbenders in a different part of the world. That was a complete possibility. Although he had only heard of those from the Water Tribes, there was always the potential for others. 

Or, maybe, he said, his mind jumping at a different thought, maybe he’s a- 

Whoa, okay, slow down. He shook his head again. That was a ridiculous thought. They had already bared witness to Lee being a firebender. Unless there was a new rule where there could be two Avatars at once, there was no way he was a waterbender. He just couldn’t be. 

That would be ridiculous. 

From his place on Appa’s stomach, Katara’s voice floated over to him. “Okay, so this is a pretty basic move, but it still took me months to perfect. So, don’t be frustrated if you don’t get it right away.” She moved her feet shoulder-width apart and started pushing her arms forward and pulling them back. A smooth motion, smooth like the movements of a wave. “Just push- “she pushed, and an arc of the water moved outward against the rest of the river” -and pull” -she pulled her arms back, and it reeled toward the shore” -like this. The key is getting the wrist movement right.” 

“Like this?” Aang got to his feet from his crisscross position and repeated her movements. 

“That’s almost right. I’m sure if you keep practicing, you’ll- “

It only took a few pushes-and-pulls for the water to bend to Aang’s will. “Hey, I’m bending it already!” 

“Wow,” Katara said. “I can’t believe you got that so quickly. It took me two months to learn that move.” 

Aang shrugged. “Well, you had to figure it out all on your own. I’m lucky enough to have a great teacher.” 

That statement reassured Katara’s confidence. “Thanks.” 

“So… what’s next?” Aang asked eagerly, bouncing on his toes. 

“Okay, uh… this is a more difficult move. I call it streaming the water.” She moved her feet apart again and straightened her arms, slowly lifting them. A wobbly stream of water rose from the river and floated over toward her. It circled around her torso, weaved between her arms. “It’s harder than it looks.” The water spiraled around between her hands. “So don’t be disappointed if- “ 

And she looked over to where Aang had already mastered the move with little effort and much more style, with loops and twists and squiggles like snakes. Sokka shrugged. Maybe this whole “mastering the elements” thing wouldn’t be too difficult. 

Katara’s face fell just as the water splashed back into the river. “Nice work,” she said slowly as Aang steadily streamed his back into the river. “Though the flair was unnecessary… “ 

“Sorry.” When Katara did nothing, he said, “Well, don’t stop now. Keep ‘em coming!” At least he was an eager learner. 

“I kinda know this one move.” Katara turned toward the river. “But it’s pretty hard. I haven’t even completely figured it out yet. The idea is to create a big, powerful wave.” She swooped her arms down and brought them up sharply. A hump of water rose from the river. Even from his distance, Sokka could see her arms shaking from the effort as the water simultaneously began to bobble. Only a second later, it splashed back. Katara let out a loud, disappointed sigh. 

“So, like this?” Aang repeated her movement, and ‘lo and behold, a giant wave rose in front of him. It went up and up and up, hitting its crest just before it arced down and crashed on top of a yelling, terrified Sokka. 

Water slammed into him, and he was knocked off Appa’s stomach and into the river. He emerged a moment later, hacking and coughing, rubbing the water from his eyes. He heard a loud snort, and his attention turned to where Lee was sitting on a rock, observing the happenings. 

Aang grinned. “What else- wait, didn’t you try and throw one of those at Lee?” 

“I did,” Katara said stiffly. Sokka knew that passive-aggressive tone all too well. 

“Then why couldn’t you- “ 

“Emotions,” Lee said quickly with a shrug just as Katara opened her mouth to snap at Aang. 

Aang turned to him, oblivious to Katara’s agitation. “What do you mean?” 

“Emotionally-charged bending,” Lee continued as Sokka dragged himself out of the river, wringing out his clothes and hair. “Not safe, and not a very good way to use your bending. Sure, it’ll be more powerful and deadly, but also extremely volatile. You- “he motioned to Katara” -were so keen on trying to… kill me --- let’s not sugarcoat the matter --- that your emotions powered your bending. It’s usually how they can tell little kids are benders.” 

“That’s cool,” Aang said. “I’ll keep that in mind.” He turned to Katara, a brilliant, bright grin on his face. “What else you got?” 

None of Katara’s snappiness or anger had dissipated during Lee’s little spill. “That’s enough practicing for today,” she said through gritted teeth. 

“Yeah, I’ll say!” Sokka piped up, feeling relevant for the first time today, and pointed toward the water. “You just practiced our supplies down the river!” 

“Oh! Uh… I’m sorry?” Aang grinned sheepishly. “I’m sure we can find somewhere to replace all this stuff.” 

Sokka shook his head. “My life was hard enough when you were just an airbender… “ 

They traveled a bit along the ravine before finding a small port town. As they traveled through the streets, Sokka got the faint impression that this wasn’t the best neighborhood. And by faint, he meant that it was practically screaming at them. 

In an alleyway, a huge, buff man was holding up another, smaller, and skinnier one. “Please!” the small man begged. “I don’t have any money!” Guys with hard, cold eyes and cruel scowls stared at them as they passed, their weapons ever-so visibly strapped to their backs. One man stood on the counter of a stall, shaking a growling blue sack. “Who’s brave enough to look in this bag?” he dared with grandeur. 

Aang’s excited footsteps started to trail over to it, but Lee grabbed his arm and steered him back toward the group. 

They made it to the square of the town when they decided to stop. “We should split up to cover more ground,” Sokka announced, digging out the only bag they had managed to save, which was the money bag. He dumped a few money pieces into his hand and passed them to Katara. “Aang, Katara, you head that way- “he pointed to the right and listed off the items they needed to find. “And we go the other way. Meet back here in an hour.”

“Are you sure splitting up is the best idea?” Katara’s eyes suspiciously landed on Lee. 

“Yes,” Sokka said firmly, fixing her with a hard glare. “We’ll be fine.” 

She only cast him a concerned look before heading off with Aang. 

As they started through the town, Sokka tried to read the other guy’s body language. He didn’t seem to stiff, only alert, watching for any potential dangers. He also did not show annoyance at the thought of going with Sokka, so he took that as a sign that Lee was not mad at him. So, he worked up the courage to say the most impactful word that had ever come out of his mouth. 

“So.” 

Lee took his eyes off the town at the sound of Sokka’s voice. “So.” 

“Nice little town?” 

“Yeah,” Lee said slowly as they passed a woman jabbing at a guy with a sharp, pointy dagger. “Lovely place… “ 

Sokka swallowed. Yeah, maybe this wasn’t the best place to be for long. Luckily, he spotted a small shop. “Hey.” Sokka pointed to it. “We need some stuff from there.” 

When they approached and told the owner what they needed, she had haggled them, trying to raise the price to an absurd amount of money. They didn’t have much left of the money that King Bumi gave them, so they were going to have to use it wisely. And paying ten gold pieces for the item was definitely not that.

The shopkeeper, however, seemed to know their exact situation. She kept using tricks and loopholes in her words to try and get Sokka to turn over all their money. They had been there or an embarrassing amount of time before Lee finally stepped forward and said they were going to pay the original price for the item. It was that strange commanding tone Sokka had heard him use, the one he had used on them when they questioned too much about his past. The one he had used on the old general at the temple. 

Which, speaking of… 

The shopkeeper, slightly confused, handed over the item they needed and took the original price. Sokka stuffed it in his bag, and they headed off to find the next thing. 

Mustering up all his courage, Sokka sent up a prayer to whoever was listening before he asked the question: “Did you know that old guy?” 

Lee blinked, jolting from his own thoughts. “Which one? There have been several.” 

“The one at the temple. General what’s-his-name.” 

Lee’s steps slowly stopped, and he crossed his arms. “Iroh.” His eyes were angled down at the ground, away from Sokka’s. “General Iroh.” 

Sokka stopped walking as well, moving around so that he was angled slightly in front of Lee. “So, you do know him?” 

Lee finally looked up at hm. “Everyone knows him. General Iroh, Dragon of the West, Brother of the Fire Lord. Does that not ring a bell?” 

Sokka racked his brain, but when no prior information reappeared, he shook his head. “Vaguely, but I’m not entirely sure.” 

“Six-hundred-day siege of Ba Sing Se?” Lee attempted. “Surely, you’ve heard of that. I’m not trying to insult you when I say this, but the South Pole is a long way away from the rest of the world. Honestly, I wouldn’t be too shocked if you hadn’t heard of it.” 

And he wasn’t too offended by that. There was a lot about the war and the Fire Nation Sokka never knew from a combination of a) living so far away from the conflict, and b) his dad never telling him anything no matter how much Sokka pestered and bothered him about it. “Yyyeesss,” he finally answered. “Yes! I have heard of that! I remember when my dad first got word of it. Katara and I begged him to tell us more, but he wouldn’t. It wasn’t until after he left that we finally learned more about it from some loose-lipped elders.” 

“Your dad left?” Lee’s head raised slightly. “Where did he go?”  

“To fight in the war, like everyone else,” Sokka responded casually. “He decided it was finally time that we do something about it. You didn’t answer my question -- do you know the general?” 

Lee shrugged. “Well, I know him.” He considered that. “Not really. I know of him, but I do know him, but- “he shook his head. “It’s complicated.” 

“How do you know him, but know of him, but don’t know him?” It didn’t make any sense to Sokka, but he wanted answers. “I’m confused.” 

“Well… I maybe… sort of… kind of… broke onto his ship about a year-and-a-half ago.” He said the last half of the statement quickly, as though it were all one word.

Sokka stopped abruptly. “You what?” He was not sure if he heard Lee correctly. 

“Broke onto his ship. Did you not hear what I just said?” 

“Yes,” Sokka said defensively. “I just- why would you do such a thing?” 

Lee shrugged again. “There was something I wanted, and I could get it from a Fire Navy ship.” 

“Are you sure you couldn’t have gotten it from anywhere else?” 

“No.” He shook his head. “It was something that only the general had. His ship had docked had docked at the same port town that I was in, so I took the opportunity. If you want specifics, his quarters were the ones I broke into.” 

Sokka held up a hand. “Look, the fact that you broke into a Fire Navy ship and didn’t die is awesome notwithstanding, why- “Sokka searched for the right words to say but couldn’t find them. 

“Doesn’t matter why because Zhao caught me.” Lee sighed. “I never got what I wanted.”

Sokka shook his head. “Again, besides the fact that that is complete awesome, stealing is wrong.” 

“They’re Fire Nation,” Lee responded. “They’ve stolen the world from everyone else.” 

“But you’re- and don’t take this the wrong way- you’re Fire Nation. Or, you were.” Sokka still was not entirely sure what Lee’s relationship with the place was. 

“That’s true. Some part of me will always want to defend them because that’s what I am, because they’re my people, but I refuse to condone everything they’ve done in this conflict. Besides, what’s wrong with stealing from a thief? It’s just karma, isn’t it?” 

“Well… then that implies that you’re going to get something stolen from you next.” Sokka shrugged. “Right? Because you’re the thief now” 

Lee hummed. “I’m knew I was right, pegging you as the smart one of the group.” 

“Oh, uh… thanks?” He had threatened to kill this guy, and now he was complimenting him? Calling him the smart one? Nothing about Sokka’s actions supported that. 

(But he wasn’t going to argue.) 

 “It’s a never-ending cycle, you see,” Lee continued. “We’ll circle right back around to where we started.” 

“Uh… right.” Sokka blinked. “What does that mean?”

Lee motioned with his head to marketplace. “Well, let’s get going. The hour’s wasting away, and we still have stuff to get. I don’t feel like getting yelled at again by Katara.” And with that, he left, leaving a very confused Sokka to sprint after him.

They met up with Katara and Aang not long after, who had both taken refuge in an empty market stall. They had gotten all of the things Sokka had asked for, but Katara told him they only had one copper piece left. 

Sokka dug the remainder of his money out. “Okay, so we’ve got exactly three copper pieces left,” he said, adding them together. “Let’s spend them wisely.” 

Aang clasped his hands behind his back and rocked forward on his toes, a sheepish expression coming over his face. “Uh, make that two copper pieces, Sokka.” 

Katara turned and shot him a questioning look. 

“I couldn’t say no to this whistle.” Aang pulled it out from behind his back, revealing a bison-shaped whistle. He drew in a big breath and blew into it, only for the sound of hissing air to emerge. 

Sokka fixed him with a stern look. “It doesn’t even work.” 

Momo, on the other hand, had a different opinion. He let out a screech and batted at the back of Aang’s head, then swooped over and took refuge on Lee’s shoulders. 

“See?” Sokka jabbed his thumb at the lemur. “Even Momo thinks it’s a piece of junk.” 

Aang’s face fell.

From there, Sokka suggested, “Let’s try up by the docks. There are ships up there. We might find something interesting.” 

They made their way up to the docks. There were a few small ships floating around in the harbor, some docked, but the one that caught Sokka’s eye was the biggest one. It was docked, with giant, flowing red sails. A man stood at the end of the dropped gangplank, shouting as passersby. His shouting voice floated over to them. 

“Earth Nation! Fire Nation! Water Nation!” It had the flair of a haggling salesperson. “So long as bargains are your inclination, you’re welcome here! Don’t be shy! Stop on by!” 

There seemed to be a mutual agreement between Sokka, Katara, and Lee that they were going to completely ignore this guy, but Aang once again started drifting toward him like a distracted puppy. 

“Oh, you there!” The man suddenly appeared in the corner of Sokka’s vision, and he jumped. “I can tell from your clothing you’re the world traveling types.” He called to them as they passed, going farther and farther, “Perhaps I can interest you in some exotic curious?” 

Aang --- sweet, little, innocent, naïve Aang --- stopped, turning to face the man. “What are curios?” 

The man blinked. “I’m not entirely sure, but we got ‘em.” He offered Aang a toothy grin as he took the boy around the shoulders and pulled him toward the gangplank. The other three hurried after him. 

They emerged up the gangplank in a cramped, dark cargo hold, lit by ominous yellow lanterns. Stuff had been piled in various corners, stacked haphazardly on shelves. There were a variety of items, from knives, swords, bows and arrows, to pieces of jewelry and other oddly shaped circular objects. Katara narrowed her eyes suspiciously at a terrifying monkey statue with bloodred rubies for eyes and teeth, a necklace of said rubies draping down its chest. 

“Lovely place,” Sokka muttered quietly to Lee. “I’m really enjoying the whole ‘haunted artifacts’ vibe.” He picked up a dagger off a nearby table that looked like it had been made in the Water Tribe. “Where do they even get this stuff?” 

“I’ve never seen such a fine specimen of lemur,” a new voice suddenly said. 

Sokka’s head whipped around to where a man --- the ship’s captain, if his purple clothing and wide-brimmed hat were any indication --- stepped out from a darkened passageway. He had an animal perched on his shoulder, something that looked like a hybrid between a feathery-green parrot and a dinosaur. “That beast would fetch me a hefty sum if you’d be interested in bartering.” 

The dinosaur-bird let out a loud squawk. 

Momo hissed at it, and Aang quickly swept Momo off his shoulders and clutched the lemur tightly in his arms. “He’s not for sale,” Aang said defiantly. 

“Look at this Aang!” Katara’s voice drew everyone’s attention. Aang kept a wary eye on the ship’s captain as he stepped over to her. Katara had drawn out a scroll from a shelf. “It’s a waterbending scroll!” 

Aang gaped at it as well. “Where did you get a waterbending scroll?” 

Sokka exchanged a look with Lee, both of them sharing the same sentiment. Wherever the captain got this scroll…

This couldn’t be good.

The captain roughly snatched it out of Katara’s hands. “Let’s just say I got it at a most reasonable price --- free.” He rolled it up and slipped it back into the shelf.

“Wait a minute,” Sokka said slowly, all the pieces coming together in his mind, “sea-loving traders with suspiciously acquired merchandise and pet reptile-birds… “

It all fell into place. 

He wheeled on the man who had ushered them in. “You guys are pirates!” 

The man let out a dark chuckle and threw an arm around Sokka’s shoulders. “We prefer to think of ourselves as high-risk traders.” 

Lee snorted and crossed his arms. “Like that’s any better.” 

The man chuckled again, this time more awkwardly. Under Lee’s sharklike stare, he dropped his arms from around Sokka’s shoulders and moved away.

Katara dug around in her pocket, pulling out their two wimpy copper pieces. “How much for the traded scroll?” 

“I’ve already got a buyer lined up,” the captain said briskly, stepping around behind a table. “A nobleman in the Earth Kingdom.” A wicked grin came over his face. He leaned closer to Aang and Katara. “Unless you kids have… two hundreds gold pieces on you right now.” 

Lee sighed loudly and exasperatedly, shook his head. “Alright, guys, this is enough. We don’t really need- “ 

Aang silenced him with a raised hand. “I know how to deal with these guys, Katara.” He nudged her with his elbow and raised a suggestive eyebrow. Pirates love to haggle.” He held out a hand. Katara raised an eyebrow, but dropped the pieces into hit anyway. 

Aang winked at her. “Watch and learn.” 

Confidently, he puffed out his chest and strode up to the pirate captain. He leaned back against the table, tossing the copper pieces back and forth. “What say ye to the price of… one copper piece?” He tossed it into the air, caught it with the other hand, and held it up to the pirate captain, a knowing grin on his face. 

The captain looked less than amused, bored of dealing with these dumb, stupid kids. 

“Okay, what about… two copper pieces?” Aang flashed the other one up, as if that made anything better. 

“It wasn’t funny the first time,” the captain snapped. Aang jumped back. “And certainly less the second.” 

“C’mon, Aang.” Katara tugged on his shoulder. “It’s not worth it.” 

And she was right. The pirates were not going to haggle, so why waste their time? “Aye!” Aang agreed. “We be casting off now!” 

“Oh, spirits,” Lee muttered, looking extremely tired. 

“What was that about, Katara?” Aang asked as they stepped off the boat. 

“Yeah,” Sokka said. “I was just starting to browse their boomerang collection.” 

“Oh,” Lee said, as if having an epiphany, “so, stealing things is wrong, but buying stolen things isn’t?” 

“What?” Aang glanced back and forth between the two of them. 

Sokka held up his hands in surrender. “Hey, I’m just saying, I technically didn’t know it was stolen when I bought it. So, you can’t prosecute me.” 

“You’d rather be caught with the stolen goods? That’s no better, Sokka.” 

“You’re the one who tried to steal from- “ 

“Guys, cool it,” Katara said. She wrapped her arms around herself. “I’ll just feel a lot better when we’re away from here.” 

“You dropped it rather quickly,” Lee said. 

“Dropped what?” Katara’s response was quick. “I didn’t drop anything.” 

“No longer interested in having the scroll, I see… “ 

Katara blinked, a slight blush coming to her face. “It- it wasn’t worth two hundred gold pieces.” She quickly looked away from Lee. 

“Hey, you!” The man who had ushered them onto the boat. The four of them stopped walking to see him sprinting across the deck to the ship. “Get back here!” 

“Well, well,” Aang said smugly. “Look who’s come to their senses. I guess the haggling paid off.” 

Katara slipped behind Sokka. He gave her a suspicious look, but his attention was quickly diverted to where a loud cry of war radiated from the pirate ship. The next thing he knew, a hoard of them were leaping off the ship, weapons in hand. Sharpy, pointy, heavy weapons Sokka was pretty sure were intended for them four. 

“I- I don’t think these pirates ar where to trade with us,” Katara said shakily. 

“Yeah, sure they are,” Lee responded. “Here to trade a few… no, I’ll keep that to myself. It’s morbid. I don’t think we need that right now.” 

And with that, they shared their one collective braincell, turned, and sprinted away.

“Get back here!” one of them shouted, the group following. 

They turned a right down an alley, four of them hot on their tail, then a left. As they passed a vase of water, Katara drew her arms up, then swept them sharply down. The water rose, splashed to the ground, and froze. One of the pirates slipped on the ice, but the other three leaped over it. 

They turned another right. Katara, Sokka, and Lee dodged around a cabbage cart in the middle of the street, knocking a few off in the process. The much disgruntled vendor snatched them before they could hit the ground, clutching them protectively to his chest. Aang leaped right through the cart. As he hit the ground, he swung his staff back. A powerful gust of air sent the cabbages flying back into the remaining three pirates. 

“MY CABBAGES!” the horrified vendor screamed. 

As they turned down another alley, the remaining pirates appeared out of an opening in front of them. Sokka skidded as he attempted to wheel around, haphazardly sprinting after the other three. 

“I hope that lemur of yours has nine lives!” one of the pirates called tauntingly. 

Soon enough, the three pirates had them backed into a corner. “So,” the one with the lipstick said, a smirk on his lips, “who gets to taste the steel of my blades first?” He gave a dramatic flourish. 

“Uh… no thanks?” Aang tried. 

“rEally?” Sokka said next, holding his hands up. “You’re going to kill us over nothing?” 

“Oh, it’s certainly something to them,” Lee said bitingly. “Isn’t it, Katara?” 

His sister paled at the words. A sinking feeling dropped into Sokka’s stomach.

“Move,” Aang ordered. Katara and Sokka both stepped out of the way as Aang leaped toward the pirates with a twirl and a mighty wave of his staff. A gust of wind blew the bewildered three right off their feet and through the air with a puffing storm of dust. When it all cleared, they were no where to be seen, leaving the four to escape the town. 

“You know,” Aang began when they made it back to the ravine, plopping down on the ground by a large rock, “I used to kind of look up to pirates, but those guys are just terrible.” 

“I don’t understand why they were chasing us.” Sokka dropped the bag of stuff off his shoulder. “Are they just really that desperate for customers? Besides, it’s not like we took anything?” 

It was at that moment Lee’s head lifted, crossed his arms, and his attention turned to Katara. Her hands were clasped behind her back, and she rocked forward on her toes. 

Sokka’s eyes slid over to her as well. “It’s not like we took anything, right?” 

She shrugged. “Funny story actually.” And from behind her back, she thrust out a hand to reveal the waterbending scroll clasped tightly within her fingers. 

Aang shot up off the ground. “No way!” 

“Isn’t it great?” Any sheepishness Katara had had vanished in an instant. 

“That’s why they were trying to hack us up!” Sokka pointed an accusatory finger at the scroll, as if it had done this all itself. “You stole it!” 

Katara crossed her arms. “I prefer to think of it as ‘high-risk trading,’” she responded smugly. 

Aang laughed. “Good one.” But when he saw that no one else was, his face dropped into a solemn expression. 

“Sokka, where do you think they got it?” Katara reasoned. “They stole it from a waterbender!” 

Spirits, she was doing the whiny little sister voice. The one that won her every argument in Gran-Gran’s eyes no matter how evidence-based Sokka’s own refute was. 

“Stolen property or not- “Lee stepped up beside Sokka, who had not been expecting him there and jumped” -the premise still stands. You just made us a fair few, dangerous enemies for that.” 

“He’s right,” Sokka added. “You put all of our lives in danger just so you could learn some stupid, fancy splashes!” 

“These are real waterbending forms!” Katara shook the scroll at him. “You know how crucial it is for Aang to learn waterbending!”

Lee let out a contemptuous scoff. “Oh, yes. How absolutely crucial for Aang.” 

The aforementioned Aang raised his hands in surrender. 

Katara’s jaw dropped, and she took a step forward. “How dare you say that to me! You don’t get what it’s like!” 

“I know you just put us in a really bad situation for that,” Lee fired back. “So when you wake up tied to the mast of a ship with a sword point at your throat, don’t come crying to me.” 

“Guys-” Sokka started. 

Neither were listening to him. Katara spoke next: “You can just leave, you know, if you want to go be right all the time. So far, you’ve been more of a hindrance than a help, and you’ve taught Aang nothing!” She shook the scroll again. “I’m at least trying to be useful!” 

“Katara!” Aang said. 

Lee’s jaw clenched, and he stared her down with cold, hard eyes. To Sokka’s surprise, his sister did not back away or even flinch under the look. “Believe me,” he eventually said, “it’s a tempting thought.” And with that, he turned and walked away from them.

Katara started after him, but Sokka held out an arm to stop her. “Lay off it.”

“But- “ 

“Katara.” 

She looked as though she very much did not want to do just that, yet still backed off. “What’s done is done,” she said with an air of finality. “We have it, so we might as well use it.” 

Sokka held her defiant expression for a long moment before throwing his arms into the air in frustration and letting out a loud huff. “Whatever… “he muttered, stalking away from her. He was tired of having to deal with her. The repercussions of what she did would be her problem to deal with, and he wasn’t planning on helping her in the slightest. 

“I just want to try this one move first, and then it’s all yours,” Katara said minutes later. She had spread the scroll out on a tree stump and was pointing to the third one of the four. “Here, hold it open for me.” She handed it to Aang, and he did just as she asked, holding it wide open for her to see. 

Sokka sat on. Wherever Lee had stormed off to, he had yet to reemerge from. Privately, Sokka was concerned he had taken Katara’s advice and frankly just up and left. 

Honestly, Sokka thought he would have lasted longer.

“The single Water Whip,” Katara commented, running through the movements quickly. “Looks doable…” She stepped over to the river. With one knee slightly bent, she reached her arms out and lifted them upward, drawing out a long stream of water. It lifted into the arm and curled back in the shape of a hook as she turned her shoulders, taking her arms around behind her back. But when she flung them forward, the water retaliated and slapped her right in the forehead. 

Sokka snorted. 

“What’s so funny?” she snapped, clearly not seeing the giant red whelp on her forehead. 

Sokka shook his head, laughing to himself. “I’m sorry, but you deserved that.” He turned his attention to Aang, who was still obediently holding the scroll open. “You’ve been duped. She’s only interested in teaching herself.” 

“Aang will get his turn once I figure out the Water Whip,” Katara said angrily, in a tone that very much confirmed Sokka’s words. She retried it with a completely different stance only to have the whip fly in the opposite direction and smack poor Momo on the rear. 

Katara let out a frustrated noise. “Why can’t I get this stupid move?!” 

“You’ll get there,” Aang encouraged, and Katara sent him a sour look as he set the scroll down on a stump and moved over to the edge of the river. Aang moved his feet apart and repeated her movements much more smoothly than Katara had. “You’ve just gotta shift your weight through the stances.” And when he thrust his arms out, he completed the Water Whip perfectly. “The key to bending is- “ 

But Katara was clearly have none of it. “Would you please shut your air hole?! Believe it or not, your infinite wisdom gets a little old sometimes! Why don’t we just throw the scroll away since you’re so naturally gifted?!”

It was only then that she realized Sokka was giving her a look. “What?!” she snapped. Sokka jutted his chin toward Aang, who looked on the verge of tears. 

It took Katara a moment. “Oh.” 

“Yeah, oh.” 

“I’m so sorry,” she said quickly and sincerely. “I don’t know what came over me.” When she stepped toward Aang, he took one back. Something flashed over Katara’s face. “You know what, it won’t happen again.” She rolled up the scrolled and held it out to him. “Here, this is yours. I don’t want to have anything to do with it anymore.” 

Aang’s eyes flitted down to her hand suspiciously before gingerly taking it from her grip. “It’s- it’s okay, Katara,” he responded shakily. 

“Since we’re all in the mood for apologies,” Sokka interjected, “what about Momo?” He motioned to the lemur. “He’s the real victim here.” 

“I’m sorry, Momo,” Katara said, squatting down next to him. 

“And what about me?” Sokka continued. “There was that time you- “ 

“No more apologies!” Katara suddenly snapped. Sokka jumped, and Momo scampered off. Decidedly, that was the last time he would try to push the limits today. 

*** 

Katara laid awake, staring into the dancing flames of the fire, until the other two fell asleep. It was not long until Sokka and Aang’s breaths faded into a steady, similar rhythm. Lee had yet to reappear, but that was the least of her concern.

She slowly slipped out of her sleeping back, then snatched the end of the scroll from Sokka’s. It had begging for her to take it for hours, and it felt good to finally have her hands on it again. With that, she headed back for the river. 

Oh, yes. How absolutely crucial for Aang. Lee’s dismissive words came back to her on her walk. She let out a frustrated noise and kicked a nearby rock out of anger. So what if she wanted to learn waterbending as well? She was a waterbender, for spirits’ sake. The last bender of the Southern Water Tribe. She had never had anyone to teach her growing up, no reference for anything other than the stories she had heard or techniques she invented herself. Nothing about her form was refined, professional, effective at all. 

“He doesn’t get it,” she muttered to herself. He got to grow up in a world where his bending was celebrated, where it was feared. Where there were more than enough people to teach him how to use it. Everything got to be easy for him. 

She had lost people because of what she was. He didn’t understand that. 

She opened the scroll, quickly read over the Water Whip forms. It wasn’t fair that Aang had picked up everything. She knew more about waterbending, having grown up knowing she was one. She should have mastered it first. 

Katara was going to master it if it was the last thing she did. 

And after every failed attempt, it might as well have been. 

No matter what she did, the water refused to cooperate. It smacked her in the face several times, broke several rocks, hit a tree twenty feet away from her intended target, fell limply back into the river. And she was getting completely fed up with it. 

It took everything in her not to scream. 

“Come on, water!” she shouted. “Work with me here!” She stepped back, then tried something different. “Ok, what if I- ow!” It slapped her in the face. 

She swore at it, then took a two-minute breather. “You just want to mock me, don’t you?” Katara shouted at the water, hands on her hips. “You’ve always done what I say, but then Aang comes along and ‘Oh, we like him instead!’ Well, guess what?! It’s not funny!” 

“No, it’s not.”

Katara let out a loud screamed, heart leaping in her chest. She wheeled around to the sound of the voice. 

Lee was leaning against a tree, arms crossed, his expression eerily calm. “But it is quite hysterical to watch you scream at it.” 

She rolled her eyes. “Oh, ha ha. Watching me suffer must be a favorite past time of yours.” 

He shrugged. “Depends on the mood I’m in.” 

She shook her head in disgust. “Just go away. I can tell you that I’m not in the mood.” 

“In the mood for what?” 

“For exactly that!” she snapped. “All this superiority talk, like you’re better than us or something. Like you know something that we don’t.” 

He chuckled. “Well, we could talk in circles about what I know that you don’t.” 

“I don’t believe it. You are just about the most infuriating person I’ve ever met.” 

“Oh, and we’re back at the beginning.” 

“We’re- “she blinked, “what?” 

“We’re back at the beginning,” he repeated. “Right at the start of this conversation. You say something bad about me, I give you a quip, you get angry, and we keep going. It’s all just a cycle.” He sighed. “The world just moves in a bunch of cycles, you know. Hate, love, thievery, prejudice. On and on and on until we’re all back where we started. But that begs the question --- where did we start? What comes first, the chicken or the egg? Did we all start with hate that turned to love, love that turned to prejudice, thievery that led to hate? That is the question.” 

She blinked again. “What?”  

“Don’t spend too much time by yourself. Your thoughts can be a dangerous tool.” 

“I- “she shook her head again” -no. You know what? I’m not going to let you get to me. If you are not going to be helpful, then you might as well go away. I have to practice.” She turned back to the river to try again, only for the water to quaintly quiver when she attempted to lift it. 

“Why can’t I do this?!” she shouted. 

“Aang was right.” Those were the last words she wanted to hear in the moment. She tossed Lee an evil glare as he stepped up beside her. “You aren’t shifting your weight through the stances. To properly bend the water, you have to move with it.” 

She crossed her arms. “And what would you know about waterbending?” 

“I would happen to know quite a lot,” he replied calmly. She did not detect any of the superior snarkiness from earlier. The statement was genuine. 

“How?” she dared to ask. 

“Let’s just say I have a history with waterbending.” He moved to try the form on his own. “You have the arm movement right, but if you shift your weight, you’ll really be able to feel the flow of the water.” He drew his arms up, mimicking the movement of drawing a stream from the river. “In order to really understand the element you are bending, you have to feel that flow.” He turned, swinging his arms back. “The more you become one with the element- “he flicked his arms forward” -the easier bending will be.” 

Katara stubbornly kept her arms crossed, glaring at him. She hated to admit it, but the more she turned his words over in her head, the more they made sense. “Fine.” She ran through the form. 

“No, no. That’s the exact same way you’ve been doing it.” He stepped closer to her. “If you keep doing it wrong, you’ll never get it.” 

She threw her arms out in frustration. “Since you know everything, how do you suggest I- “

“Look.” He came up behind her and gently grabbed her wrists.

Katara drove her back into him. 

He stumbled back. “Okay, fair enough. Probably should have gone into that with a little more warning. My sister would have done the same thing.” 

“You have a sister.” 

He paused. “I used to.” 

Katara wanted to press further, but she shoved her curiosity down. 

“But I can help you understand the move better, trust me,” he continued, holding out his hands. 

Reluctantly, she allowed him to to take her wrists, his chest to her back. Katara could not help the slight blush that spread over her cheeks. She had no attraction to him, but this was the closest she had ever been to a guy that was not Sokka. She took immediate notice that his hands were warm around her wrists, far warmer than a normal person’s. 

He lifted her arms up, mimicking the first part of the movement. “Shift your weight forward.” Lee leaned onto his front foot, and she followed. “Then back.” She twisted her shoulders around, moving backward. “Then forward again.” Miming the flicking motion, she did just so. “That make sense.” 

“A- a little more,” she begrudgingly admitted. 

Lee dropped her wrists and stepped back. Her skin was cold where his hands had been. 

“Try it.” 

She di. 

He nodded. “That’s a lot better. Keep doing that, and you’ll have it before long.” 

She nodded too. “Yeah, maybe.” A moment of awkward silence followed, and she fumbled for another question. “So… is the whole shifting your weight thing similar to something you do for firebending?” 

He shrugged. “Firebending is… different, certainly. Every element is in their own right. Fire is erratic and powerful. Your movements have to be strong and controlling. You can’t let it get out of hand. Water, on the other hand, is soft and gentle and responsive. It goes along with your movements instead of trying to do its own thing. That’s why you try to keep going with the movements.”  

You can’t let it get out of hand, echoed in her head as her eyes lingered on his scar. “Is that where- “ 

“No,” he said matter-of-factly. “That is not where it came from. This was… quite intentional.” 

“Oh.” 

He nodded. “Yeah, oh.” 

“Who- “ 

“Please. Just drop it.” 

Personal question. Okay. She nodded once more. 

“Do you think you’re good to try it out here on your own?” 

“Yeah. Yeah, yeah, definitely,” she said. “I think I got it.” 

“Good. And, look.” He stepped closer to her and lowered his voice. “I know I attacked for stealing that earlier. While I do stand by what I said and I don’t condone thievery --- especially when it puts your friends on the line --- I’m glad you have it. It belongs in the hands of a waterbender.” 

“So, what I’m hearing is to only steal when it’s necessary?” She raised a suggestive eyebrow. 

“Only when it’s necessary.” 

When he turned and disappeared into the forest, she found she had more questions than ever before. She tried to thank him but could not find the words to. 

She kept practicing, going through the form over and over again until her arms were dead exhausted, when she heard a crackling in the brush. 

She froze. “Aang? Sokka? Lee?” No response. “Is that you?” She pushed the brush apart. 

On the other side, where the ravine’s river met with the greater, she was greeted by the site of the all-too familiar pirate ship from earlier. 

Katara swore internally, her panic rising quickly. She dropped the brush back and turned to sprint back to camp, her warnings right on the tip of her tongue- 

A huge burly man had appeared in her path, and she crashed right into him. He grabbed her by the biceps. 

“Let me go!” she shouted. She swung her hands upward, flinging whip of water into his face. He sputtered out in surprise, grip slipping. She shoved around him and continued her sprint, snatching the scroll off the stump on her way. She had almost made it to the treeline when another figure appeared, and she skidded to a halt to prevent another crash. 

In the dark, it took her a moment to recognize the new figure as the old general from Roku’s temple. General Iroh, she remembered Zhao calling him. 

A new burst of panic hit her. If the General was here, Zhao might be as well- 

General Iroh took a step toward her. Katara stumbled back, tripping over her own feet and falling to the ground. She scrabbled away pathetically on the ground to try and escape him. “Get away from me!” 

General Iroh stopped, holding his hands up in surrender. “Wait, young lady, I just want to- “

Someone suddenly grabbed Katara from behind, hefting her from the ground. She let out a terrified cry that was quickly silenced by a hand being clapped over her mouth. The waterbending scroll slipped from her hand, and the general snatched it off the ground. 

“Tie her up!” The pirate captain appeared out of of the corner of her vision. He pointed to a tree, and she was dragged over to it. 

“No!” General Iroh argued. “That is completely unnecessary!” 

“That girl is a waterbender,” the pirate captain snarled at him. “She will escape at the first chance.” 

“A waterbender?” the old general breathed as Katara’s arm were forced behind the tree, a rope wrapped around her. The situation was achingly familiar. “Truthfully?” 

The pirate who had tied her up stepped aside, and the general stepped up to her. 

“What do you want from me?” she demanded.

He held his hands up in surrender once more. “I just want to talk. I- “ 

She snorted. “Just want to talk?” With her next words, she channeled what little of Lee had rubbed off on her. “You’re doing a spectacular job of convincing me of that.” 

“They said they would find you. They did not say they would do this.” 

She rolled her eyes. “And which one of us is the one who trusted pirates?” 

He pursed his lips. “I just want to speak with the Avatar. Where is he?” 

“Like I would tell you. The farther away he is from the Fire Nation, the better. You’ll just hand him over to Zhao!” 

General Iroh shook his head. “Zhao is not here. He does not know I have undertaken this venture. He remains on the ship at the port.” 

She scoffed. “Somehow, I find that hard to believe.” 

The general sighed tragically, then motioned to the pirate captain. “Leave us.” 

“Not a chance, old man,” the pirate captain said. “You promised us the waterbending scroll. Then we’ll think about leaving.” 

“Oh, you mean this?” General Iroh procured it from his long sleeves. “I am afraid I cannot give it to you until I have the Avatar. You have yet to complete that task, so I believe I will hold onto this.”

The pirate captain crossed the distance between them and jabbed a finger into the general’s chest. “You are not in charge of this operation, old man. Not anymore. Search the area!” he shouted to the other pirates. “Bring the Avatar to me! Don’t even think about following us, General.” And with that, the captain stormed off with the rest of his crew. 

“No, by all means,” General Iroh muttered bitterly. He looked back to Katara with a hopeful expression. 

“The answer still hasn’t changed.” 

The general sighed. “Not one of my wisest decisions, to be sure.” 

She surveyed him. In no way did he seem as though he wanted to fight or hurt her at all. “What do you want with Aang, anyway?” 

“It is a private concern. You would not understand.” 

“Try me.” 

He barked out a laugh. “A worthy companion of the Avatar you are. Truthfully, you would not understand. It is a personal matter. I just- “his eye suddenly became distant. “I just need to speak with him.” 

The sun was just beginning to rise over the horizon when the pirate crew emerged from the woods with a less-than-stellar report: 

“The Avatar is not here,” the captain reported gruffly. 

“What?” both the general and Katara burst out at the same time. 

“He’s nowhere to be found, nor are the girl’s companions,” he added. 

“No.” The general shook his head. “That’s not possible.” 

Katara could not help but celebrate internally. If they could not find the boys, then that meant they must have gotten away. 

They’ll come back for me, she whispered to herself. I just need to wait a little longer. 

“Believe it or not, they are.” The captain surveyed the general dismissively. “They move a lot faster than you do. They’re probably long gone by now.” He shrugged. “No worries. We’ll just have to take her and the scroll.” 

Katara’s eyes widened, heart leaping. She pressed herself further back into the tree. 

“No!” General Iroh inserted himself between them, holding an arm out to stop the approaching pirate captain. Behind the captain, the crew tensed, clearly eager for a fight. “We had a deal. The Avatar for the scroll.” 

“Deals change, General. Now get out of my way before I make my men go through you.” 

“I am the brother of the Fire Lord,” General Iroh said defiantly. “You would not dare.”

The captain paused, then burst out laughing. His crew followed suit. “The brother of the Fire Lord. As if that will get you anything. I believe the correct title is disgraced brother of the Fire Lord. We’ve all heard about the fall of the great Dragon of the West. How he’s just not quite the same anymore. Don’t press your luck. Just get out of our way.” 

As they descended further into an argument, Katara felt a presence behind her. “Don’t freak out,” Sokka hissed in her ear. “I’m going to get you out of here. If they turn their attention back to you, Aang’s going to drop in and cause a distraction.” 

“Are you guys alright?” She felt the rope being tugged against as he started shearing it with his machete. 

“We’re fine. But, Katara… there’s a reason for it. It has to do with Lee.” 

Her interest piqued. “What about him?” 

Sokka sputtered out in disbelief. “I can’t explain it, but somehow… he made the pirates go away.” One strand of the rope dropped to the ground. “They were right on top of us. They saw us. But he stepped in. Told them to leave, that we were never there. And they did.” She could almost imagine Sokka shaking his head. “Katara, it- it doesn’t make any sense. It’s almost like he controlled them. When we tried to ask, he acted like nothing had happened. Like we were crazy. But I know what I saw.” The second strand dropped away. “There’s something really weird going on with him.” 

“Yeah, kind of figured that out for myself.” The argument between General Iroh and the pirate captain seemed to be coming to an end. “Just hurry up. We can discuss it later.” 

The final rope fell away. Sokka stepped around the tree and sheathed his machete. “C’mon, we’ve got to go.” He grabbed her wrist. 

Before they could even move, one of the pirate crew shouted, “HEY!” 

They froze. Sokka swore loudly. “Aang, this would be a really good time to drop in!” 

The pirate captain shoved Iroh out of the way, drawing a dagger. The rest of the pirate crew drew their own weapons, advancing on Katara and Sokka. 

Appa dropped from nowhere out of the sky, landing between Katara and Sokka and the pirates. Aang flicked his reins, and the bison reared back. The pirates cowered beneath his massive shadow. Appa slammed back to the ground, and with a slam of his front feet, a cloud of dust exploded, an invisible gust of wind throwing the pirates back into the river. 

Appa’s tail dipped down, and Lee slid down it to the ground, Momo perched on his shoulders. “C’mon. We’ve got to go.” 

Sokka snorted. “You think?” He gave Lee a wide berth as he hurried up Appa’s tail and climbed over into the saddle. 

Lee looked to Katara, his eye a strangely radiant blue, and motioned to the saddle. She started for it but quickly froze. “The scroll!” 

“I’ll get it! Go!” 

She look at him hesitantly. 

“Go!” he urged. 

But just as she did, she saw the general appear behind him. Katara opened her mouth to warn him. 

Lee took notice in time to whip around, starting backward away from the slowly advancing general. “Katara, get on the bison.” 

“Guys, we’ve gotta move!” Aang shouted. The pirates had pulled themselves out of the water only to be blasted away once more by a stomp of Appa’s feet. 

“But- “ 

“Katara, please.” 

She threw her hands in the air in frustration and reluctantly followed the order. But as she was climbing onto the saddle, Lee’s voice floated up. “Give me the scroll.”

She glanced over Appa’s tail to see the general go stock-still, like a statue. Robotically, he held it out, which Lee snatched from his lax grip. 

“Get out of here,” Lee said, voice ringing through the air. “Go back to your ship. This whole endeavor was going to be a failure anyway.” 

The general blinked, his eyes flashing blue for a moment. Katara felt her jaw drop --- she recognized that shade of the color. 

The general turned ninety degrees to his left and started off, idly humming to himself. 

Her jaw dropped even farther. Wait- 

Lee turned back to Appa, stopping when he realized Katara had seen the whole thing. 

“What was that?” she demanded as he climbed up Appa’s tail. 

“Don’t worry about.” He thrust the scroll back into her hands, stepping back over into the saddle. 

“Sorry, but I think I’d rather do the exact opposite.” She followed, pulling both her legs in. Aang let out a “Yip, yip!” and flicked the reins. Before the pirates could pull themselves out of the river once more, they were off. 

They had not been in the air long when Sokka wheeled on Lee. “Alright, what is going on with you? And don’t even act like you don’t know what I’m talking about!” he added quickly as Lee opened his mouth to interrupt. “I saw you pull it again back there on the general! They saw it too!” 

Katara and Aang both nodded eagerly. 

Lee shrugged. “Don’t worry about it.” 

Sokka let out a disbelieving laugh. “I’m sorry, but you can’t just control people like that! Didn’t read to me like you had a dealing with the pirates or anything! So, what’s up with you? What’re you not telling us?” 

“A lot!” Lee suddenly stood up in the saddle, towering over Sokka. Her brother cowered back as Lee continued, “There’s a lot that you don’t want to know, and a lot that you wouldn’t understand.” He plopped back down. “Maybe some day, you’ll earn the right to know, but for now, just drop it.” 

Aang started to protest, “But- “ 

“It’s not something I want to talk about right now,” Lee interrupted. “It’s certainly something you don’t want to hear. Even if I told you, you wouldn’t believe me.” 

“Try me,” Katara said, quoting herself from earlier. This conversation was starting to feel a little familiar. 

Lee sat back against the wall of the saddle. He tilted his head, studying her. “You are not going to let up, are you?” 

“I hate to admit it, but you are right.” 

“Oh, I do so love being right.” He shrugged. “You want an answer? Fine --- I have a way with words.” 

Sokka snorted. “That’s it. That’s all your going to tell us?” 

“It’s all the explanation you need for now.” 

“You can see spirits,” Aang said. “Is it connected to that?” 

Lee chuckled. “Yeah. We’ll go with that.” 

“But how- “ 

“It’s not important,” Lee interjected. “Just be happy with the explanation you got. You’ll know more when the time is right.” 

Sokka and Katara exchanged a disbelieving look. “And is the time ever going to be right?” she asked. 

His eye flashed blue. “Depends on how much you piss me off.”

Chapter Text

Three Years Ago

The boy jolted awake.  

Sokha had been busy reorganizing her supply table. No matter what she did, she was never satisfied with it. This had to go there, but then it was inconvenient for her to get to that, so she put it over here, off to the side, underneath, on top, over and over, and oh, who was she kidding. It was never going to be perfect. 

It was the second day after she found the boy on the docks. The Painted Lady (by the spirits, she was real ) had brought him to her. Sokha assumed she wanted her to care for him. After all, she was the village healer. 

Sokha brought him to the back room of her hut, laid him on a coat pressed up against the wall. It was set right underneath a window, and she had drawn a sheet over the opening to prevent her nosy neighbors from knowing. The people of Jang Hui rarely took kindly to strangers appearing in the middle of the day. She was unsure of how they would take one appearing at night. 

When she heard him jolt awake, Sokha dropped the bowl she was holding. She had tried many times over the past two days to wake him up, but nothing seemed to take hold. Still, she had not expected this so soon, especially considering the horrible fever that plagued him. It had retreated considerably from last night, but his skin was still warmer than normal. Whatever was causing that she had no fix for. 

The kid’s shoulder heaved with large, heavy breaths. Sokha found her wits, shook herself, and moved over to him. “You’re okay,” she tried. “You’re safe.” She reached out and laid on a hand on his unscarred shoulder. 

He lurched back, scrambling away and curling in on himself in the corner of the room. 

She pulled her hand away. “Hey.” She lifted both hands up in surrender. “I’m not going to hurt you. I only want to help you.” 

His wild eyes met hers. “Where am I?” His voice was raspy, as if from unuse. 

“Jang Hui.” 

He narrowed his eyes. “Never heard of it.” 

“Well, I wouldn’t expect.” She let out a light chuckle. The suspicion in his eyes turned to confusion. “We’re just a small river village somewhere on the edge of the Fire Nation. I doubt many have heard of us.” 

“Edge of the Fire Nation?” 

She nodded. 

“How- how far?” 

“We don’t even show up on the map.” Question filled her mind, but she pushed it back. There were certain things you just did not ask patients. “A lot of people do not know we are here.” 

He slowly began to unfurl. It was agonizingly slow for her to watch. In the silence, she studied him. Shaggy hair hung in his face. She tilted her head downward. What was left of his left eye was milky-white. He probably could no longer see out of it. Judging by the scar trailing down his left side, that half of him most likely did not work properly anymore. 

“And you are?” he asked. 

“Sokha,” she told him. “I’m the village healer. I found you on the docks two nights ago. The Painted Lady brought you to me.” 

“...the Painted Lady?” 

“Village spirit?” Sokha tried. “Our patron, if you will?” 

No response. 

She moved to sit on the cot. He flinched and nearly lurched off it, so she slowed her movements. “You had several cuts and bruises,” Sokha explained. “You were malnourished and feverish. I did what I could, but I have to give her most of the credit. I assume you are only awake now because of her.” She motioned to his right arm. “She even removed most of the scars there.” 

He lightly ran a hand over his arm, turning it over. 

“Neither of us could heal them all, thought,” Sokha admits, nodding to the little burn scars littering his upper body. 

“Those can’t be healed,” he said quietly. “They’ve been there for years.” 

Sokha leaned forward. “That one looks relatively new.” She nodded to the one on his face. “Where’d you get that?” 

He stops. “That’s none of your business.” 

“Yeah, I bet it’s not,” she replied. She reached out again, and he ducked back. “I’m not going to hurt you,” Sokha reiterated. “I just want to look at it.” When she tried again, he dodged away once more. 

Sokha sat back, swallowing her annoyance. “If you won’t tell me where it came from, then perhaps you can tell me how long you have had it?” 

He hesitated. “About a month.” 

She scoffed. “It looks far too healed to only be a month old.” 

“Well, it is,” he snapped. She had clearly touched a nerve. “What more do you want from me?” 

Well. “Perhaps I want to help you.” 

“I don’t want your help.” He turned his head away so she could no longer see the burn. 

Sokha laughed harshly. “You’re getting it anyway.” She stood, moving to clean the broken pieces of the bowl. “What’s your name?” 

Nothing. The stubborn silence was quite loud. 

Fine then. Clearly something he does not want to know about. As his tending physician, however, she felt as though she were entitled to some answers. “Unless you want me to call you rather rude things- “she deposited the pieces into a nearby wastebasket “ -then I highly suggest you give me the answer to that.” 

“Go ahead,” he deadpanned. “I’ve been called worse.” 

“Oh?” She leaned back against her table and cross her arms. “By whom?” 

He dropped his eyes from her. “It isn’t important.” 

“I decide what’s important,” she said. “You look very young to be out roaming the world on your own. Where are your parents?” 

“Do you interrogate every new person you meet?” 

She shrugged. “Most of them. I’m going to get you something to eat.” 

“I never said I was hungry.” 

“I never asked for your opinion.” Before he could argue, Sokha swept out of the room. He had been awake for less than fifteen minutes, and he already thought he could challenge her. Oh, he had a storm coming, to think that he could defy the will of a very persistent healer. 

She had had stubborn patients in the past. They all broke. He would be no different.

Sokha returned five minutes later with a bowl of soup. When she pushed open the curtain to the back room, she noticed the kid had not moved. However, his head was turned to the opposite wall, eyes staring at it blankly. 

She watched him for a moment. He did not even seem aware of her presence. She glanced at the wall, then back at him. She cleared her throat. 

He blinked. “She’s not there anymore.” 

Sokha looked at the wall again. “Who?” 

“I- “he shook his head. “No one.” 

Alright. Another weird occurrence to add to her notes. She sat down on the other end of the cot and held the bowl out. 

He looked down at it over his nose, eyes narrowed suspiciously. 

“I haven’t poisoned it.” 

He moved from his curled position to sit cross-legged. He started to reach out with his left hand, then stopped. He switched and took the bowl with his right hand. She noted that as well. “Are you going to keep watching me until I eat this?” 

“Am I making you uncomfortable?” 

“Very.” 

“Wonderful!” she said, delighted. “I’m known to do that. Eat it. I don’t care if you are hungry or not. You need it.” 

He said nothing back. Only stirred the soup around, making no attempts to eat it. So, this was the game he was going to play? Oh well. She would just be here all day. 

“What’s your name?” 

“You already asked that,” he replied. “My answer is still the same.” 

“You never answered me.” 

“Exactly.” 

Sokha bit her bottom lip. “Look, kid, we can go in circles all day. Clearly, neither of us is going to budge. However, you clearly have no idea where you are. You’ve never heard of Jang Hui. You don’t know this area. I do. I don’t know where you came from or why you refuse to tell me anything, but I would bet that you’re running from something.” 

The stirring stopped. 

Triumph flared in her chest. She bit the corners of her mouth to stop a smile. “I don’t care what you are running from or what you have done or any of it. You need help, and I am offering it. All I ask in return in a few answers. What’s your name?” she repeated. 

Another agonizingly long moment of silence. He refused to meet her eyes, keeping his trained at the fabric of the cot. “My name is- “he blinked” -my name is- I’m- “another blink. She did not think the answer to this question would be so hard to get. “I’m- “almost like he did not know… 

She could already see this spiraling out of control and into places she did not want it to go. She made to place a hand on his shoulder, to let him know he could take his time. Maybe she should not have pushed so hard- 

His eyes caught her movement. He jerked back so hard the soup cup spilled over. 

“Okay!” Sokha reeled away. “Okay, okay, I won’t- I’m sorry I- “ 

She stopped when she saw he was visibly shaking. His gold eye was wide, wild, and fearful. 

“It was just an accident!” she covered quickly. “No harm done, just a cup of spilled soup, no use crying over it. I’ll clean it up.”

He eyed her suspiciously. Liked being watched by a frightened animal that might lunge at any second. “I’m going to get something to clean it up. You, stay here. I’ll be back.” She disappeared into the main room and reappeared a moment later. However, none of the soup had stained the cot. Instead, it was back in the bowl. 

Sokha pointed to it. “What- wait- how did you do that?” 

“I didn’t do anything,” he replied. 

Sokha blinked. “Uh- right.” No time to digest that now. “Then who did?” 

“I don’t know.” 

“Right.” Sokha took the soup cup, then stepped out of the room, only questions clouding her mind. “Right… “ 

Chapter Text

The redwood forest they were camping in was quite pretty, Sokka had to admit. After living for so long in a place without trees or anything green, it was truly something else to finally see the rest of the world. To see the things he had always heard about in stories. There were so many colors to behold; they were practically burning his eyes out. 

They had packed up everything, ready to set out for the North Pole once more. Sokka felt as though they were missing something, but he could not quite put his finger on it. 

“Wait,” Aang said, voicing Sokka’s thoughts. “Where’s Momo?” 

In response, they heard several angry screeches echoing from somewhere in the wood. It took the four of them a minute to find him, but they did eventually locate the lemur. He was trapped in a circular cage that hung from the redwood treetops. Upon further glance upward, Sokka saw several other trapped creatures. 

“Momo?” Aang called. 

Another screech. 

“You know that saying about curiosity killing the cat?” Sokka said. 

“I’m familiar with it,” Lee replied. 

“I think we should change ‘cat’ to ‘lemur.’” 

Lee shrugged. “I’m okay with that.” 

It was how most of their conversations with the guy went. Short little bursts, small talk and banter back and forth. Nothing more. The fact of the matter was that no one really wanted to talk about it. 

Sokka had come to think of the situation as it rather than what it actually was. They had almost begun to bridge some semblance of trust with the guy when it happened. Sure, he was curious about it. So were Aang and Katara. But none of them had worked up the courage to actually talk to Lee about it. 

Probably because we’ve all got the same fear, was what Sokka told himself. That they were all afraid that he was going to do it to them. And what exactly it was… well, that remained a mystery. 

Let’s just say I have a way with words. Sokka suppressed a contemptuous scoff. A way with words his ass. People did not just walk away like that. 

“Hang on!” Aang shouted. A gust of wind, and he lifted up into the treetops, beyond Sokka’s field of vision. One of the circular cages lowered down. Sokka and Katara both grabbed onto it, pulled apart the wooden bars. Momo leapt out, free, a red berry held tightly in his mouth. 

Animals. All it took was a little bit of food. 

(Although, sometimes Sokka was not much different.) 

More angry chittering and screeching sounded from the leaves. The others wanted out as well. 

“Alright.” Aang leaped from branch to branch, cage to cage. “I guess you guys as well.” 

Too speed up the process, Sokka pulled out his boomerang, then tossed it with a flick of his wrist. It soared up and sliced through the ropes holding the other cages, then flew back to his hand. 

“Or that works too,” Aang commented, dropping to the forest floor beside them. 

Sokka sunk to the ground by one of the traps, inspecting the handiwork. “These are Fire Nation-made,” he said. “You can tell by the handiwork. We need to get moving.” 

When they made it back to Appa, Katara and Aang were loading their stuff into the saddle. “No.” Sokka held out a hand. “There is no time for flying.” 

“What?” Aang said. “Why wouldn’t we fly?” 

“Think about it,” Sokka said. “Somehow, the Fire Nation keeps finding us. It’s because they spot Appa. He’s just too noticeable.” 

“What?” Katara wheeled on him. “Appa’s not too noticeable!” 

“He’s a gigantic fluffy monster with an arrow on his head!” Sokka pointed to the aforementioned arrow. “It’s kind of hard to miss him.” 

“It’s okay.” Aang patted the bison’s head, who let out a sad groan. “Sokka’s just jealous because he doesn’t have an arrow.” 

“Or perhaps it is because you keep causing disturbances wherever you go,” Lee suggested. Sokka wheeled on him. The guy only shrugged. “Perhaps.” 

Sokka scoffed. As if. “I know you all want to fly, but my instincts tell me we should play it safe this time and walk.” 

“Oh?” Katara placed a hand on her hip, a grin playing on her lips. “Who made you the boss?” 

“I’m not the boss!” Sokka shot back. “I’m the leader!” 

Katara snorted. “You’re the leader? But your voice still cracks.” 

“i’M the oldest, and I’m a warrior! So- “he deepened his voice” -I’m the leader!” 

“If anyone’s the leader,” Katara said, “it’s Aang. I mean, he is the Avatar.” 

Sokka scoffed again. “Are you kidding? He’s just a goofy kid.” 

The aforementioned Aang, who was hanging upside down from one of Appa’s horns, affirmed it --- “He’s right.” 

Katara rolled her eyes. “Why do boys always think someone has to be the leader? I bet you wouldn’t be so bossy if you kissed a girl.” 

Sokka shouldered his pack. “i’Ve kissed a girl! You just… “heat bloomed in his cheeks. “You just haven’t met her.” 

“Who? Gran-Gran?” Katara challenged. “I’ve met Gran-Gran.” 

Sokka started to argue back, but Lee stepped between them. “You’ve dug yourself a deep enough hole. Please stop. It’s painful to watch.” 

Cheeks still burning, Sokka grit his teeth and said “Look, my instincts tell me we have a better chance of slipping through on foot. A leader has to trust his instincts.” 

“Okay.” Katara held her hands up. “We’ll try it your way, O Wise Leader.” 

“Who knows?” Aang dropped down beside her, pack already on his back. “Walking might be fun!” 

“Walking is not fun,” Aang complained. “How do people go anywhere without a flying bison?” 

“I don’t know, Aang,” Katara responded with a despondent sigh. “Why don’t you ask Sokka’s instincts? They seem to know everything.” 

Sokka ground his teeth, ignoring his aching back, feet, spine, muscles, legs, ears, and everything. Yeah, it sucked, but it was better than being captured by the Fire Nation again. At least that is what he told himself. Katara and Aang had kept on for about thirty minutes, but he had not heard one word from Lee. Sokka had nearly forgotten the guy was there. 

“I’m tired of carrying this pack,” Aang said.

“You know who you should ask to carry it for awhile?” Katara said brightly. “Sokka’s instincts!” 

“That’s a great idea!” Aang responded in kind. “Hey, Sokka’s Instincts, would you mind- “ 

“I get it!” he snapped. “I’m tired too.” They were coming up on two large red bushes. He pushed them apart, and they stepped through. “But the important thing is that we’re safe from the Fire Nation… “ 

On the other side was an enclave with  Fire Nation encampment, surrounded by a bunch of bewildered soldiers. 

Ah, yes. Katara was never going to let this go. 

The soldiers stared at them. They stared back. 

“rUn!” Sokka shouted. The four began to disperse, but the bushes were quickly engulfed with a fireball, setting them alight. 

“Your shirt!” Aang shouted. His sleeve was on fire. Sokka shrieked, and Katara quickly put the fire out with a stream of water. 

He spun. The soldiers had leaped into action, cornering them back against the flaming bushes. They jabbed spears at them, pushing them farther and farther back into the searing heat. 

Sokka swallowed, then said, “If you let us pass, we promise not to hurt you!” 

“What are you doing?” Katara hissed. 

“Bluffing?” 

“You?” A solider with an eye patch spoke up. “Promise not to hurt us?” A chorus of laughter rang out.

“You’d be surprised what we can do!” Sokka said. He elbows Lee. “Do your thing.” 

“What?” 

“Your thing.” Lee stared at him. “The ‘make people go away’ thing? The literal thing that we’ve been avoiding talking about since it happened?” 

“I can’t do it on this many at once,” he hissed back. 

“Well, you certainly haven’t tried then. I believe in you,” he added on the tail end of the comment. 

“Like you know the extent of what I can do.” Lee sighed. “When I tell you to, get down.” 

The eyepatch soldier began to speak again, but his eye widened, breath leaving him in a gasp. His knees buckled, and he toppled forward. 

“Nice work, Sokka!” Aang said brightly. “How’d you do that?” 

“Uh… instinct?” 

“Look!” Katara pointed toward the treetops. Sokka’s attention jumped to a figure standing on a thick branch high above. It unsheathed two hooked swords and swung down, landing on the backs of two soldiers who fell with grunts of surprise. The figure, which Sokka could now see was a teenaged guy, charged at two other. He hooked the swords around their ankles and flipped them forward. 

“Down you go,” he said, winking at their group. 

Lee sighed. “Oh, great Agni… “ 

Sokka wanted to ask what that meant, but one of the soldiers shouted, “They’re in the trees!” before a small kid dropped onto his shoulders and shoved his helmet over his eyes. 

The other soldiers raised their weapons, but their weapons fell from their hands, pinned to the forest ground by arrows. Sokka saw an archer perched up in the treetops, shooting the swords out of their hands. 

Sokka remained frozen in place while Katara and Aang leaped into action. Lee roughly punched him in the back, spurring Sokka forward, before running off into the chaos. 

Sokka unsheathed his club as a soldier charged at him. He raised it, preparing to punt this guy, a war cry tearing from his mouth- 

The hooked swords guy kicked the soldier out of the way, ruining Sokka’s moment of glory. 

“Hey!” Sokka said. “He was mine!” 

“Gotta be quicker next time!” the guy responded smugly. 

Sokka grumbled to himself. Lee shouted his name. Sokka wheeled just as the guy kicked a Fire Nation soldier toward him. Sokka brought his club down on the guy’s head, and he collapsed like a ragdoll. A moment later, he dodged out of the way of a charging soldier. The man’s sword swung over his head with an audible whoosh over his head. He kept going forward, aimed at Lee, who parried the man’s blow with his own swords and finished him with a well-placed hit to the face. 

It was not long until each of the Fire Nation soldiers has been disposed of. Once the chaos had all settled, Sokka caught of a glimpse of the hooked swords guy stumbling up to his very red-faced and grinning sister. “Hey,” he said. 

“Hi,” Katara replied. From here, Sokka could see the blush in her cheeks.

Oh, not on my watch. He hurried over to the scene, ready to stop anything before it happened. 

“Wow,” Aang breathed, hurrying up as well. “You just took out a whole army single-handed!” 

“Army?” Sokka scoffed. “There were only like twenty guys!” 

“My name is Jet,” the guy was saying, “and these are my Freedom Fighters.” He went through and introduced each of them. Sneers, Longshot the archer, Smellerbee, a tiny kid named the Duke, and a big man named Pipsqueak. 

“I’m Katara,” his sister said with a light giggle. Sokka made a disgusted face. “And this is my brother Sokka.” She motioned to him. “Avatar Aang.” Aang waved. “And Lee, our… companion.” 

“Pleasure to meet you all,” Jet said, offering them a two-fingered salute to his brow. 

“Thanks for saving us,” Katara said. “We’re lucky you were there.” 

“I should be thanking you,” Jet responded. “We were waiting to ambush those soldiers all morning. We just needed the right distraction. And then you guys stumbled in.” 

“We were relying on ‘instincts,’” Katara said dryly. Sokka glared at her. 

“You’ll get yourself killed doing that.” 

Sokka rolled his eyes, then walked off before he lost control of himself and made everything worse. He stayed firmly planted near one of the tents as Jet’s crew scurried around, pillaging and plundering and scavenging what they could from the soldier’s supplies. 

“A real load of help you are,” Lee commented, suddenly apparating beside Sokka. “I don’t like him.” 

“What- what makes you say that?” Sokka asked once his heart rate returned to normal. 

Lee tilted his head, studying Jet as he continued his conversation with Katara. “He’s ambitious. Driven by a cause as opposed to something else. Anyone who fights the Fire Nation in such a head-on approach has to be. But he is also very arrogant. That isn’t hard to see.” His head tilted the other way. “It’s probably personal.” 

Sokka glanced between Jet and Lee. “And you got all this… how?” 

Lee shrugged. “I’ve been around awhile, Sokka. You eventually learn how to read people.”

“Hey.” 

Their conversation ceased once they saw Jet heading over to them. He barely acknowledged Sokka (which absolute did not sting at all) before turning to Lee. “Swordsman?” He motioned to the sword sheath on Lee’s back. 

Lee crossed his arms. “Clearly.” 

“Right.” Jet let out an awkward laugh. “Clearly, clearly… I saw what you what you did back there. Pretty impressive, if I do say so myself.” He laughed again. When he saw Lee was obviously not amused, it cut off with an awkward cough. “You’ll have to teach me sometime.” 

Lee said nothing in response. Only offered Jet a cold stare before turning on his heel and walking away. 

Jet glanced a Sokka, eyebrow raised. Sokka shrugged. 

The Freedom Fighters finish their pillage. One of them announced that there are barrels filled with blasting jelly, to which Jet said they will take it back to the hideout. 

“You guys have a hideout here?” Aang asked, staring up a Jet with wide, wondrous eyes. 

“You wanna see it?”

“Uh,” Sokka interjected, “I’m not sure if we have the time to- “ 

“Yes!” Katara interrupted. “We want to see it!” 

And once again, Sokka had no grounds to argue. At least they would be laying low for some time after helping plunder a Fire Nation encampment. Still, as they started their trek through the woods, Sokka could not shake the feeling that something was wrong. It settled deep in his stomach, as if he had eaten something bad, and refused to go away. 

Maybe he was just being overly suspicious. Maybe he had spent too much time listening to Lee. After all, how much did he really know about the guy? Enough to trust his every little judgment? 

Sokka did not say much on the walk there, keeping his eyes trained at the forest floor. Aang kept a running commentary the whole time, telling Jet everywhere and everything they had done, offering him way too many details than need be. He had mostly tuned out the chatter until one piece of information caught his attention --- “Oh, yeah, I completely forgot to mention how we got away from the pirates. You know Lee? Yeah, I’m sure you know him. Tall, dark, and broody, doesn’t show any emotion other that spite? Yeah, he just made them go away. Just like that. Did it twice.” 

“Did he now?” Jet eyed Lee, who was walking beside Sokka and seemed to have tune the whole conversation out as well. “And how?” 

Sokka tapped Aang on the shoulder. “Hey,” he said, leaning closer to the kid, “maybe we should keep some things to ourselves.” 

“Why? Jet wants to help.” 

“He might,” Sokka said, “but there are some things we don’t understand. We don’t need to pass that information along to people until we do.” 

“And how?” Jet said again. “How was that possible?” 

“I have a way with words,” Lee said with an air of finality. And that was that. 

They stopped somewhere that seemed quite random. “It’s right here,” Jet said. 

Sokka glanced around. All he saw were the same batch of trees as before. “There’s nothing here.” 

Jet handed Sokka what appeared to be a rope he had not spotted before. “Here, hold this.” 

“Why?” Sokka took it. “What’s this going to do?” 

He was sharply yanked upward into the trees, shoulder ripped from its socket. A surprised yell tore from his mouth as he collided with branches and leaves. 

Two people snatched his arms, hauled him out of the foliage, and onto a wooden scaffolding. Sokka pushed them away, spitting out leaves, wiping tree bark from his eyes. When he could see again, he saw the hideout before him. Treehouses among the red leaves, connected by wooden bridges and ziplines as transportation. 

Moments later, he was joined by Lee, whose travel up had clearly not been as tumultuous as Sokka’s, then Aang, and then Katara and Jet. Together. 

Jet had an arm around his sister. Sokka must have moved forward because Lee suddenly snatched his arm and dragged him back. 

Katara noticed the hawklike stare her brother was giving her. She quickly stepped away from Jet. “It’s so beautiful up here,” she said. 

“It is,” Jet agreed, “and the best part is, the Fire Nation can’t find us.” 

One of the other Freedom Fighter --- Smellerbee, Sokka was pretty sure --- dropped down onto the scaffolding. “They would love to find you, wouldn’t they, Jet?” 

Jet laughed. “It’s not gonna happen, Smellerbee. Not anytime soon.” He motioned to one of the bridges, and they set off across it. 

Katara slipped around the group until she was walking in stride with Jet. “Why does the Fire Nation want to find you?” 

“I guess I’ve caused them a little bit of trouble,” Jet said with another laugh. “See, they took over a nearby Earth Kingdom town a few years back.” 

“We’ve been ambushing their troops,” the burly Pipsqueak rumbled from behind Sokka, “cutting off their supply lines and doing anything we can to mess with them.” 

“One day,” Jet finished, “well be able to drive the Fire Nation out of here for good and free that town.” 

Katara grinned, red blooming in her cheeks once more. “That’s so brave.” 

Sokka inserted himself between the two. “Yeah, it is,” he agreed. “Nothing’s braver than a guy in a tree house.” 

Katara elbowed him in the gut. Sokka winced and dropped back. “Don’t pay attention to my brother.” 

“No problem,” Jet said. “He’s probably had a rough day.” 

Sokka stopped walking, allowing the group to circle around him and continue on. Lee stopped beside him, watching the group retreat. “Are you okay?” 

“Fine,” Sokka muttered. “Just so happy.” 

“I bet… “ 

Sokka glanced over at him. “So how does it work?” 

“What?” 

“It,” he clarified. “You know what I am talking about.” 

“I told you.” 

“No, you didn’t. Your explanation answered nothing. Have we pissed you off?” 

“No,” Lee said. “Well, you haven’t. Jury is still out on Katara, but I suppose that is always going to be a given. We are probably never going to see eye-to-eye on anything. I told you I will give you an answer when the time is right.” 

“And it’s not right now?” Sokka asked. “Jet is really interested in whatever is going on with you. I hope you noticed that.” Lee nodded. “And it bothers me.” 

Lee narrowed his eyes. “It does?” 

“Yes,” Sokka admitted. “Yes, it does. Despite everything that has happened and the whole- “Sokka lowered his voice” - firebender-” he raised it again” -thing you have going on, you have proven time and time again that you don’t want to hurt us. Yeah, the fact that you can just tell people to do things and they will without question is terrifying. Have you ever even considered using it on any of us?”  

He hesitated, only a second, but long enough for Sokka notice. “No. Not anymore. What are you getting at?” 

“It’s simple,” Sokka said. “You don’t like Jet. I don’t like Jet. Jet sees you as an opportunity for something, and I don’t want him to be able to use you for it.” 

“And this is all a roundabout way of justifying why now is the right time?” 

“Yes, I- “Sokka stopped. He had been caught. “Yeah,” he admitted. “Yeah, I guess.” 

Lee said nothing. He hummed thoughtfully before turning away- 

“Why did you come along with us?” Sokka asked suddenly. The question had been bothering him since they left the village. Lee froze. “You could have left us after we dealt with Hei Bai, but you didn’t.” 

“Because the Avatar needed a guide to the spirit world,” Lee answered, rather robotically. He was not facing Sokka. “Because the Avatar must be the bridge between this world and the spirit realm.” 

“So it’s a spirit thing?” Lee turned back. “All this weird stuff that you can do? That’s why?” 

“We’ve already been over this, Sokka. It’s something like that.” 

They find their way to the tree hut where Jet had taken Katara and Aang. “Your sky bison can stay in the tree above,” he was saying at Sokka stepped inside. “We’re having a big celebration dinner tonight if you want to come.” He offered her a wink before stepping out, oblivious to Sokka’s entrance. 

Well, alright then, he thought bitterly. 

“Hey,” Aang said, taking notice of them, “where did you guys go?” 

“Guy talk,” Sokka replied simply. “You wouldn’t understand it.” 

Aang’s eyes narrowed in confusion, but he did not push it further. 

It was not but a moment later when Sokka was accosted by a pissed off Katara. “What is wrong with you?!” 

“What?” 

“What’s your problem with Jet?” she said. 

“My- “ Oh, yeah. “My problem with Jet? I don’t like him.” 

Katara scoffed. “Of course you don’t! He’s a guy near me, that’s why. But that’s not an excuse to discount him entirely.” 

“What?” Aang glanced between the two of them. 

“That’s not it!” Sokka yelled back. Not the whole truth, but she did not need to know that. “There’s something off about him! You don’t have to listen to him talk for more than two minutes to realize that he isn’t all there.” Sokka pointed to Lee. “He noticed it!” 

“Lee doesn’t like anyone!” 

“She got a point,” Lee offered. 

Sokka looked back at him as if to say Not helping my case, man. “Look,” Sokka said, turning back to Katara, “I just think we should be cautious around him. How much do we really know about this guy?” 

“Enough to know that we shouldn’t throw away his help,” Katara replied coolly. “He’s like us.” 

“What’s that supposed to mean?” 

“He’s lost people to the Fire Nation to!” 

“I’m sure they all have!” Sokka fired back. “A nice story does not always mean someone has good intentions.” 

“Of course you would say that. You don’t get it like I do.” 

Sokka went cold, bristling. “And what is that supposed to mean?” 

Katara opened her mouth to speak, but Sokka felt a hand on his shoulder dragging him back. Aang stepped between the two of them and pushed Katara away. “Hey,” Lee said in Sokka’s ear. “Drop it.” 

“But- “ 

“Drop it.” 

Sokka threw one last glower at his sister before allowing Lee to drag him away. When Sokka demanded to know where they were going, Lee only replied that it was somewhere where Sokka could cool down. The other guy took him out of the hut, somewhere else among the treetops. Sokka pushed upward through the leaves until he could see the sky, settling back against a large branch. 

“How could she say that to me?” he burst out. “How- how could she- “the words dissolved in an angry groan. 

Lee said nothing for several long moments, allowing Sokka to mumble and mutter to himself. With a flapping of wings, a small raven landed next to him. Sokka was astounded when the guy reached out to pet it, and it did not skitter away. 

“Who was it?” 

“Huh?” 

“Who was it?” Lee repeated, eyes still trained on the bird. “Who did you lose? I never got the answer to that.” 

Sokka’s mind flashed back to the extravaganza after Roku’s temple. “Our mom,” he answered. 

Lee hummed thoughtfully. He held his arm out, and the raven stepped onto it. Wordlessly, he passed it over to Sokka. “Don’t worry,” he added. “She won’t bite.” 

“Won’t she fly away?” 

He shook his head. 

Sokka sighed, then reached out to scratch the bird on the neck. “How do you do it? This thing you’ve got going on with the birds,” he added. “Not anything else.” 

Lee shrugged. “They like me.” 

And somehow, Sokka found that to be the hardest thing to believe. His eyes dropped down to the guy’s hand, his left hand. For the first time, he noticed that the burn scar, whatever had caused it, had fused his middle and ring fingers together. Sokka opened his mouth to ask what caused that. 

Lee glanced up, and he quickly closed it, shaking his head. Maybe there had been too much emotional turmoil for one day. 

He did not see Katara or Aang until dinner that night. Lee told him that Aang had taken Katara to cool off as well. She refused to look at Sokka when she sat down at the table, choosing the other side of Lee to take her place at. 

Sokka leaned around to say something, but Lee held up a hand. “No. I don’t want to be in the middle of this.” 

“You don’t even known what I was going to say.” 

“Frankly, I don’t care.” 

Sokka glowered at him. 

Jet, who had at the head of the table, suddenly stood and stepped onto it, a cup in hand. “Today,” he began overly-dramatically. Silence swept over the Freedom Fighters. “Today, we struck another blow against the Fire Nation.” 

The silence was broken as cheers erupted around. 

“I got a special joy from the look on one soldier’s face,” Jet continued, and silence fell back over, “when the Duke dropped down on his helmet and rode him like a wild hog monkey.” 

The aforementioned Duke stood and pumped his fists in the air. More cheers. 

“Now, the Fire Nation thinks they don’t have to work about a couple of kids hiding in the trees.” Jet’s look turned somber. “Maybe they’re right.” 

The cheers turned to boos. 

“Or maybe- “the somber look contorted into a devilish grin” -they’re dead wrong.” 

And the cheers erupted even louder this time. Sokka found himself exchanging a look with a rather perturbed Lee. “What?” he asked. 

“Nothing,” Lee said, eyes following Jet as he took his place at the head of the table once more. “Nothing, I’ll… I’ll explain later.”

“Nice speech,” Katara commented, drawing Sokka’s attention. 

“Thanks. By the way.” He nodded to Katara and Aang. “I was really impressed with you two. That was some great bending out there today.” 

“Well, he’s great.” Katara blushed. “He’s the Avatar. I could use some more training.” 

The perturbed look on Lee’s face suddenly turned to contempt. He snorted. 

“What?” Jet glanced at him. All attention fell to Lee. “Is there something you want to add to the conversation?” 

“You wouldn’t get it.” 

Jet watched him for a moment longer, then went back to his conversation with Katara. “I might know a way that you and Aang can help in our struggle.” 

“Just us?” Aang asked. He nodded to Sokka. “What about him?” 

“This task is specific to benders, and correct me if I’m wrong- “he nodded to Sokka” -but I don’t think he’s a bender.” 

“Yeah,” Sokka said bitterly. “He’s not.” 

Jet glanced over to Lee. “And you? Are you a bender?” 

“Yeah!” Aang piped up before anyone else had the chance to respond. “Actually, he’s- “ 

“Not,” Lee interrupted, talking over the kid. (Sokka elbowed Aang to stop any arguments from the kid.) Jet’s eyes narrowed. “I’m not. I am the Avatar’s spirit guide.” 

“Spirit guide?” Jet said. “I’ve never heard of that.” 

“It’s a recent development.” 

“Right.” Jet sat back. “Right.” 

Lee held his gaze for a moment longer, then abruptly stood up and started away. 

“Hey, wait- “Sokka got up to follow him, briefly terrified that the one person who seemed to be on his side was going to abandon him. “Wait, I’m sure he wasn’t insinuating anything bad. There’s nothing wrong with being a spirit guide. Frankly, it’s amazing that it hasn’t been established already- “ 

“Where are you going?” Jet stood as well. “I needed you on an important mission tomorrow. Both of you,” he added as though it pained him to say it. 

Sokka stopped. Lee turned, a pleading look in his eyes, his message clear --- Don’t fall for it. 

Sokka turned his back on him. “What mission?” 

Jet closed the distance between them and leaned in close, explaining it quietly to where no one else could hear. “It would be great to have someone with fresh eyes,” he said, voice returning to its normal volume. “Come on, man. I need you.” 

Sokka had practically already made up his mind. He did not debilitate over it long before nodding. 

Lee sighed disappointedly behind him. 

“Great.” Jet glanced over his shoulder. “You too. I could use a good swordsman.” 

“Because you clearly aren’t that,” Lee muttered bitterly, so low that only Sokka could hear it. Sokka turned to say something to him, but Lee had already disappeared. 

He did not see the guy for the rest of the night, not until everyone else has gone to sleep. Sokka laid awake in the tree hut, staring at the ceiling, unable to fall into sweet release him. Then, he hears voices outside. 

“Have I done something to you?” It belonged to Jet. “Why do you act like you hate me?” 

“It’s a general rule of thumb,” Lee replied. “I do it to everyone. You are no different.” 

A pause. “I can’t have you challenging my authority like that.” 

Sokka could practically hear Lee bristle. “Challenging- excuse me?” Sokka slid out of his sleeping back and crawled closer to the sound of the voices. He peered through a crack in the hut’s siding, glimpsing the two. 

Jet drew in a breath to speak, but Lee was not finished. “How presumptuous are you to think I want to challenge or have your authority in anyway? Where did you even get that idea?” 

“They’re afraid of you,” Jet answered. Lee stopped. “None of them will say it, but they are. I know what fear looks like.” 

“And so do I,” Lee fired back. “You do not know them well enough to make that assessment.” 

“It isn’t just Sokka, Aang, and Katara,” Jet said. “It’s the rest of my Freedom Fighters. Maybe if you walked around looking less like you want to wanted to kill them- “

“That is just who I am. I can’t help that.” 

Jet glanced around, then lowered his voice. “There are rumors about you, you know. People tell stories about the Avatar, but stories of his companions come with them. They’ve heard about you, how you can just make people do things. It scares them. I can’t afford them scared when they have a job to do.” 

Lee crossed his arms. “Oh? So, that’s it? You are all afraid of a bunch of rumors and stories.” 

“I’m not afraid of them,” Jet insisted. Lee’s head tilted. “Are they true?” 

“If you are not afraid, then why do you ask?” Jet blinked. “But the stories? They’re as true as you want them to be.” Lee lifted his head, staring at Jet down his nose. “You have the eyes of a killer.” 

Jet startled. “What?” 

“You heard what I said.” Lee turned and swept away. 

They were waiting in the treetops all morning. Sokka had been shaken awake at the crack of dawn by Lee, and they had headed to where Jet was going to be. When asked what exactly they were doing, Jet said they were waiting for something to happen. Thus, Sokka started to doze, leading Lee to keep nudging him awake. 

Jet made a bird call that drove Sokka back into full wakefulness. He received a responding one from somewhere else in the trees. 

Sokka then drove his knife into the trunk of the tree he was standing on. 

“What are you doing?” Jet said. 

Sokka shushed him. He places his ear to the hilt of the knife. “It amplifies vibrations… someone’s approaching!” 

Jet tensed. “How many?” 

Sokka narrowed his eyes. “I think there’s just one.” 

Jet made another bird call. “Good work, Sokka. Ready your weapon.” 

Sokka ripped his knife from the trunk and glanced downward, squinting through the early morning light. A hunched over figure limped through the wood. He squinted. From here, it looked like an- 

“False alarm!” Sokka hissed, waving his arms. “He’s just an old man!” 

Jet unsheathed his swords and stepped off, landing on the ground below. 

“What is he doing?” Sokka looked frantically over at Lee as the other Freedom Fighters dropped out of the trees. 

“Eyes of a killer… “ Lee muttered. He stepped off the branch as well. Sokka shook himself, then followed. 

The old man froze, surveying the Freedom Fighters slowly moving in on him. “What- what are you- what’s happening?” 

“What are you doing in our woods, you leech?” Jet demanded, voice echoing. 

The old man backed up. “Please, sir,” he begged. “I’m just a traveler.” 

Jet swiped the old man’s cane out from under his head, then pointed his sword at him. The old man backed away, turning to flee, only to crash right into Pipsqueak. He fell to the ground hard, and Sokka winced. 

The old man scrambled away as Pipsqueak advanced on him. Pipsqueak planted a foot on his back, pinning him. 

“Do you like destroying towns?” Jet spat at the old man, standing over his head. “Do you like destroying families?” 

Sokka felt a strange shift in the air, felt Lee started to move. He grabbed him. 

“Please,” the man begged weakly. “Let me go… have mercy… “ 

“Does the Fire Nation let people go?!” Jet’s voice had turned wild, erratic. “Does the Fire Nation have mercy?!” His foot swung back- 

Sokka’s club swung out, catching his ankle. “Stop! He’s just an old man!” 

Jet kicked Sokka in the chest. He stumbled back with a grunt. “He’s Fire Nation!” He turned to the Freedom Fighters. “Search him.” 

“He’s not hurting anyone!” Sokka argued, getting back to his feet. 

Jet wheeled on him. “Have you forgotten that the Fire Nation killed your mother? Remember why you fight!” 

“We got his stuff, Jet!” Smellerbee held up a few of the man’s possessions. 

“This doesn’t feel right,” Sokka continued. 

“It doesn’t matter,” Jet said. “It’s what has to be done.” 

“Get off him.” Lee had suddenly appeared, out of the corner of Sokka’s eye. 

Pipsqueak’s grip had gone slightly lax on the man. Smellerbee stopped. Jet froze, looking between his Freedom Fighters and Lee. A hint of fear passed over his face. 

“You heard me,” Lee said. His voice seemed to ring through the air. “Get off him.” 

Pipsqueak dropped the man. Both him and Smellerbee leaped back. The other Freedom Fighters gave Lee a wide berth as he dropped to his knees beside the old man, helping him back up. 

“What are you doing?” Jet stalked over to him. “What is wrong with you?” 

Lee was back on his feet in less than a second. The next, he reeled his arm back and punched Jet square in the face. 

Jet stumbled, landing flat on his ass on the forest floor. The other Freedom Fighters remained stuck in place, as if unsure what to do next. Sokka, unaffected by any of it, moved between Lee and Jet. “Dude,” he said. “Chill.” 

Lee’s remaining eye flared a brilliant blue before he took a step back. The air returned to normal, and it was almost like nothing every happened. 

Almost. 

Jet scrambled back to his feet. “Come on!” he shouted to the Freedom fighters. “We need to get out of here.” He threw a wild look at Lee before scurrying off, followed by his band. 

Lee dropped back down beside the old man once more. He had managed to pull himself to his knees. Lee placed a arm around him, pulling him up. “You will walk through this wood unafraid,” he said, voice having that strange ring to it. “But you will not return here. Not for sometime.” 

Sokka started to speak, but stopped when he saw the man grab his cane and continue on like nothing happened. 

“I shouldn’t have done that,” lee said. “I really should not have done that… “ 

Sokka turned back to Lee. “What the hell was that? No, don’t even try to avoid it this time,” he added when Lee drew in a breath to do exactly that. “I know what I saw. They all just backed away. You- you made them do it.” 

“I did,” Lee admitted. 

“How?” 

He shrugged. “Spirit stuff.” 

“No, that’s not good enough. Not anymore.” He crossed his arms and firmly planted a foot into the forest floor. “And I’m not going to move until you give me a real explanation as to what is going on.” 

Lee sighed. “I’m not getting out of it this time, am I?” 

“Nope.” 

Another sigh. He motioned for Sokka to start walking, and they did. “It’s called compulsion,” he said. 

“Compulsion?” Sokka said. “So… mind control?” 

“No,” Lee said firmly. “It’s not mind control. It is a lot more complicated than that. I don’t control their mind, but I give them commands. They feel a strong urge to do whatever I tell them, and they see no reason to argue.” 

“So… mind control?” 

A third sigh. “Fine, yes. It’s mind control, if you will. They do not think anything of it, and they do not question it. They just… do.” 

Compulsion. Sokka tested the word out in his mind. “And how did you come upon this ability?” 

“Like you said --- spirit stuff.” 

That was all Sokka was going to get out of him, so he just nodded. “We have to get out of here.” 

“We do,” Lee said, “but I cannot leave him here in this forest near those people. We have to do something about him.” 

“Why don’t you just compulsionize him?” 

“Why don’t I- what?” He blinked. “You mean compel?” 

“Yeah, that’s what I said.” 

Lee gave him a doubtful look. He shook his head. “It would not work that way. Perhaps if it was just him, but not when there are other people who would be able to bring him out of it. The compulsion can be broken under the right circumstances, and those are present here.” 

“So, we just compel all of them.” 

“It’s not an easy fix, Sokka!” Lee suddenly snapped. Sokka jumped. “Sorry,” he added. “I don’t like doing it. It can be invasive.” 

“For someone who doesn’t like it, you have done it a lot,” Sokka pointed out. 

“And maybe I have.” Lee’s eye glinted dangerously. “Maybe I should stop.” 

“Maybe,” Sokka said with a frantic nod. “I don’t know. We should hurry back. We need to get to Aang and Katara before he does.” 

They were too late. Jet had already indoctrinated Aang and Katara, who are both head-over-heels for his way of life. “Jet just has a different way of doing things,” Aang said. “A really fun way of doing things!” 

“He beat and robbed a harmless old man,” Sokka argued. 

Katara glared at him and crossed her arms. “I want to hear Jet’s side of the story.” 

Of course. Of. Course. Because Sokka’s word was never good enough anymore. 

“Sokka, you told them what happened,” Jet said when they asked him, “but you didn’t mention that the guy was Fire Nation?” They were in the guy’s own personal hut. Lee had downright refused to come along, afraid that his emotions would get the better of him, and retreated elsewhere. Sokka rather felt as though he were being spoken to by a cult leader. 

“No.” Katara threw Sokka a dirty look. “He conveniently left that part out.” 

“Fine,” Sokka said, “but even if he was Fire Nation, he was a harmless civilian.” 

“He was an assassin, Sokka.” Jet procured a dagger from the void and stabbed it into a tree stump in front of him. He unscrewed the ringed top fo the hilt, revealing a vial of red poison. “He was sent to eliminate me. You helped save my life, Sokka.” 

Katara sighed. “I knew there was an explanation.” 

“I didn’t see any knife,” Sokka said.

“That’s because he was concealing it,” Jet answered. 

“Oh?” Sokka laughed. Maybe he was spending too much time around Lee. “Oh, he was? How convenient.” And with that he stormed off. 

Katara and Aang found him in the hut minutes later as he finished packing up his things. “We can’t leave now!” Katara burst out. “The Fire Nation is about to burn down the forest!” 

Sokka pulled the strap on his sleeping bag so tight is snapped. “I’m sorry, Katara.” He stood and faced her. “Jet’s very smooth, but we can’t trust him.” 

Katara placed her hands on her hips. “You know what I think? You’re jealous that he’s a better warrior and a better leader!” 

Sokka ground his teeth. How- how dare she assume that little of him! Sokka wasn’t always the brightest. Even he would admit that. But in such a dire situation, he was beyond such petty jealousies. “I’m not. It’s just that my instincts- “ 

“Well, my instincts tell me we need to stay here longer and help Jet!” Katara snapped. With that, she swept from the hut, taking Aang with her. 

Sokka swallowed his anger and finished packing before heading out to find Lee. At least someone would be on his side. At least someone could vouch for him. Aang and Katara might not be scared of Lee, not like Jet believed they were, but that did not mean Lee could not be scary. There was a very important distinction between scared of and scary that the guy did not seem to understand. 

And yet, no matter how long he looked, through every nook and cranny, he cannot find him. 

Something poked him in the side of the head. His mind still sleep addled, Sokka pushed it away, but it is persistent. 

“What?” he demanded, sitting up. 

The raven hopped from his shoulder onto his lap. It tilted its head, then hopped on over to the hut’s closed drawing and outside. Sokka glanced at Aang and Katara, who were both still fast asleep, and followed. 

People were moving and bustling around outside. Freedom Fighters were dropping down from the ropes to the ground. He saw Jet somewhere in the midst of the chaos, directing  people here and there. 

The raven chittered, then flapped its wings and took off. It landed on a branch two trees away, and Sokka followed. Another two trees, and Sokka continued. On and on and on until Sokka caught sight of Jet again. He was walking in front of a large cart loaded with barrels. 

Barrels. Sokka’s eyes widened. “Blasting jelly,” he muttered. Jet turned, looking up into the trees, almost directly at him. “Blasting jelly- “ 

Someone grabbed Sokka and yanked him out of Jet’s view, clapping a hand over his shoulder. Sokka started to scream, but Lee shushed him. 

Jet turned back. The cart trundled on. 

Lee let go of Sokka. He dropped down out of the tree and continued trailing behind the cart, hidden in the foliage. Sokka followed. 

“What are you doing?” Sokka demanded. “Where were you?” 

“Investigating,” Lee said without looking back. “And keep your voice down.” 

“The blasting jelly. What is he planning to do with it?” 

“I don’t know,” Lee admitted. “That is what I was hoping to find out.” 

They crept along, the raven keeping an eye ahead. Every so often, it would swoop over the heads of the Freedom Fighters. None seemed to take notice. Eventually, Jet and the cart came to a stop at a cliff overlooking a dam. “Now, listen.” He turned back to the Freedom Fighters. “You’re not to blow the dam until I give the signal. If the reservoir isn’t full, the Fire Nation troops could survive.” 

“Oh, that’s not good,” Lee muttered. “Shit.” 

“But what about the people in the town?” The Duke --- what was an eight-year-old doing here? --- leaped off the cart. “Won’t they get wiped out too?” 

Jet placed a comforting hand on the Duke’s shoulder. “That’s the price of ridding this area of the Fire Nation.” 

Sokka looked over to Lee. “What do we do?” 

Lee said nothing in response, eyes still trained on Jet. 

Sokka turned back, mind scrambling for something. What could they do, without risk of anyone getting hurt? They were just two people against the well-oiled machine that was the Freedom Fighters. Sure, Lee was a firebender, but that was putting him in more danger than Sokka was comfortable with. “Compel them?” Sokka suggested. 

“It wouldn’t work,” Lee said with a headshake. “It would not be effective.” 

“What do you mean?” 

“There are rules to it, Sokka,” Lee said, finally looking at him. “Rules I don’t have the time to explain. I told you, it is not a solution to every single problem we- “ 

They were both suddenly grabbed and tossed out into the open. 

“Found ‘em!” the triumphant voice of Smellerbee said, stepping around Sokka. Pipsqueak stepped around Lee’s side. They both took their places at Jet’s right and left respectively. 

“Well,” Jet said, surveying them. “I’m glad you decided to join us.” 

Sokka was still pulling himself up, shaking off the shock of being caught, but Lee was already on his feet. Pipsqueak lunged forward and grabbed his arms, pinning them to his sides. Lee hissed at Jet. 

“What are you doing?” Jet motioned to Sokka. “Grab him too!” 

Smellerbee and another Freedom Fighter moved forward, hauling Sokka upward. “We heard about your plan!” Sokka said. “About how you’re going to destroy the Earth Kingdom town.” 

“That is not our plan.” Jet shook his head. “Our plan is to rid the valley of the Fire Nation.” 

“And how do you plan on doing that?” Lee spat bitterly. “By killing all the innocent people living there?” 

“We cannot win without making some sacrifices.” Jet’s eyes seemed glazed over, his tone annoyingly calm. 

“You lied to Aang and Katara about the forest fire!” Sokka snapped. “You’re really going to force them to do this. They don’t know what they’re doing!” 

“Because they don’t understand the demands of war. Not like you and I do, Sokka.” Jet stepped forward and rested a hand on his shoulder. “You are a survivor. You both are.” He nodded to Lee. “Like me.” 

“You have no idea what it means to be a survivor,” Lee snarled. “You’re delusional.” 

Jet stepped back from Sokka with a soft sigh. “I was hoping you both would have an open mind, but I see you’ve made your choice.” 

Lee yanked against Pipsqueak’s grip. “What are you afraid of?” he demanded. “What are you so terrified of that you can’t get over it?” 

“Stop,” Jet ground out. 

“What are you planning to do with us?” Lee kept on. “Throw us over the cliff? Slit our throats and dump our bodies somewhere in the woods where no one else will ever find them? Drown us in the reservoir?” His face brightened. “Oh, I have an even better idea! Light us on fire and use us as kindling for you bomb?” 

“That’s enough! Take them for a walk,” Jet said. “A long walk.” 

Lee let out a maniac laugh. “You’ll do it, won’t you? You really will. Leave a bunch of other children in the same position you were. Parentless and terrified, with a vendetta against the world- “ 

“ Stop !” Jet suddenly snapped. “Stop talking like you know me.” 

“But I do.” Lee grinned. “I know all of them like you.” 

***

Aang had awoken that morning to find both Sokka and Lee missing. Sokka’s packed belongings were still at the hut. He asked Katara, who was already up, if she had seen them. 

“Who cares?” she snapped. “They don’t want to help, then they don’t have to be here.” 

Jet came to retrieve them not long after. They were going to help him fill the reservoir to prevent the forest fire. Or, at least, that is what he had told them. 

Sokka did not like him. Seemed to think there was more to him than he was telling. Lee rather despised him. Even if it was never said out loud, Aang knew when the guy was perturbed. When something bothered him. 

A strange pit settled in his stomach as they make their trek down to the reservoir. Aang did not say anything, keeping his eyes trained on the ground, thoughts swirling around in his head. “Jet,” Katara said, “I’m sorry for how those two have been acting. They aren’t normally this erratic.” 

“No worries,” Jet said with a light shrug. “Sokka has already apologized.” 

Aang raised an eyebrow. “Sokka… apologized?” 

“I was surprised too,” Jet admitted. “I got the sense that you talked to him or something.” He looked back at Katara. 

“I did,” she answered with a grin. 

“I guess something you said got through to him,” Jet continued. “He went on a scouting mission with Pipsqueak and Smellerbee.” 

“I’m glad he cooled off,” Katara said. “He’s so stubborn sometimes.” 

“What about Lee?” Aang asked. 

“What about him?”

“Did he say anything?” 

Jet shrugged. “I haven’t seen him since yesterday. Maybe you want to ask some of the other Freedom Fighters. They might have seen him. Although… “he stopped walking and turned, waiting for Aang to catch up to him. “I think he left.” 

“What?” Aang narrowed his eyes. “That’s not something he would do.” 

“Are you sure?” 

“Positive,” Aang said with a nod. “I know that is something he would never do.” It was a feeling he could not really explain, but he was absolutely sure Lee would not just run off on them. 

“I know it might be hard for you to accept, Aang, but maybe you don’t know him as well as you thought.” Jet turned away as Aang bristled. He was about to say something in retort, but a hot burst of air sent him flying into the sky. Katara gasped, but Aang simply lowered himself back down to the ground. 

“Alright.” Jet stepped up by Katara. “We’re here. Underground water is trying to escape from these vents. I need you guys to help it along.” 

Katara glanced nervously at the ground. “I’ve never used my bending on water I can’t see. I don’t know… “ 

Jet slipped behind her, placing his hands on her shoulders. “You can do this. I believe in you.” 

“What about me?” Aang asked. He was here too, after all. 

“I know the Avatar can do this,” Jet replied nonchalantly. 

When Jet turned his back, Aang stuck out his tongue. 

They set to work on the geysers. With the first one done, Jet said, “Great! I’m going to check on things back at the reservoir. A few more of these, and we’ll be good to go.” 

“We’ll meet you there when we’re done!” Katara offered. 

Something flicked across Jet’s face. “Actually, it would be better if you met me back at the hideout.” And with that, he set off. 

Five geysers later, Aang said, “I bet that’s enough. And I’m not saying that just to be lazy.” 

“Let’s catch up with Jet at the reservoir,” Katara suggested. 

“I thought we agreed to meet him back at the hideout.” 

She shrugged. “We finished early.” She grinned. “I’m sure he’ll be happy to see us.” She hurried off without him. 

Aang allowed himself a moment to pout. “Happy to see you… “ 

***

“Move along!” Smellerbee shoved Sokka forward. 

He glowered at her over his shoulder. Both him and Lee had their hands bound behind their backs. “How can you stand by and do nothing while Jet wipes out an innocent town?” He had been trying to reason with them to little success. 

“Jet’s a great leader,” Pipsqueak rumbled. “We follow what he says- “ 

“Anyone can follow what someone says,” Lee snapped. “It doesn’t make them a great leader.” 

Pipsqueak made a face. “Why didn’t we gag him?” he asked Smellerbee. 

“Yeah,” Lee said. “Why didn’t you? It would have saved you so much trouble.” 

“We didn’t bring anything to gag him with.” Smellerbee shrugged. 

Pipsqueak shrugged as well. “I guess we didn’t… “ 

“Doesn’t matter.” She shoved Lee forward, and they continued their trek. “Whatever. Anyway, we do what Jet says, and things always turn out okay. He’s never given us a reason to not to it.” 

Lee nudged Sokka with his elbow, dipped his head toward a suspiciously-laid pile of leaves. Sokka saw a rope trailing out from behind it. There was one on Sokka’s side as well as Lee’s. He glanced back at Lee and nodded once. 

“If that’s how Jet leads… then he’s got a lot to learn!” 

They darted in opposite directions. Smellerbee shouted and took off after Sokka while Pipsqueak stumbled after Lee. 

Sokka leaped over the piles of leaves. Smellerbee ran right through it. The trap snapped into place, carrying her up into the trees. Sokka came to a skidding halt halt and wheeled around in time to witness Lee leaping over another pile. Pipsqueak let out a surprised shout as he went soaring up into the branches. 

A few shrugs and rolls of his shoulders, and Sokka was out of the rope. “While you two are up there- “he held it up for them to see” -you might want to practice your knot work!” 

“I’ll go to the reservoir,” Lee said, having slipped out of his own ropes as well. “Get to the dam.” 

“Won’t you need- “ 

Lee had already taken off. 

Sokka just sighed, then took off in the other direction. 

***

“What are they doing?” Katara asked. The Freedom Fighters were loading red barrels up against the wood of a dam. 

“They got those from the Fire Nation!” Aang exclaimed, pointing to them. The sinking feeling in his stomach suddenly felt quite justified. 

“Why would they need blasting jelly?” 

No sooner had the words left her mouth did Aang realize --- “Because Jet’s going to blow up the dam.” 

“What?” Katara shook her head. “No. That would destroy the whole town. Jet wouldn’t do that!” 

“No.” Aang extended his glider, throwing it over his head. “No, he would.” He took a few running steps, leaping into the air- 

His glider was snatched from him. Aang scrabbled midair for several moments before regaining control, airbending his way back to the ground. 

Jet had snatched his glider, landing several feet away in a knelt position. “Yes, I would.” 

“Why?” Katara said.

“You would too,” Jet replied, “if you just stop to think. Think about what the Fire Nation did to your mother. We can’t let them do that to anyone ever again.” 

“This isn’t the answer!” 

Jet stood and turn slowly. “I want you to understand me, Katara. I thought your brother would, but- “ 

Aang’s blood went ice cold. 

“Where’s Sokka?” Katara demanded. Tears shone in the corners of her eyes, threatening to spill. 

Jet reached out to gently touch her cheek. “Katara… “ 

She thrusted her arms outward, tossing him back with a jet of water. He fell limply, like a ragdoll. With Jet out-of-the-game, Aang made a grab for his glider. “We need to get to the dam!” He reached out. 

One of Jet’s swords slammed down in front of Aang’s hand. “You’re not going anywhere without this.” He hooked the ends of the swords toward, swinging Aang’s glider into his hand. They continued in an arc over his head, coming back around at Aang. 

Aang leaped backward, wind carrying him through the air. He flipped up onto a tree branch. “I’m not going to fight you, Jet!” 

“You’ll have to if you want your glider back!” Jet charged, leaping from branch to branch, tree to tree, chasing after Aang. Aang spun on his heel and fled. 

He ran. He did not know how far, just until he could not see Jet. However, the guy swung out of nowhere, one sword hooked over a vine. He swiped at Aang, who dodged. He dropped off the vine just as Aang thrust a twisting gust of wind. It blew him back several feet, but not enough to knock him off balance or send him tumbling toward the forest floor.

He stood his ground, looking up at Aang. With an animalistic growl, he hooked his swords together once again and lunged. 

Aang flipped out of the way, throwing more air at him. He dropped to a lower tree branch, only for Jet to follow. He leaped over another jab and went higher once more. Jet continued his pursuit, everso persistent.

Aang plummeted downward. Jet kicked a branch out. It caught Aang’s back, sending him flying into a tree trunk. The air whooshed out of him with a wheeze. He tumbled to the ground limply, unable to get up. 

He heard Jet land near him. “I’m sorry, Aang.” A whooshing of air, a flourishing of swords. “You know it has to be this way.” Aang rolled to his back just to see Jet standing over him. Jet raised a sword- 

Then was tackled to the side. 

Aang shot up as they hit the ground, the other person rolling off Jet to one knee. 

Jet snarled, kicking up to his feet. “You bastard.” 

“I know,” Lee said. “That’s what my dad used to call me.” His eye flashed blue. “Don’t do this.” His voice rang through the air. 

Jet snorted. “Like I’m going to listen to you.” 

Lee shook his head, eye returning to its usual gold color. “So, Plan B.” He drew his swords, then threw himself at Jet. 

It was swordsmanship and combat unlike anything Aang had ever seen before. Jet was good, there was no doubt about that. But he was sloppy, as if he had not been trained properly. His strikes were powerful, but imprecise. Lee, on the other hand… well, Lee was just better. But Jet’s fire, his desire pushing him, was proving to be quite the adversary. 

Jet took an upward slice near Lee’s right arm. Lee shirked to the side and spun, his back to Jet’s, and wrapped his foot around Jet’s ankle. As he finished the turn, he yanked Jet’s foot out from underneath him. Jet stumbled but recovered quickly. He brought each sword down at Lee one at a time, both of which were parried. 

Lee took a jab at Jet. The curved hooks of Jet’s sword caught it, deadlocking it so Lee could not pull it back. “You try so hard, and yet, you’re going to fail,” Jet taunted. 

Lee shoved the tip of the sword forward. Jet dove out of the way, relinquishing his hold on the sword. He hooked them together, then swung. Lee stabbed downward, catching the hilt in the dirt with the points of one of his. “If you’re going to talk, at least be witty about it.” 

Jet unhooked his swords, dodging back at Lee continued his attack. They traded more swipes, jabs, hits, and blows, until Jet caught Lee in a bladelock. “You think you’re funny, don’t you?” 

“Oh, I’m hilarious,” Lee snarled. 

Jet’s head snapped forward and collided with Lee’s nose. 

Lee stumbled back, falling to his knees in the dirt. The sword tumbled from his lax grip. 

Aang tried to move, tried to do something to help him, but his body screamed at him from his own fall. 

Jet shook himself. He crossed the distance between the two and hauled Lee to his feet by the collar of his shirt. “Now, time to take care of- “ 

Lee slammed his hands into Jet’s chest. A fiery blast of air sent Jet soaring back, landing several feet away. He sprung back to his feet. “You… “ he whispered, horrified realization coming over his face. 

Lee dusted his front off, then spread his arms wide. “Me.” 

Jet blinked. The angry, manic person he had been but moments before was gone, replaced with someone far more timid. “You’re one of them.” 

Lee’s eye flashed blue. He dug his foot into the ground, bending his knees slightly, then set a small fireball flaring past Jet. The other guy stumbled back a few steps. 

“And you.” Lee’s voice rang again. “You’re afraid.” 

The same blue flash was reflected in Jet’s eyes. The swords fell from his hands. “N- no!” he stammered, frantically shaking his head. “No, I’m not!” 

Jet stared at his shaking hands. “What did you do?” His terrified eyes flew up to Lee. “What did you do to me?!” Then, he lunged. 

A wave of water blasted him back into a tree. Katara appeared out of nowhere, throwing several more, keeping him pinned. She let out a breath of visible cold air, freezing him to the trunk. 

“Why would you do this?” Katara yelled as Aang finally found his wits. He pulled himself to his feet. “I can’t believe I trusted you!” 

Jet shook himself. “He- “he pointed at Lee” - he- “ 

“You’re sick!” Katara screamed, oblivious to Jet’s distress. “You’re sick, and I trusted you!” 

“Are you okay?” Aang asked, hurrying up to Lee. 

The guy was pale, paler than he normally was. “Fine.” He blinked. His eyes was gold once more. “Perfectly fine.” He took a step and stumbled. 

Aang caught him before he could hit the ground. “You don’t look okay.” 

“No.” Blood dribbled from his nose. He gingerly touched it. “No, I suppose I am not.” 

A bird call sounded from over the reservoir. Jet called back. 

“What are you doing?” Katara demanded. 

Jet grinned, something tired and exhausted rather than triumphant. “You’re too late.” 

A moment later, a flaming arrow arc over the dam, landing on the blasting jelly. For a moment, the only thing Aang could hear was the sound of his breath echoing all over the world. 

The dam exploded. 

A monsoon of water rushed out, down the reservoir. A roaring wave of death and destruction. It took but seconds for it to crash into the town, demolishing everything in sight. The wave grew and grew, showing no sights of stopping. 

Aang’s knees went weak. “All- all the people… “ 

Katara turned on Jet, face colorless. 

“This was a victory,” he said. “Remember that. The Fire Nation is gone, and this valley will be safe.” 

“It will be safe!” a voice said. Aang looked up as Appa emerged with a rumble, Sokka perched on his head. “Without you!” 

Katara let out a cry of happiness. Lee sighed in relief. “Oh, the lucky bastard… “ 

Aang’s knees went even weaker, and he collapsed, taking Lee along with him. The guy made a surprised noise. “Wait, hold on- “ 

“Oh, sorry.” Aang disentangled himself from Lee and got back to his feet. 

Jet jerked, tugged, and pulled against the ice. “We could have freed this valley!” 

“Everyone would have been dead,” Sokka said as Appa landed. “Who would have been left to free then?” 

“You traitor,” Jet snarled. 

“No, Jet. You become the traitor when you stopped helping innocent people.” 

“Katara, please!” Jet’s eyes landed on her. “Help me!” 

She said nothing as she turned on back on him and moved to mount Appa. Aang motioned to Sokka, who shifted to help Lee up. Lee passed Jet one last look. 

Jet snarled at him. 

Lee’s eye flashed blue, and the snarl cut off. 

Aang and Sokka hauled Lee up into the saddle. Sokka moved back over to Appa’s head, flicked the reins, and they were off. 

“I thought you had gone to the dam,” Lee said once they were ways away from Jet and the redwood forest. “What made you go into the town instead?” 

“Let me guess,” Katara said, “your instincts told you?” 

Sokka shrugged, a grin spreading across his face. “Hey, sometimes, they’re right.” 

“Uh, Sokka?” Aang piped up. “We’re going the wrong way.” 

Sokka chuckled, face red, and steered them around. “And sometimes they’re wrong.” 

Aang looked back to where Lee had shifted to lay down. He scooted over closer to him. “Are you okay?” 

“You’re supposed to lay back to stop a nosebleed, right?” 

“Actually, forward, I think.” 

Lee sighed and closed his eyes. “I don’t have the energy for that right now.” 

Aang nodded slowly. “What did you do to him? Why did he suddenly start acting like that?” 

“He was afraid,” Lee replied without opening his eyes. “He never would admit it to himself, but I could feel it. Buried so deep beneath a mess of rage, anger, and unprocessed trauma. I only brought it to the surface.” 

“But how? How did you do it?” 

“I’ll tell you when my brain is not threatening to explode. Or when you’re older.” 

“I’m already a hundred and twelve,” Aang tried. 

Lee chuckled. “Still not old enough.” 

Aang narrowed his eyes. He had once asked Lee how old he was. Lee claimed to be sixteen, but Aang often felt as though that was not the truth. He let out a despondent sigh and stuck his lower lip out. 

Lee opened his eyes. “What are you doing?” 

“Making you feel bad. Is it working?” 

“No.” 

Chapter Text

Something heavy dropped onto Katara’s stomach, jolting her awake. She barely registered Momo leaping from her to Sokka, then soaring up to take shelter on Appa’s saddle. 

Sokka shot up just after she did, curved knife in one hand, boomerang in the other. “Wuzzgoinon? Did we get captured again?” He made to swing his knife around. 

Lee grabbed his wrist before too much damage could be done. “Uh, no. We’re fine.” 

“Oh. Thasnice.” He plopped back down and was sleep one moment later. 

“Sorry,” Aang said on Katara’s left. “I just had a bad dream.” He turned away, back to her, curling up on his side. “Go back to sleep.”

Sokka muttered blearily in agreement. 

Katara was not as unconcerned. Throwing Sokka a dirty look, she turned to Aang. “Are you alright? Do you want to talk about it?” 

“I’m okay,” he replied in a way that suggested quite the opposite. 

“You’re having a lot of nightmares lately,” Katara continued. “Do you want to tell me about them?” 

“I think I just need some rest.” 

Sokka shot up again. “You guys wanna hear about my dream?” 

No response. 

“That’s fine. I didn’t really want to talk about it anyway.” 

Katara kept her gaze trained on Aang’s back for a moment, then glanced over at Lee. He had taken residence on one of Appa’s legs, keeping a watch over them for the night. The encounter with Jet had left Aang rather shaken, and the nightmares had begun not long after they fled the redwood forest. Katara had tried to be gentle with him, tried to allow him the opportunity to open up about whatever it was that was bothering him, but Aang shut down every time the topic came up. 

Lee pushed himself off Appa’s leg and stepped over. He knelt down next to Aang, placing a hand on his arm. “Come on,” he said. Aang did not protest, rising a second later and following Lee somewhere. Under any other circumstance, watching Aang go off somewhere alone with Lee might have worried her, regardless of how much the guy proved he was no harm to them. 

But for now, she supposed there were things that only Lee could discuss with him. The guy was strangely good at reading emotions and getting things out of people, especially Aang. Lee could practically read him like a book. Aang responded to Lee better than anyone else for reasons she did not understand. As she slipped back into her sleeping bag, Katara could not decide if it was for better or worse. 

“Look at those clear skies!” Aang pointed to a flock of birds. He seemed to have shaken off whatever was bothering him. The morning had dawned, and they were preparing to head out once more. “Should be some smooth flying.” 

Katara glanced at Lee questioningly. He mouthed the word, Later. 

Katara picked up the food bag. It fell limp in her hands. “Well, we better fly ourselves to a market. Because we’re out of food.” 

“Wait!” Sokka held up his hands. “This was in my dream. We shouldn’t go to the market.” 

Katara raised an eyebrow. “Why?” 

“Because a giant monster shaped like Momo rises out of the ground and swallows us whole?” Lee deadpanned. 

“No,” Sokka said, missing the sarcasm in Lee’s voice. “No… food eats people!” 

“Oh.” Lee shrugged. “Guess I wasn’t that far off then.” 

“But, Momo could talk.” Sokka pointed an accusatory finger at the lemur. “You said some very unkind things.” 

Momo chittered in protest.

“I’m sure Momo would say many unkind things.” Lee held out his arm, and Momo scampered up onto his shoulders. “Give the chance.” 

They found a small market town not far off. Sokka and Aang ventured off through the stalls, leaving Katara alone with Lee. “So, is now later?” she asked. 

“I suppose it can be,” he said without looking at her. 

“Did Aang tell you what his dream was about? It was a dream, right?” Lee nodded. “Then did he say what happened in it?” 

“No.” 

She stopped. “No? But then what- “ 

“I’m getting there,” Lee interrupted. “It doesn’t matter how much I would have tried to push, he did not and still does not want to talk about it. I showed him a few basic firebending forms, just something to get his mind off it. Maybe let his guard down enough that he would want to tell me, but he saw right through it. He said he felt better after it was all over, but he was lying.”

“Aang is a terrible liar,” Katara supplied. 

Lee nodded. “Definitely. He knew that I knew he was lying, but again --- not my place to push.” 

They stopped by a stand selling watermelons. Katara glimpsed Aang and Sokka heading toward them. “So no idea what it was all about?” 

“Not the faintest,” Lee admitted. “It is still bothering him, I can tell you that. I would advise not bringing it up unless he does, however.” 

“Why?” 

“Because I don’t want him to shut down completely.” 

“It’s good, it’s perfect!” the stall owner urged as Katara picked up a watermelon. Aang and Sokka had caught up to them by this point. “I’m telling you the truth!” 

Katara shook the watermelon. Something sloshed on the inside. “I don’t know if I like the sound of that swishing.” 

“Swishing means it’s ripe!” The owner stomped around from the back. “It’s the ripe juices swishing around, eh?” 

“I think it’s true,” Aang added. “Swishing means it’s ripe.” 

“Actually,” Lee said, “I think it just sounds kind of gross.” 

Katara had to agree. She placed the watermelon back on the stand. “Actually, I just realized that we don’t have any money left.” She offered the woman a sweet and embarrassed grin. 

The woman gave her a dirty look, then snatched the basket of fruit Sokka had picked out. 

“Out of food and out of money,” Sokka complained once they had retreated far enough away from the vendor. “What are we supposed to do?” 

“You could get a job, smart guy,” Katara suggested. 

“We shouldn’t go out there!” As if one cue, an aging woman’s voice floated over to them. “The fish can wait. There’s going to be a terrible storm!” Katara’s attention was drawn to where the old woman was yelling at a man she assumed was the woman’s husband. 

“You’re crazy!” the man fired back. “It’s a nice day.” He motioned toward the clear blue sky. “No clouds, no wind, no nothing! Quit your nagging, woman.” 

“My joints say there’s going to be a storm!” 

“Well.” The man crossed his arms. “It’s your joints against my brain.” 

The woman scoffed. “Then I hope your brain can find someone else to haul that fish, ‘cause I ain’t comin’!” 

“Then I’ll find a new fish hauler and pay him double!” 

Sokka shot Katara a triumphant look and hurried forward. “Hey, couldn’t help but overhear, but do you need a- “ 

“You’re hired,” the man interrupted, pointing at him. 

The other three shot him confused looks. 

Sokka grinned at them. “You said get a job.” 

Katara only shrugged. Guess it really is that easy. 

As Sokka and the old man gathered supplies onto the fishing boat, Katara saw dark clouds beginning to gather on the horizon. 

“Maybe this isn’t a good idea,” Aang suggested to Sokka. He pointed to the massive conglomerate. “Those clouds don’t look too friendly.” 

“I said I was gonna do this job.” Sokka hefted another pack into his arms. “I can’t back out just because of some bad weather.” 

“He has a point, Sokka,” Lee added. “Those clouds are purple. In my experience, purple clouds aren’t a good thing.” 

Sokka just waved him off, disappearing into the belly of the fishing boat. 

The old woman and man were once again arguing. “The boy with the tattoos has some sense.” She pointed to Aang. “You should listen to him!” 

“Boy with tattoos?” The old man spun and surveyed Aang. “Airbending tattoos… well, I’ll be a hog monkey’s uncle. You’re the Avatar?” 

“That’s right,” Katara affirmed with a grin. 

The man threw dirty looks at the both of them. “Well, don’t be so smiley about it! The Avatar disappeared for a hundred years!” He took a step forward. Aang lurched away. “You turned your back on the world!” 

Lee moved forward, quickly putting himself between the old man and Aang. “Personal space, have you ever heard of it?” His eyes glinted dangerously, and the man seemed to move back an inch or two. 

“Aang would never turn his back on anyone!” Katara added. 

“Oh, he wouldn’t, huh?” the old man responded thoughtfully. “Then I must have imagined the last hundred years of war and suffering.” 

Lee’s head tilted. The temperature around rose a few degrees. 

“Aang is the bravest person I know,” Katara said, putting herself between the two. The temperature dropped. “He has done nothing but help people and save lives since I met him. It’s not his fault he disappeared. Right, Aang?” 

The wind gusted, and she turned. Aang had taken off into the air, disappearing into the sky. 

“That’s right!” The old man shook his fist. “Keep flying!” 

“You’re a horrible old man!” Katara spat at him. 

The old man waved her off. 

“Oh, that wasn’t harsh enough.” Lee crossed his arms. “Go for something more along the lines of ‘I hope misfortune befalls you for the rest of your days.’” He eyed the man. “Which there don’t seem to be many of those left.” 

The old man blanched. 

“I’m going after him,” Lee said. He turned on his heel and hurried off. 

The old man shook himself. “Something seriously not right about that kid.” 

A lot of things aren’t. She cursed herself for agreeing with him. Throwing the man one last glare, she took off after Lee. 

They hopped onto Appa and took off. By the time they located Aang, the storm clouds had rolled over. Rain had begun to pour from the sky, creating a misty veil Katara could not see through. She placed a hand over her eyes as a shield, but it did little to help. 

“There!” Lee pointed to a cave hidden in the side of a mountain. “I see him!” 

Katara flicked the reins, steering Appa over toward it. When they landed, she glimpsed at an orange and yellow figure carved out in the darkness. He was sitting with his back to them, knees pulled up to his chest. “I’m sorry for running away.” 

“It’s okay,” Katara said gently. “That fisherman was way out of line.” 

“It’s not your fault,” Lee added. 

“No.” Aang shook his head. “He wasn’t that far off.” 

Katara shared a look with Lee. “What do you mean?” she asked. 

Aang hunched farther in on himself. “I don’t want to talk about it.” 

Katara knelt down beside him, placing a hand on his shoulder. “It has to do with your dream, doesn’t it?” Aang turned his head away from her, and a piece of her heart shattered. “Talk to me,” she urged. “You know you can tell me anything.” 

“It won’t do you much good to avoid it.” Lee came up on Aang’s other side. “Whatever it might be.” 

“You can talk to us,” Katara said.

Aang hesitated. “I don’t want you to look at me any differently.” 

Lee suddenly chuckled. Katara and Aang looked to him questioningly. “Not to sound like a narcissist, but- “he motioned to himself” -can’t be any worse than me.” 

“Really, it can’t.” Despite herself, Katara found a small grin spreading across her face. It felt nice to finally have something she and Lee could both agree on. 

Aang sighed. “Well… it’s kind of a long story- “

Appa’s arrival was announced by a loud rumble and the very strong smell of wet bison filling the cave. He stepped up behind them and nudged Aang’s back with his nose. 

“I’ll get a fire going,” Lee said. Katara stayed by Aang side as he found smalls sticks and shrubs within the cave and placed them in a pile. He lit a small fire in his palm and passed it on. 

Aang began his story once they had all moved around the fire --- “I’ll never forgot the day the monks told me I was the Avatar… “

He had been twelve, as opposed to the typical sixteen. Just a kid, not much younger than she was. She heard how quickly the word spread, how quickly he had been ostracized from his people. How fiercely Monk Gyatso defended Aang. He wanted Aang to retain some semblance of childhood while the other monks insisted he go off and train. 

Her horror grew when Aang described how the other monks wanted to separate him and Gyatso. They thought he was a bad influence on Aang. They wanted to separate them, afraid Aang was too attached to Gyatso to perform his duties as the Avatar. 

Katara caught her eyes drifting over to Lee every so often. His face remained emotionless, but there was a turbulent storm hiding behind his remaining eye. 

Once Aang had finished, she went to place a hand on Aang’s shoulder. “I’m so sorry, Aang.” The words felt stupid, but she was at a loss for what to say. 

He jerked away and jumped to his feet, storming away from the fire. “How could they do that to me? They wanted to take away everything I knew and everyone I loved!” His voice rose with the last word. The tattoos on his hands flashed with light. The fire sparked, tossing hot cinders in her direction. 

Lee shifted, planting a foot into the ground in case he needed to stand quickly. “Has he glowed like that before?” 

“Once, when we went to the Southern Air Temple. Why- “ 

Lee looked back at her. “ What ?” 

“I’m sorry.” Aang plopped back down in front of the fire. Lee stared at him a moment, then shifted back into a sit. Katara watched him with narrow eyes. 

“You have a right to be angry,” Katara said. “The monks shouldn’t have sent you away.” 

“They didn’t. I- “he took a deep breath and pulled his knees up to his chest” -I ran. I wasn’t sure what to do. Running, leaving it all behind, it seemed like the best option. That’s when I was caught in a storm.” Aang’s eyes darkened. “I never saw Gyatso again. All I remember is going down into the water, and then… nothing. The next thing I recall is you pulling me out of the iceberg.” 

“You- you ran away?” Katara said. 

Lee threw her a look, and she shrugged. What else was she supposed to say? 

“I did,” Aang said, unaware of their little exchange. “Then, the Fire Nation attacked our temple. My people needed me, and I wasn’t there to help.” 

The carnage at the Southern Air Temple rose in her mind. She shook it off, her hands suddenly feeling grimy. “You don’t know what would have happened- “ 

Aang was not finished. “The world needed me, and I wasn’t there to help!” 

“Aang- “ Katara said. 

The air crackled. Lee shifted again. “The fisherman was right. I did turn my back on the world.” 

“You’re being too hard on yourself.” The crackling pittered out. “Even if you did run away, I think it was meant to be.” 

Aang made a face. “Is that supposed to make me feel better?” 

“The Fire Nation would have killed you if you had stayed,” Lee said. 

“You don’t know that.” 

“I don’t?” Lee fired back. Aang once again hunched farther in on himself. “That’s why they went after the Air Nomads. They wanted to find you.” 

“Wow,” Aang deadpanned, “doing a great job on the comfort part.” 

“Life is full of could have’s, should have’s, and would have’s,” Lee continued. “You cannot spend your time constantly worrying over them. It is in the past now. There is nothing you can do about it but continue forward.” 

“They’re gone.” Aang’s voice broke. “They’re all gone, and I did nothing to help them.” In the fire’s orange light, she could see tears welling in the corners of his eyes. “I’m- I’m the only one- “ 

“No.” Lee stood. “Up.” 

Aang brushed the tears away, then stood too. 

“Give me your hands.” 

Aang held them out. 

Lee took them. “Look at me --- it’s not your fault. Do you understand that?” Aang nodded. “Really? Because I don’t think you do.” 

“I do- “ Aang’s voice cracked. 

“None of us will ever understand the threads of fate or why we end up where we do. But it is like Katara said. You are meant to be here now, and that is what matters. That’s hard to accept. You don’t have to accept it now. No one expects you too.” 

“I can’t accept it.” Aang pulled his hands away from Lee’s. “If I do, if I accept it, then I’m just abandoning them.” 

“No, you’re not.” Katara stood as well. “That’s not what’s happening.” 

“They wouldn’t want you to live in the past,” Lee added. 

“How would you know what they would have wanted?” Aang suddenly snapped. “You didn’t know them like I did!” 

Something flickered across Lee’s face. Katara watched for it to happen again, but she never saw it. She chalked it up to the shadows of the dancing flames. “Maybe I didn’t,” he said after a moment of hesitation. “But is that what you think they would have wanted?” 

Aang opened his mouth, then closed it. His face fell. “I… I don’t know.” 

Lee shrugged. “Then take my word for it.” 

Aang’s face softened, and he offered Lee a small nod. 

“You give the world hope,” Katara added. “Hope that it needs now.” 

A flash of lightning illuminated the cave entrance. A dark shadowed figure stood at the front. “Help!” it shouted. “Oh, please help!” 

Katara hurried around Aang and Lee, recognizing the old woman from earlier. “Please, you have to help,” the woman said, “my husband- “ 

“Where’s Sokka?” Katara interrupted.

“They should have been back by now,” the woman explained. “This storm is becoming a typhoon! They’re caught out at sea!” 

“I’m going to find them.” The attention in the cave turned to Aang. 

“I’m going with you,” Katara said. 

“Well, I’m staying here!” The old woman plopped down by the fire. 

Katara and Aang shot looks at Lee. “I’ll stay here with her. I think you guys have this handled.” 

The three of them set to checking the security of Appa’s saddle. Katara pulled Lee to Appa’s left side, opposite from Aang. “What do you mean you didn’t?” 

“Didn’t what?” Lee asked, tugging downward on the strap. 

“You said that maybe, you didn’t know the airbenders.” 

Lee’s hand slipped off the saddle. He bit his lips, then grabbed it again. “And? What about it?” 

“Most people would have said they don’t know them,” she said. Lee stopped. “I get the impression that you did know them, but that wouldn’t make any sense because… “well, she didn’t really need to finish that statement. 

He shrugged. “So? What’re you getting at?” 

“Oh, nothing.” Katara turned to tighten her own strap. 

“I don’t like to be lied to, Katara.” 

“Would it kill you to give me a straight answer?” 

Another shrug. “Perhaps.” 

“So did you know them?” 

He stopped again. “If I did? What difference would that make?”

“A lot of difference.” She shook her head. “It just doesn’t make any sense. They died over a hundred years ago, and yet you… “another headshake. “I don’t get it.” 

“Hey!” Aang called on the other side. “Are we about ready?” 

“One second,” Lee called back. He turned to her and lowered his voice. “Look. There’s a lot of things that won’t make any sense until you have the full truth. And before you ask,” he hurriedly said as she opened her mouth, “I am going to ask you to trust me on one thing.” 

“Which is?” 

He bit his lip again. Another long moment of hesitation. “Just trust me when I say that you’re better off not knowing.”

“And why is that?” she said. 

“Because the truth tends to freak people out.” Lee considered the statement. “A lot.” 

The comment lingered in Katara’s mind as she climbed into the saddle and took off into the stormy sky, holding on tightly and refusing to let go. 

Chapter Text

The healer took excellent care of the boy. To the best of her ability, that was. Ummi doubted any healer would know what to do in this situation. This healer’s abilities were great, no doubt about it. It was the boy that was the problem. 

He was the worst possible patient. Of course, what else would Ummi have expected? The boy was Blue, and Blue was the boy. She may have never known Blue when he was alive and would have had need for a healer, but she knew Blue in death was quite stubborn. Stubborn enough that he had created a reputation amongst the other spirits, who knew better than to try and bargain with him when he set his mind to something. 

Perhaps the boy had picked up Blue’s stubbornness. Perhaps he had always been this way --- which was the worst option of the two. A brick wall would have been more negotiable in that case.

The boy insisted he was not hungry. The healer continued to offer him food. He never ate it, and this typically resulted in the same argument. 

“I told you,” the boy would say. “I don’t want it.” 

“You’re don’t?” The healer would raise an eyebrow. “And when was the last time you ate?” 

He would shrug. 

“That’s what I thought. “ 

And the cycle would start all over again. 

The more Ummi watched the boy, the more she doubted she could call him Blue. Her companion, who had found her faceless and lost so many years ago, was there, but not entirely. She could hear his voice, feel a hint of his presence whenever she spoke to the boy. But as soon as it was there, it was gone. She could sometimes see Blue’s mannerisms. How he sat with his knees drawn up to his chest, how he would never stay in one place for more than two seconds, constantly and always fidgeting. The way he spoke, the snappish remarks and dry tone. In those ways, he was Blue. 

But he wasn’t. Not every way, she supposed. Whenever the healer would get too close to him, he would become a shell of himself, curling away as if he were afraid of her. As if he thought she was going to hurt him. Blue, on the other hand, was known for his brashness and fearlessness. 

But the kid was not brash, not loud or prideful. He was the opposite, scared and small and a complete mystery to Ummi. 

The healer would come in every morning and talk to him. Sometimes, he would respond. Others, he would act as though she was not there. 

The boy had not left the backroom for almost a week, not since Ummi brought him to the village. Most of the time, he laid on the cot, staring blankly at the ceiling. On the occasion, she saw him laying with the top half of his body off the cot, doing headstands (which had to be so painful on the wood), and other random things. Almost as if he were remembering how a living, breathing body worked. 

Ummi herself tried to talk to him, tried to contact him, but she was always slammed back by a wall. He did not want her anywhere near his mind. 

It probably was not intentional. Every time she was near him, she sensed turbulence, unrest, and unease. Confusion, at what exactly, she had yet to figure out. She only needed to know what had happened to him. Why she sensed her companion and this other presence, what had happened to the two of them, why they were one now. Perhaps if she could see his memories, then maybe she would understand. 

He seemed to sense this was the case whenever she was around, hence why he refused to let her in. Whatever happened… it had to have been bad. Maybe it was better if she didn’t know, never saw the pain her friend went through. 

But if he would not let her in that way, then she would have to speak to him. She waited until the middle of the day, when  the healer was the busiest and most likely to leave the kid alone. He had kicked up into a handstand when she sat down on the edge of the cot. She let the shimmering mist that concealed her from the mortal eye fall and said, “Blue?” 

“What?” The kid’s head ducked down, catching sight of her. She watched him slowly start to tip, tip, tip, then crash roughly on his back with a grunt.

Ummi winced. She pushed herself off the cot. “That was rough.” 

He was staring up at her, upside down. “You.” 

“Hello.” 

He narrowed his eyes. His left one was horrendously scarred, skin red and wrinkled, the eye itself a milky white. The right was untouched. She swore she saw flashes of light, gold, then blue, back to gold, then blue once more. “You. You’re- I- “he blinked. The eye remained gold. “I know you.” 

“You do,” Ummi confirmed. “You know me quite well, Blue.” 

He mouthed the word Blue. “Why are you calling me that?” 

“Blue?” 

He nodded. “Is that what you called me? That’s not my name.” 

“You never told me what your name was.” The kid made a face. “Not now, and certainly not back then. All you ever told me was Blue. It was the name you preferred.” 

He blinked. “I don’t- I don’t remember that.” 

The door to the backroom burst open. The shimmering mist fell back over Ummi as the healer took stock on the sight in front of her. “I heard a thud. Why are you on the floor?” 

The kid lifted his head. “I fell.” 

The healer snorted. “Clearly. Are you alright?” 

He shrugged, pushing himself up back to his feet. “Fine. I think so.” 

The healer narrowed her eyes. She surveyed around the room. “Just don’t break anything,” she told him before stepping out of the room, shutting the door behind her.

The kid turned to face Ummi as the mist fell off once more. “You’re a spirit,” he said. 

“I am.” 

“You’re the one that comes and heals them all.” He nodded to the door. “The ones she can’t take care of. The Painted Lady.” 

Ummi nodded. 

“And you’re not the first who has spoken to me,” the boy continued. “I’ve- I’ve seen others. They talk to me. They- they want something from me, but I- “he shook his head. “I cannot give it to them. I don’t know how.” 

“What do they want?” 

It took him a moment to respond --- “Mediator. That is what they call me. But I don’t understand how I- I know you,” he suddenly changed the subject. “I know you. You’re- you’re- “he shook his head again. 

“You don’t remember?” she asked, voice softening. “Do you?” 

A third head shake. “I remember… pain.” The gold in his eye was bright. “Pain unlike anything I have ever felt.” Back to blue. “There was a pond with- with turtleducks. And he was there, and- “he winced, placed a hand to his temple. “And I was- “gold” -we were- “blue” -falling. And endless abyss. It was night, and- “ 

She reached out and laid a hand on his shoulder. The boy froze, his eye once again a bright gold. Ummi felt underneath that touch, felt the warmth and vigor of life underneath there. Only the kind that came with a living and breathing body, a physical form. “Blue.” 

His head tilted and mouthed Blue again. 

“I can help you remember,” Ummi continued. “Not all of it. There are some things you will have to come to terms with yourself. But I can help you… straighten things out.” Not the best way to phrase it, but she did not know how else to. “In another life, you knew me. You trusted me. Do you still trust me now?” 

Slowly, he nodded. “Yes. Maybe. I think I did. Or do. Or maybe I want to.” 

She held out a hand. After another moment, he took it. 

***

The kid did not sleep, and that threw a huge wrench into her plans. Sokha had planned to check over him while he was sleeping, and yet…

Agni Almighty, he was just trying to piss her off. He was doing an incredible job, not that she would ever admit to it. Days the kid had been here, and she had not seen him drift off even once. No sleeping, no eating, what else did he not do? 

None of it made sense. Sokha was a healer. She specialized in the human body. Every human she had ever encountered slept and ate. Every human needed to do those things to survive. Yet, here this kid was, seemingly immune to these rules. She watched him carefully sometimes, just to make sure he was breathing. There were even moments where he seemed to forget to do even that. 

A natural thing we all do, and yet… Sokha’s words dissolved into a frustrated  noise. Despite everything, the kid looked healthier every day. Color back to his cheeks, energy in his movements, life present in the way he spoke and acted. Which, factoring in lack of everything else, was the complete opposite of what should have been happening. 

“Bastard,” she muttered under her breath. She had been fuming about the whole thing for the better part of the day. Maybe he existed to for no other reason than to spite her. A fact which Sokha did have to respect. 

That night, she had gone to wash out a bowl in the Jang Hui River. The water was not as clean as it used to be years ago when she first arrived, not since the Fire Nation decided to toss up a factory on the hill overlooking the village. Still, the water did its job fairly decently. She could also come back and redo it in the early hours of the morning. 

She squatted down at the edge of the dock, dipping the bowl into the water, when she felt a presence behind her. 

Sokha waved them away. “Give me a second.” 

“I’m afraid I can’t.” A rope of water reached out from the river and snatched the bowl from her hands, disappearing under the surface. 

Sokha froze, then shot back to a stand. “Jang Hui?” Had the river just talked to her? 

Wait, what? She pressed the heels of her hands into her eyes. The kid was taking a greater toll on her psyche than she had ever expected. 

The voice chuckled. A woman’s, originating from behind her. “No. I must speak to you, Sokha.” 

Slowly, Sokha turned as a soft white glow illuminated the dark night. Behind her stood the Painted Lady. 

Chapter Text

The coughing started three days after the storm. Sokka waved their concerns off, repeated I’m fine ’s, It’s just a little cough’ s, It’s not big deal ’s, but it slowly got worse and worse. But, no matter how many times they brought this up, he refused to stop. Aang heard Katara tell him that if he died, the last words she would say to him would be I told you so. 

They were taking refuge in an abandoned, crumbling stone building, far away from port town. Sokka was buried within the confines of his sleeping back, tucking safely away upon one of Appa’s legs, sweating profusely, yet claiming he was dying of cold. 

Their voices floated over to Aang as he came over the crest of the staircase. Katara placed a cool cloth on his forehead. “This should help bring your fever down.”

“You know what I love about Appa the most?” Sokka said, voice nasally. “His sense of humor.” 

“That’s nice, Sokka,” Katara deadpanned. “I’ll tell him.” 

Appa rumbled a response. 

Sokka laughed wearily. “Classic Appa… “ 

“I couldn’t find any ginger root for the tea,” Aang said, announcing his presence, “but I found a map.” He held up an old piece of paper he had scavenged out of the dirt. “There’s a herbalist institute on the top of that mountain.” He pointed between the stone columns to the general area of the mountain range. “There might be a cure up there.” 

“Aang,” Katara said, “he’s in no condition to travel. Sokka needs to rest.” 

To prove her point, Sokka took in a great, snotty sniff. 

Katara grimaced. “I’m sure he’ll be better by tomorr- “she broke off and cleared her throat. “I’m sure he’ll- “she cut off again, falling into a coughing fit. 

Aang took a step back. “Not you too!” 

“Relax. It’s just a little cough. I’m fine- “she broke into another fit. 

Aang threw an arm up to shield himself. “That’s how Sokka started yesterday. Now look at him! He think he’s an earthbender!” 

Sokka was now sitting up in his sleeping bag, punching around. “Take that, you rrrock!” he slurred, swinging his arms. 

Lee grabbed his wrists. “I think the fighting can wait,” he said as he gently pushed Sokka back down. “The sedimentary uprising isn’t scheduled for another couple days.” 

“Aw, man… “ 

Aang motioned to Sokka, with an expression that said See what I’m talking about? “A few more hours, and you’ll be talking nonsense too!” 

“Then why don’t you go find some medicine?” Lee suggested. “I’ll stay here with them.” 

“No,” Katara said before Aang even got the chance to respond. “It’s too dangerous for him to go off alone. We don’t know this part of the world very well. You should go with him, Lee.” 

“That’s a terrible idea,” Lee said. 

Katara crossed her arms. “And why?” 

Lee mimicked her stance. “Because, Katara, with our luck, someone is most likely going to get into a massive fight or be captured, and we will be forced to flee. Neither you or Sokka are in much of a state to properly defend yourselves, so that leaves your two options being myself and Aang. Aang moves fast and lightly. He can get to the herbalist’s before anyone even knew he was gone. Me? As we’ve been over, I have quite the way with words. And, if that doesn’t work, then we resort to the whole firebending thing.” He shrugged. “Besides, I think Aang has more than proven himself worthy to take upon this task on his own. I trust him to get there and back without too much trouble.” 

“Wait, really?” Aang asked. 

“Of course,” Lee answered. “You flew out and faced the might of a hurricane without a second thought. Which, might be construed as reckless in some cases, but considering that you brought back Sokka and the fisherman successfully, I wouldn’t count it as so. I think you will be okay.” 

Red blossomed in Aang’s cheeks. Lee had always shown a soft spot for him, but Aang thought it was due to the strange overprotectiveness Lee had. This? This was straight praise, which wasn’t something Lee gave out often. 

“Also, you’re sick.” Lee turned back to Katara. “Therefore your judgment is askew. Me, I’m not sick. Incapable of being, in fact, so my opinion is valid. I’ll stay here.” 

Katara’s jaw dropped. “How is my- “ 

Aang did not wait to hear the rest as he grabbed his glider and swung it over his head, preparing to take off. Just as he did so, lightning lit up the sky. Thunder rumbled in the distance. 

Aang grimaced, retracting his glider. “Maybe it’s safer to go on foot,” he said, more to himself than anyone else as Katara and Lee dissolved into an argument. He took off, using the wind to carry his feet faster across the ground 

***

“How is my opinion invalid?” 

“That isn’t what I said,” Lee fired back. 

“It basically is,” she argued. “You said yours was valid, implying that mine is not. Mind explaining to me exactly what you meant by that?” 

“I do, actually.” 

She glared at him. “Are you allergic to explaining… anything? Everything?” She had not so soon forgotten their conversation back in the cave. Just trust me when I say that you’re better off not knowing. Classic. After everything she had seen from him, she needed more than an excuse. 

Oh, it freaks people out? Well, Katara had been through quite the ringer recently. There wasn’t anything out there she could not handle. 

“I am getting the sense that you’re frustrated with me,” Lee said. 

Katara snorted. “Oh, your powers of intuition never fail to astound.”

“I am well-renowned for them, actually.” He gave her a sly grin. 

She did not hate Lee, contrary to what everyone else might have believed. Despite everything, he continued to prove her own expectations about him wrong. She could get over the fact he was a firebender. She could also get over the fact that even though the three of them may trust him completely, he did not share the same sentiment. There were things he did not want to talk about, and she could respect them for the time being. 

What she could not get over was the fact that she still wanted to throttle him most of the time. 

“Besides, like Aang said,” Lee continued, “it won’t be long until all you can speak in is drunken ramblings.” 

“I don’t speak in drunken ramblings- “ 

“No, but- “ 

“Lemme tell y’all ‘bout my favori’ stories when I’s a kid,” Sokka slurred. 

Lee motioned with his head, letting the situation speak for itself. 

“You’re here to protect us,” Katara argued, “not to boss me around or speak for me.” A headache suddenly panged through her skull, but she ignored it. “I’m fine, aside from a little cough.” She had an even bigger headache to deal with at the moment. 

“You’re ill, and I’m offering you the best way to not be so.” 

“And how are you doing that by invalidating my opinion?” Then, something popped into her head. “What do you mean you can’t get sick?” 

Lee stepped toward her, holding his hands up. “Better if you don’t know- “ 

“Oh, no, no, no.” Katara pointed an accusatory finger at him, causing him to stop in his tracks. “I’m not playing this game anymore.” 

“What game? There’s no game.” 

“Yes, there is! This whole ‘better if you don’t know’ or- or something!” 

Lee placed a hand atop hers, pushing her hand down. For the first time, his face seemed to truly soften, something like amusement sneaking into his remaining eye. Up close, she noticed a ring of blue around his golden iris. “Do you want the truth?” 

“Whole- “she sniffed” -wholeheartedly- “ 

She spun away from Lee and sneezed. When her eyes opened, her vision was blurry. She wheeled on Lee again, nearly stumbling into him. “Wholeheartedly,” she repeated, then cleared her throat. 

“You’re not fine.” 

“Yes, I am.” 

“Oh, really?” 

“Yes, I- “she flinched as a small jet of water suddenly hit her in the face. She stumbled away from Lee, whacking at the air in front herself. “Hey! What was- “ 

“Katara?” Sokka croaked. 

“What?” she snapped. It was much harsher than she intended it to be. 

Sokka cringed back into his sleeping bag at her tone. “Can I’ve some water?” 

“Sure, I’ll- “she broke down into a coughing fit. 

Lee placed a hand on her shoulder, guiding her to rest on one of Appa’s fluffy legs. She gratefully collapsed on it, all tension seeping out of her muscles and into Appa’s soft fur. “Can you at least give him- wait, where’s my waterskin?” 

“You mean this?” Lee held it up. 

Katara stared at him in bewilderment. She patted around her waist. “How did you- “she shook her head. She did not have the energy to worry about that right now. “I don’t know how you got that, but give him some.” 

Lee shook it, then narrowed his eyes. He flipped it open and turned it upside down. Only a single drop fell out. “There’s a creek down the hill. I’ll be back. Appa, you’re in charge.” 

Appa let out a loud rumble in response. Momo scampered off the bison and climbed up onto Lee’s shoulders. Lee turned to leave.

“Wait.” Katara reached out for him, and he turned back. “You never told me the truth.” 

“I could tell you, but you wouldn’t believe it.” 

She crossed her arms, glaring at him down her nose. “Try me.” 

Lee slung the waterskin over his shoulder. He held his hands in front of his face, gesturing grandly. “Once upon in a time,” he began theatrically, “in a land far away… I died.” He paused for dramatic effect, then shrugged. “And it didn’t really stick. A fact I am sure a few people were disappointed about. The end.” 

“Oh, ha ha,” Katara said. “You think you’re funny?” 

“I’ve said it before.” An amused smile played over his lips. “I’m hilarious.” 

***

Aang’s breath was coming out in bursts and sharp pants by the time he reached the herbalist’s. His chest was tight, his legs burning from the effort of running so far and so fast. He put on a extra burst of speed as he reached the stairs, eventually coming to a stop at the precipice of the mountain after so long. 

His path ended in a circular archway, and he collapsed against it. The smell of dozens of different plants hit Aang’s nose as he stepped into the herbalist’s greenhouse. He spotted an aging woman in light blue robes. Her back to to him as she busied herself at a table. 

A caterwaul caught Aang’s attention, making him jump. He glimpsed a fat, fluffy gray cat before it scurred off into the green. 

Weird little things, he said to himself, moving over to the woman. “Hello?” he called. “Sorry to barge in like this. I’m aware you have no idea who I am, but I’m the Avatar.” 

The old woman hummed, continuing her work of grinding several different herbs into gross-looking goop. 

Alright then. “I saw your place on a map I found. I need some medicine for my friends, and I was wondering if you could help me.”

The old woman did not respond nor did she turn around. 

“Hellooo?” Aang said, coming up behind her. “My friends are sick, did you hear me? They have fevers, and they’ve been coughing, and- “ 

“Settle down, young man,” the woman chastised. She turned away with her bowl of goop. “Your friends are going to be fine.” 

“And how do you know that?” Aang snapped. 

“I’ve been up here forty years, you know,” she said airly. “I’ve seen and heard of many things. Used to be others, but they all left years ago. Now, it’s just me and Miyuki.” 

The cat popped out of the brush and hopped up onto the table. The herbalist scratched it behind the ears. 

Aang let out a loud, aggravated sigh, hoping she could hear it. He did not have time for this. “That’s nice, but- “ 

“Wounded Earth Kingdom troops still come by now and again,” she interrupted, continuing as if she had not heard it. “Brave, brave boys. And thanks to my remedies, they always leave in better shape than when they arrived.” 

“How wonderful,” Aang said. He peered suspiciously at the goop. “Are you almost done.” 

The herbalist held up a hand. “Hold up. I just need one more ingredient… “she trailed off to another table. “Sandalwood… oh yes- no that won’t do. Banana leaf? Eh… nope. Ginger root? Uh… hmm… “she listed off several more ingredients. 

Aang let out another impatient sigh. He crossed his arms, tapped his foot. Old people and taking their time. He remembered Monk Gyatso saying something about having learned to take time and appreciate what was right before you, having learned that when you do everything in a rush, you miss the world around, blah blah blah. He was on a time limit here.

Lee was right. With their luck, something bad was bound to happen at any moment. Aang wanted to be back before said thing could happen to him. 

After what felt like a hundred years, the herbalist picked out an orange plum blossom. She plucked it off the branch and plopped it into the goop. 

“Finally!” Aang lunged for the bowl- 

The herbalist slapped his hand away. “What do you think you’re doing?!” 

Aang winced, rubbing his hand. “Take- taking the cure to my friends?” 

The herbalist laughed. “This isn’t a cure. It’s Miyuki’s dinner.” The cat padded over and sat down expectantly. “Plum blossom is her favorite.” 

Aang stared at her in amazement. “Really?” was all he could think to say. “What about my friends?” 

The herbalist waved him off. “Oh, no need to worry about them. All they need is some frozen wood frogs. There’s plenty of them down in the valley swamp.” She motioned to the greenhouse entrance. 

Frogs? “And… what do they need to do with those?” 

It was the herbalist’s turn to stare at him in amazement. “Why suck on them, of course!” 

Aang choked. He thought his brain might have stopped working right then and there. Except for the horrible image it decided to conjure, that of slimy, warty skin contact his mouth- “S- suck on them?” 

The herbalist explained that the frog skin excreted a substance that could cure Katara and Sokka’s illness almost instantly. However, the frogs had to be frozen for it to work. “So, get plenty of them!” she advised. 

Aang shook himself. He resisted the urge to wipe his mouth off. “You’re insane, aren’t you?”

The herbalist cackled. 

Why suck of them, of course! Aang shook himself, then bolted from the greenhouse, heading for the valley. The wind had picked up, rolling grass blades like waves on the ocean. The sky had darkened, the rumbling of thunder slowly approaching. Aang picked up his pace, speeding for the bottom of the valley. 

The air behind him moved. His feet were suddenly pinned to the ground, but his momentum was still carrying him forward. He fell flat on his face. 

“What- ?”He pushed himself back up and glanced down. Two arrows were pinning him to the ground. He grabbed and yanked them out of the ground and out of his clothes. 

He glanced in the direction the arrows came from, through the line of tree. Several more whistled at him, and Aang threw a gust of air outward, scattering them. 

He reached down and pried one out of the ground. “Uh, I think you dropped this!” 

In the trees, he saw an archer taking aim at him. The farther he looked, the more there were. He very quickly decided this was a terrible position to be in and turned to flee. 

However, the archers were not going to give up on him that easily. Arrows flew at him in all directions. Aang dodged and turned and leaped, diving off a cliff. He bent the air around himself, using the wind to parachute safely to the ground. The archers followed as he plummeted through trees and branches, leaves and sticks whipping him in the face. 

He slowly came to a halt, landing gently in a small creek. His hands dipped beneath the water, landing on something cold and solid. He closed his fingers around it and pulled it out, revealing a frozen frog. 

“Huh,” he said aloud. Shaking himself, he refocused on his task. He shoved the frog into his jumpsuit and dug around the creek. His hand hit another, and he pulled it out too. 

An arrow shot it from his hand. Aang cried out in surprise and leaped back to his feet as more arrows came sailing down. He dodged around them, searching vainly through the murky water for more frogs and taking which ones he could. 

“Sorry, sorry, I’m sorry,” he said to the poor creatures as he forcibly removed them from their homes. “But my friends need to suck on you… “ 

Just when he had enough, an arrow caught him off guard, landing right through the fabric of his clothes and pinning him against a fallen tree trunk. He jerked against it, grabbed it and tried to yank it out, but it held true in the wood. Several more arrows thunked into the trunk to to it, narrowly missing him. 

Suddenly, several archers dropped into the water in front of him, bows raised, arrow nocked. He swung his arm upward, creating a wall of ice to use as a shield. 

One arrow. Crack. 

Another. Crack. 

A third. The ice shattered. 

Aang shut his eyes, an arm flying up to protect him face as ice shards rained down on him. More whistling, and more arrows pinned his other arm back to the trunk. He opened his eyes just as a net flew at him. 

He was right. Distantly, he could hear Lee’s voice saying, I told you so. He just hoped he could get out of this situation before he could hear it in person. 

***

“Y’guys never wan’ed to ‘ear ‘about m’favori’ stories,” Sokka slurred. 

“Not right now,” Katara pleaded, burrowing deeper into her sleeping back. After Lee returned with the water, her headache had come on in full force, reducing her to little more than a shell of a human being. Then, after some more arguing with Lee about it, he finally managed to convince her to lay down once and for all. 

“You’re not very nice, Katara.” 

“Sokka- “ 

“You’re mean.” 

“Sokka, please- “ 

“I’ll tell Dad if y’don’t- “ 

“By all means, Sokka,” Lee said loudly, “tell the story if it makes you feel better.” He was laying Appa’s leg between Katara and Sokka. He had initially been patrolling around, but after Katara and Sokka had nearly killed each other, he had placed himself between the two to ensure such did not occur again. 

Katara rolled over, looking at Lee with big, begging eyes. 

Lee shrugged. “Maybe he’ll shut up? Hopefully?” 

“No. No, he won’t… “ 

Sokka grinned sloppily. “M’favori’ stories are abou’ this one guy. I can’ remember his name righ’ now, but I remember the stories. There’s so many ‘bout how he ‘helps people, and then he fights some spirits’, and then- wait, I remember now. I think ‘e was the Blue Spirit. Yeah, he’s m’childhood ‘hero.” 

“That’s wonderful, Sokka,” Lee deadpanned, but a small smile played over his lips. 

“Now you’ve got him started.” Katara burrowed herself further into her slipping bag. 

“Y’know, I always ‘oped to meet ‘im.” 

“That’s great, Sokka,” Lee said in that same bored tone. 

“I dunno what I’m gonna say. You got any ideas?” 

Lee sighed. “No, Sokka, I don’t.” 

“You’re not very ‘elpful.” 

“Sokka, I beg you,” Katara said. “Shut up.” 

Sokka sniffled. “Mean.” 

***

They had blindfolded Aang when he had been brought in, his arms bound tightly behind his back. The ground was hard and smooth beneath his feet as the archers dragged him through to… wherever they were taking him. Somewhere made of stone, probably. 

His arms were only undone so that his arms and legs could be chained, the limbs pulled taut so he could not bend. He was held between two pillars, both of which had fires lit atop to provide light for the stone cell. 

Aang tugged against the chains but to no avail. It only served to make the cold metal dig into his skin and bones painfully. 

“So,” a new voice said. 

Aang’s head jerked up, focusing in on the darkened doorway. 

Out from the shadows stepped Commander Zhao. Because of course. “It’s the great Avatar, the one who managed to evade me on Crescent Island,” he said as he crossed the room. He began stalking around Aang in a slow circle. “Your little game fo hide and seek is over.” 

Aang’s skin began to crawl underneath Zhao’s eyes. He swallowed his fear back. “I’ve never hidden from you,” he snapped, venom he had never heard from his own voice present. “Untie me, and I’ll fight you right now!” 

The commander considered it. “Mmm… no.” He came to a stop in front of Aang. “Tell me, how does it feel to be the only airbender left?” His head tilted. “Do you miss our people?” 

The imagine of Gyatso’s skeleton rose to Aang’s mind, the horrible memories of the remnants of his people. He shook away the loneliness he had felt since he emerged from the iceberg, instead choosing to fix Zhao with an intense glare. 

The commander chuckled. “Oh, don’t worry. You won’t be killed like they were.” 

Aang jerked against the chains. 

“If you die, you’ll just be reborn,” the commander continued, “and the Fire Nation will have to begin its search for the Avatar all over again. So I’ll keep you alive.” He leaned closer and lowered his voice. “But just barely.” 

As he turned to leave, Aang drew in a breath, the puffed it out. A gust of wind blew through the cell, blew Commander Zhao right off his feet. He oh-so gracefully tumbled over and over, sliding to a stop against the wall. 

Aang chuckled. 

Zhao scrambled to his feet, brushing the front of his uniform off. “Blow all the wind you want, boy,” he snarled. “There’s no escaping this fortress. No one is coming to rescue you.” 

He opened the door and slammed it shut, leaving Aang alone in the cell. He jerked and tugged against the chains. The metal dug into his arms, bruising and threatening to break the skin. The chains refused to give. 

Zhao was right. No one would ever know he was here. 

***

A heavy weight dropped onto Katara’s chest, drawing her from her slumber. She peeled her eyes open, her eyelids feeling a thousand times heavier than normal, and was greeted by the sight of a lemur-face two inches from hers. 

Katara rubbed the sleep out of her eyes. “Off,” she tried to say, although nothing more than an annoyed groan came out. “Get- off- “she pushed Momo off her chest. He leaped to the group, chittering and bouncing up a down. 

Katara moved to sit up, but her headache protested. She collapsed back into her sleeping bag. 

Unsatisfied, Momo grabbed her arm and tried to tug her out of the bag and off Appa’s leg in… some direction. Her brain felt as though it were going to explode at any moment, so she did not know nor did she care where the lemur needed her. 

She snatched her arm out of Momo’s grip. “What do you want?” 

“Leave her alone.” Lee appeared in the corner of her vision, waving Momo off. “I said keep them safe, not bother them. Appa, once again, I’m leaving you in charge because you are the only trustworthy one here.” 

Appa rumbled. Katara rubbed her eyes again, trying to focus on Lee. “Are you goin’ somewhere?” she asked. 

Lee knelt down next to her. “Don’t worry about it. Just go back to sleep, Katara.” 

“Where’re you goin’?” She ignored her panging headache and attempted to push into a sit. “Are you leavin’ us? Did something happen?” 

Lee placed a hand on her shoulder, shushing her. His eye flashed blue. “Go back to sleep,” he said, voice ringing through the air. 

Go back to sleep, she thought as a blackness crowded the corners of her vision. Yeah. Yeah, that seemed to be a very good idea… 

***

Something was moving in Aang’s jumpsuit. He panicked, thinking some creature was crawling over him, but then, he heard a croak. A brown frog peeked out of the collar of his jumpsuit, then leaped onto the floor. More began to move and follow the first’s example. 

“What? No!” He tugged on the chains. “Come back! My friends are sick, and they need you! I’m sorry for evicting you without notice!” 

They ignored him, crawling to the door and sliding under the crack to freedom. 

But they’re so far from home, he thought to himself, his heart breaking for the poor, little, lost frogs. All my fault… 

Something thudded against the cell door. Aang froze, and then the something thudded again. And again and again. Then, it hit the ground. A moment of pause passed, and the door to cell slid open just a fraction. A dark-clothed figure stepped in, shrouded in the shadows of the doorway. 

The figure slipped the door shut and turned to him. It wore a mask, a blue demon face with a horrifying fanged smile painted in white. 

A part of Aang felt as though he recognized it. Another part of him, against his better judgment and the part that won out, screamed. 

The person pulled the mask up from their face. “Would you stop that?” Lee said. Aang’s mouth snapped shut. “Do you know how many guys I had to hit to get in here? I don’t want all that to go to waste.” 

“Lee!” Aang said. “How did you find me?” 

Lee crossed the cell, unsheathing the two swords strapped to his back. “Not important. Don’t move.” 

“Why- ?” 

“Just don’t.” He raised them, and Aang’s breath caught in his throat. However, when Lee swung them down, they sliced right through the chains. “You are a lot of trouble in a small package, you know that?” 

“Uh… “Aang shrugged as Lee sliced through the chains around his ankles. “Where are we?” 

“Later. Just come on, before they notice anything’s wrong.” He slipped the mask back over his face. Aang once again got the strange sense of familiarity as Lee ushered him out of the cell. 

They rounded a corner outside. A guard was laying on the ground, gagged, limbs bound tightly. They passed a hallway where one was hanging upside from the ceiling by his ankle, unconscious. Or, at least Aang hoped he was unconscious and nothing worse. 

They passed another room, one filled with croaking. Aang dodged in, snatching the half-frozen frogs and stuffing them inside his jumpsuit. 

“So that’s where those are coming from?” Aang could imagine Lee was raising an eyebrow beneath the mask. “Why do you have frozen frogs?” 

“Katara and Sokka!” Aang explained. He held one of the frogs up. “They need to suck on them!” 

Lee stopped. Lifted the mask up and stared at Aang, jaw dropped, utter bewilderment on his face. “I- I- “he shook his head, turning and continuing through halls. Aang scurried after him. 

They found their way to the sewer tunnels underneath the building, which Lee explained was a strong. “We’re at Pohuai Stronghold,” he whispered to Aang as a crowd of soldiers passed over the grate above. “The Yuyan Archers captured you. Silent, precise… you’d never know they were there until the arrow goes right through your throat.” 

“That’s morbid,” Aang commented. 

“Life is morbid,” Lee tossed over his shoulder. “Get used to it.” 

Aang made a face. 

The soldiers finished their pass overhead. Lee threw himself up through the wide grates, and Aang followed. He emerged in a wide open courtyard, surrounded on all sides by tall walls. Lee placed a hand on his shoulder and pointed to where a rope hung over the wall. Lee pushed him forward, and they sprinted for it. 

Aang reached the rope first. He grabbed and tugged on it a few times. “We’re good!” he hissed back at Lee, starting his climb up. Lee hopped up just a moment later. Aang had not made it more than a few steps when chimes blared through the courtyard, echoing off the walls. 

“Well, shit,” Lee muttered. 

“On the wall!” A soldier in the courtyard below pointed up to them. Aang’s attention turned back to the top of the wall. Another soldier appeared, sword drawn, and sliced through the rope. Before himself and Lee could meet painful ends at the hands of the concrete, Aang cushioned them with a ball of air. 

Lee was back on his feet in a moment. “There.” He grabbed Aang’s hand, and they sprinted for the stronghold’s open gate. 

“The Avatar’s escaped!” Zhao’s voice rang through the courtyard, coming from somewhere behind them. “Close all gates immediately!” 

No sooner had the words left the commander’s mouth did the gates begin to come together, the whirring and clanking mechanisms amplified by the courtyard’s echo. Aang sprinted ahead of Lee as a line of soldiers blocked their way to to the gate, spears held outward. Aang leaped forward and thrust his arms toward them, sending the battalion sailing back with a massive gust of air. 

“Almost there!” he called back, picking up more speed and allowing the wind to carry him forward. He glanced over his shoulder and came to a skidding halt. 

The gates slammed shut behind him, shaking the ground. The soldiers had recovered from his air blaster, gathered in a circle around Lee. He had his swords drawn and was moving in a cyclone of blades, spinning and slicing speartips off, kicking soldiers back and into each other. But he could not fend them all off at once. 

The air behind Aang moved. He spun, hands grasping a lunging spear. He kicked a gust of air at the soldier holding it, sending him sailing backward. Aang slammed the spearhead into the ground, snapping off the tip, leaving it in a shape akin to his staff, and charged at the ring of soldiers around Lee. 

Two sharp swings of the staff, and he had dispatched the soldiers in gusts of wind. Another swing of his staff sent Lee soaring in an arc up onto the stronghold wall. Then, Aang took the leap himself. 

Lee landed with a roll, Aang not far behind. More soldiers charged from both sides. With another two gusts of wind, they faced the same fate as their comrades on the ground. Another swing of his staff, and they went arcing over onto the next wall. Upon landing, Aang heard a yell from behind. A soldier charged them, but Lee lunged forward. He grabbed the man by the wrist and aimed a kick at his stomach. The soldier yelled and doubled over. Lee dispatched him with a headbutt. 

He swore, stumbling back as the man fell, a hand flying to his head. “Oh, why did I do that?” He hissed, then twitched, muttering under his breath. 

“C’mon!” Aang grabbed his arm, tossing the both off the wall. They landed just before the last gate. Aang kept his grip on Lee’s arm tight as they sprinted for the last one, so close to freedom- 

The air temperature behind rose sharply. Aang shoved Lee forward, blasting the firebenders’ flames back with a burst of wind. 

“Hold your fire!” 

The flames pittered out. Zhao emerged from behind the line of firebenders. 

“The Avatar must be captured alive,” Zhao said. 

“Sorry,” Lee whispered. Aang was suddenly jerked backward, two cold sword blades held at his throat. His blood went cold, and he froze, heart beating out of his chest. 

The firebenders tensed. They glanced at each other, then at Zhao. Zhao’s eyes met Lee’s, holding his gaze for several agonizingly long moments. Aang’s heartbeat was now deafeningly loud in his own ears. He reminded himself that Lee was not, would never, hurt him. Not now, not after all they had been through. 

“Open the gate,” Zhao finally said. 

“Admiral?” one of the soldiers questioned. Oh, so it was Admiral now? “Are you- “ 

“Let them out,” Zhao interrupted. 

Behind them, the gates creaked as they slowly pulled themselves apart. Lee gently nudged his swords against Aang’s throat. They slowly backed away from the strong, farther and farther into the surrounding forest- 

Something whizzed by Aang’s ear. Lee let out a small gasp of surprise.

The swords dropped away from Aang’s throat, followed by a loud thud behind him. 

Aang whirled to see Lee flat on his back, limp and defenseless on the ground. A fallen arrow laid a few feet from his head. The blue mask was cracked on the temple, right where the arrow had struck. 

“Lee?” He nudged him with his foot, but Lee did not move. 

Another arrow whizzed by. Aang gathered up a ball of dust into the air, then threw it outward. He gathered Lee’s swords, and then Lee, disappearing by the time the soldiers arrived. 

He hid them out in a small clearing, waiting for Lee to wake. Aang removed the damaged mask and tossed it aside. He ran his hand over the side of Lee’s head, wincing at the bump forming on his temple. Not good, not good. At least it wasn’t bleeding. Aang could count himself lucky on that front. 

He should have waited for Lee to wake naturally, but they needed to get moving before the frogs unfroze. “Lee?” he asked. “Lee? Please don’t be dead.” He started shaking him. “I really need a firebending teacher. Lee?” He shook him harder. 

Lee’s eyes flew open with a sharp gasp. He shoved Aang off him, scrambling back in the grass. “Don’t- get off- “ 

Aang threw his hands up in surrender. “Don’t panic. It’s just me.” 

Lee just stared at him. His eyes flickered between Aang and the fallen blue mask. Aang thought he might have seen his right eye flashing between blue and gold with each blink. 

Lee ran a hand through his hair, then winced and swore when he reached the bump. “Where- what- “ 

“Come on!” Aang grabbed his hand, attempting to haul him to his feet. Lee remained on the ground, his weight nearly pulling Aang down with him. “We have to get these frogs to Sokka and Katara before they unfreeze!” 

Lee blinked. “Frogs?” 

“Yes! Frogs!” Aang exclaimed. “They need to suck on them! Come on, hurry!” 

Lee remained on the ground for a minute longer, then slowly grabbed his things and pulled himself to his feet. His first few steps were wobbly. Aang lunged out to help him, but Lee held a hand up, keeping Aang at a distance. Once he was sure Lee would not keel over, Aang hurried back to their campsite. 

Momo greeted Aang with a loud chirrup as he hurried over the last of the stone steps. It had taken most of the morning to travel. His… well, his everything was exhausted from the run. The adrenaline of the past day had finally worn off. His limbs, muscles, brain, all of it, were utterly exhausted. 

Sokka was just coming to as Aang approached. Aang removed a frog from his jumpsuit. “Here.” He shoved it into Sokka’s mouth, then Katara’s. “Suck on these.” Katara had a crown on her head, for some reason. Aang could only imagine where that came from. 

“Aan’,” Sokka said through the frog, “‘how wath your thrip?” 

The aforementioned Aang mumbled in response, collapsing face-first on Appa’s soft tail. 

“Thith ith thathy!” Sokka commented, but it quickly turned to a shriek of disgust as a ribbit reached Aang’s ears. Katara screamed, then backed and spit out the from. 

“What is that?!” Sokka demanded. “I’ve never- I can’t- “ 

Katara stomped around to find Aang. “Why, in your right mind, did you think it was a good idea to give us frogs to- “ 

“Yeah, yeah.” Aang waved her off. “Yell at me about it after I sleep… “ 

Momo landed on Aang’s back, then leaned down and let out a loud screech in his ear. 

Aang jumped, hands clapping over his ears. “Hey!” he shouted. “What do you want?” 

Momo hopped off Aang’s back, landing on the ground, and screeched again. 

“Wait.” Sokka stepped around Appa’s side as well. “We’re missing something.” 

Aang sighed. With a groan, he pulled himself off Appa’s tail, doing an inventory of who was around. Appa, one. Katara, two. Sokka, three. Momo, four. Himself, five. And- 

“Wait.” Aang pushed himself to his feet. “He was right behind me… “ 

As if one cue, Lee stumbled up the stairs. His head was angled down on the ground, shaggy black bangs hanging in front of his face. 

“Lee?” Sokka asked, starting over to help him. “Are you okay?” 

Lee stopped on the top stair. Glanced up, his eyes confused. His right one flashed blue. Then gold. Then blue again. Back to gold. 

He blinked. “I don’t- I don’t feel right.” 

Aang barely had a moment to process what happened next as Lee’s eyes rolled into the back of his head, and he fell like a puppet with its strings cut. 

Chapter Text

In hindsight, Aang was lucky Lee had collapsed. Otherwise, Katara would have chewed him out for stuffing a frog in her mouth. Was she cured? Yeah. But a frog… 

Lee’s knees buckled, eyes rolling to the back of his head, and he fell, limp and unmoving. Katara rushed toward him. Her head still ached slightly, her muscles still feeling like mush, limbs not responding to her brain signals, but she was still moving. She slid to her knees beside him, Sokka dropping down on the other side. 

“What happened?” Katara demanded. 

“He- he got hit with an arrow?” Aang said. “In the head?” 

“How is that a question?!” 

“I don’t know!” His hands flew up in surrender. “I thought you might yell at me!” 

“Well- “ 

“Katara,” Sokka interrupted, “don’t prove him right.” 

Katara bit back the retort. “Where did he get hit?” she asked instead. 

“On- on the head?” Aang pointed to a spot on his own head. “Right here.” 

“I take it back,” Sokka said. “Katara, you can yell at him.” 

Oh, great. “If we’re lucky, he’s just concussed.” She motioned for Sokka to help her, and together they rolled Lee over onto his back. 

“I think that’s the first time the words ‘lucky’ and ‘concussed’ have ever gone into a sentence together,” Sokka commented. He turned his attention to Aang. “Where were you guys anyway? Who’s shooting arrows at you?” 

“Some stronghold,” Aang said. “These archers, they caught me. Zhao was there. Lee found me at the stronghold, and we tried to escape, but- “Aang motioned to him. “It didn’t go well.” 

“Zhao,” Sokka said. “Do you know how far away this stronghold was?” 

“No,” Aang responded, “but he seemed to think I was alone.” 

“Doesn’t matter,” Sokka said. “If Zhao’s anywhere near here, we need to get moving. He knows Aang escaped, and he’s going to start looking for him soon, if not already. We need to get going before he has the chance to find us.” 

“We can’t go anywhere,” Katara argued. “I don’t know if you noticed, but we have a bit of a problem here.” She motioned to Lee. 

“Once he wakes up, we can get moving.” Sokka shrugged. “Besides, doesn’t he basically walk off everything that happens to him? He’ll be fine.” 

“He’s going to need time to recover! How would you like it if I shot you in the head with an arrow?” Katara considered the statement. “It might actually do you some good.” 

“Hey!” 

“We’re not fully recovered either.” She pointed to herself, then him. “I want to get moving just as much as you do, but we need to take some time?” 

Sokka sat back on his heels. “I don’t know about you, but I’m up and kicking. Ready to fight some Fire Nation goons.” He swings his fists, then lost balance and tumbled backward. 

“Right,” Katara deadpanned. “They should definitely be afraid now.” 

Sokka pulled himself off the ground. “Okay, but you guys say that happening with his eyes, right? What’s up with that?” 

“Not the time, Sokka,” Katara said, pushing back her own question. Lee’s eyes were gold with a ring of blue around the iris. Not blue, not gold, not either alone. Together. She had seen them flash solid blue a few times before --- the times when he made people do things --- but never like that. 

“You’re not even slightly curious?” 

“I am, but we have bigger problems right now.” 

“If we’re not going to be moving, we might as well get some answers out of him,” Sokka continued. “We’ve all noticed it. The weird tricks, the things he’s said, the whole compulsion thing- “ 

“The what?” Aang asked. 

“Right, you weren’t there for that conversation. I’ll explain later.” He looked between Katara and Aang. “Come on. Don’t you want to know what any of it means?” 

“Are you actually suggesting that we started questioning him while he’s concussed?” Katara said. When Sokka nodded, she resisted the urge to reach over and slap him. “That is so manipulative!” 

“So?” Sokka fired back. “We aren’t going to get answers out of him any other way!” 

“Hey, guys?” Aang piped up. 

“How would you like it if I bashed you on the head and started interrogating you?” Katara spoke over Aang. 

“It’s not like I have anything to hide,” Sokka responded.

“Hide? What do you think he has to hide? He isn’t obligated to tell us anything.”

“You’re right!” Sokka winced. “I can’t believe I just said that, but don’t let it get to your head. You’re right --- he isn’t obligated to tell us anything, but after everything I saw, I only want a few answers. Like how did he find Aang so fast?” 

“Guys- “Aang said. 

“If you’re insinuating that he is working with the Fire Nation- “Katara’s voice was steadily rising in volume” -I thought we had all already been over this- “ 

“In no way is that what I’m saying!” Sokka snapped. “No, I don’t think he’s working with the Fire Nation. We’d be dead already if that was the case!” 

“Guys!” Aang shouted, grabbing both their attentions. “I think you’re shouting woke him up.” 

Sokka and Katara threw each other one last dirty look before turning their attention to Lee. Sokka went to lay a hand on his shoulder. 

“Don’t- “ Katara hissed warningly. 

“I’m not,” Sokka said stiffly. “Just going to help him- “ 

Lee snatched Sokka’s arm, then swung a leg up, flipping Sokka over onto his back. Before either Katara or Aang could think to move, Lee had one foot pressed over Sokka’s wrist, a hand pinning his other, and a knee planted against his chest. 

“Who are you?” he hissed. The temperature around shot up several degrees. 

“Lee!” Katara lunged forward and snatched Lee’s arm, dragging him off her brother. Lee drove his elbow back into her gut. The air rushed out of her, and she stumbled to the ground. 

“Hey!” Aang thrusted his arms outward, send a gust of wind slamming into Lee. He flew back through the air, landing hard on his side several feet away. 

Katara shook the pain away, then moved forward to help Sokka. “Are you okay?” 

“Decidedly not,” he responded, and she pulled him to his feet. “His eyes- eye has blue in it, right? It isn’t solid gold?” 

“No, it’s not.” Katara casted her gaze over to where Lee had slowly pulled himself to his feet. 

“Lee?” Aang asked. He took a step forward. 

Lee took one back, tensing. The temperature jumped another few degrees.

Aang raised his hands, still advancing forward. “Lee, we just want to help.” 

Katara and Sokka simultaneously reached forward and grabbed the back of his jumpsuit. “Stay back,” Sokka warned. “We don’t know what he’s going to do.” 

“He doesn’t want to hurt us,” Aang said. “Right?” he called out to Lee, who didn’t respond, eyes flickering back and forth between the three of them. 

“He may not want to,” Sokka replied, “but he still can if he feels the need.” 

“Maybe if we explain everything, we can talk him down,” Katara suggested, then called over to Lee. “Lee?” His blue eye- wait, since when was it just blue?- landed on her. She noticed his whole body seemed relaxed, his look more questioning than hostile. The temperature fell back to what it had been, a soft and mild humid. “You got hit on the head.” 

“Pretty hard,” Aang added. “You came to rescue me from the stronghold. One of the archers shot you, and it hit you in the head. You remember that, right?” 

No response. 

“The frozen frogs?” Aang tried. “The ones I told you they needed to suck on? Come on, you have to remember that.” 

“I know I will,” Sokka said. “Look, whatever happened, you’ve got to be confused, right?” He stepped around in front of Aang and Katara, hands raised, and slowly started toward Lee. “Getting hit that hard in the head is no fun. Trust me, I know. Been there a few times myself. But we’re not going to hurt you --- we just want to help you.” 

“Stop.” 

Lee’s eye flashed back to gold, his body tensing, the temperature leaping back up. Sokka did just that mid stride. 

“Stop,” Lee said again, holding out a hand. He was not looking at them, focus trained on the ground. “Don’t come- don’t- “he winced, and when his eyes opened again, his right one was blue. “Just don’t.” 

“Lee.” Katara took a step forward. 

Lee turned and bolted. 

“That went well,” Sokka muttered. He made to take off after him, but Aang and Katara had already beaten him to it. 

They chased him through the trees and foliage, all the way down to the small creek they had been getting water from during their stay here. Aang was the first to reach there, having taken refuge behind a tree before Sokka and Katara arrived, peeping out around the thick trunk every-so often. 

“He hasn’t moved,” Aang whispered to them. Katara peeked around and saw Lee was standing next to the creek, his back to them. 

“I don’t know what to say,” Aang continued as Katara stepped back around. 

“I’ll solve your problem,” Lee called without turning around, “You don’t have to say anything. The best thing you can do is leave.” 

“Yeah, like that’s something we’re going to do,” Sokka said. 

Deciding that Aang and Sokka had already had their chance, Katara was the one who stepped out from behind the tree. “Lee,” she began gently as she approached him, “you were hit pretty hard in the head. You’re probably concussed and a little confused.” 

He shook his head. “No,” he insisted. “No, I’m not confused. I’m- I- I can’t explain it. Please, just leave.” 

“We’re in too deep for that.” Sokka came up beside Katara.

“We are,” Katara agreed. “We understand there are things you don’t want to tell us just yet.” She threw a pointed glare at Sokka. “We might think of you as our friend, but you aren’t obligated to spill every little secret about your life.” 

“I didn’t mean leave permanently,” Lee said. His voice sounded different. Rather than defensive and fearful, it sounded calmer, softer, more confused. “I meant leave me alone. All I need is some time, but that time I need to myself.” 

“Sorry, but we can’t do that.” Aang came up on Katara’s other side. “Concussed and confused or not, you were still shot with an arrow. In the head. Let us help you with that, and then you can have all the time you need.” 

He said nothing back. 

“Lee?” Sokka asked. 

Lee finally turned to face them. This time, Katara took note of the color of his eye --- blue. “Why are you calling me that?” 

Sokka made a confused face. “Because it’s your name?” 

“It is?” His head tilted. “Since when?” 

“Since- “Sokka glanced at Aang and Katara, a look that said Help me out here, guys. 

“Since we met you?” Katara tried. “Is that not your real name?” 

He started to speak, then winced, eyes closing. When they opened, his right one was back to gold. “It is.” His voice was different again. The same physical sound, but back to being defensive. “Yes, it is. Why would I tell you any different?” 

“Did you lie to us?” Katara asked. 

“Lying is wrong,” Lee said. “Lying is what bad people do, but- “he blinked, and the eye was blue” -an exaggeration of truth is something else.” 

Aang leaned over to Katara and whispered in her ear, “He’s confused.” 

“Very,” Sokka said in her other ear. “To an incredibly concerning degree. I know we usually respect what he wants, but… “

“Yeah,” Katara agreed. She moved forward from their line. Lee froze, a wild look in his eyes, almost like a corner animal. “I’m sorry, but we’re not leaving you alone. Not when you’re like this.” 

Back to gold. “You don’t know what I’ll do. What I can do.” 

“Are you threatening us?” Sokka said. 

“Warning you,” Lee responded, taking two steps back into the creek. His heel caught on a rock, and he tripped, splashing down into the water. “You don’t know what I’ll do,” he repeated. “I don’t know what I’ll do.” 

His eyes fell down to the water calming burbling past. He sounded more horrified by that thought than anything else. 

“Please,” he begged. “Don’t push it.” 

Stupidly, Katara decided it would be a better choice to do just that. She stepped forward, extending a hand, only intending to pull him out of the creek- 

A shard of ice suddenly shot out of the water. Sokka lunged forward and tackled her to the side as it whizzed past her ear. They landed in a clump on the ground. 

“Are you okay?” he said. 

“Fine,” she replied, “but that wasn’t- “ 

It was then that she noticed Lee had his arm extended. His eye was blue again. 

Let’s just say I have a history with waterbending. 

“You.” Sokka pulled Katara to her feet, and she pointed an accusatory finger at him. “That was you.” 

“It was,” Aang confirmed. Lee’s eye flashed back to gold as it landed on him. “But you’re a firebender.” 

Lee got to his feet as well, stepping further back in the creek, almost to the other side. “It’s- it’s not what it looks like. I’m not a- well, not as much anymore, but- “ 

“Not anymore?” Sokka interjected. “You used to be? How is that possible?” 

Lee shook his head. Blue. “I- I can’t really- I don’t- “ 

“You can’t be both a waterbender and a firebender,” Katara said, as if the fact were not obvious. 

“I’m not,” Lee insisted. “Not fully. I wasn’t always. It only happened after- “

“Not always?” Sokka said. “What, are you now telling me that you can switch what element you bend?” He wheeled on Aang. “Are you sure you’re the Avatar?” 

“Positive,” Aang deadpanned. 

“Who are you?” Katara said. 

Lee blinied. Gold. “I’m- “blue” -I’m- “gold” -I don’t know.” 

“How could you not?” Sokka asked. “You were pretty insistent on it a few minutes ago?” 

“I- “Lee cut off with a frustrated noise, pressing the heels of his hands against his temple and screwing his eyes shut. “Stop- just- stop!” 

The word rang through the air, echoing. The three of them did that, but Katara had a distinct feeling they were not the ones Lee was talking to. 

Lee’s hands dropped from his temple. He stepped back out of the creek on the other side, made a noise that almost sounded like defeat, then collapsed limply. 

The four of them stared at him, silence lasting several moments, before Sokka broke it --- “I have absolutely no idea what I just witnessed.” 

“I think we stressed him out,” Aang said, “even more than he already was.” 

“Oh, we did?” Katara muttered. 

Aang stepped forward into the creek, crossing to the other side. “Here, help me.” 

“Wait.” Sokka held out a hand. “He might- “ 

“No, he won’t,” Aang insisted. “I think we’re done with that for now.” 

“Are you sure?” Katara asked. 

“Yes, I’m sure. Now, are you going to help me or not?” 

***

They did so, moving over. Katara and Sokka each threw one of Lee’s arms over their shoulders and dragged him across to back to the other side of the creek. Sokka precariously prodded Lee’s side with the toe of his shoe, then jumped back, a hand raised. 

Aang and Katara both raised an eyebrow. 

Sokka shrugged. “Just checking.” 

Aang rolled his eyes, then sat down in the creekbed next to Lee. He raised a hand, which was shaking violently. Aang grabbed his wrist and held it tight in an attempt to steady it. Aang liked Lee, trusted him, thought of him as a friend. He felt like he had always known Lee, in a way he could not exactly describe. What had just happened had terrified Aang. He had never seen someone so lost and confused, and it scared him even more that the person he saw it from was Lee. 

Lee wasn’t supposed to feel or act like that. Something about it was wrong.  

“What are you doing?” Katara asked, kneeling next to him. 

“Trying something,” Aang said. “I’m not sure if it will work. It’s just a hunch.” The hunch came from the same place that told Aang himself and Lee had always been friend, were always going to be regardless of the circumstances. 

“I’m sure it will, whatever you’re trying to do.” Sokka knelt on Lee’s other side. “Your hunches usually end up being correct. But, please be careful.” 

“As always,” Aang said with a wink. He steadied himself, reaching deep within, and placed a hand on Lee’s shoulder-

Hundreds of images flooded his mind at once. No, not imagines --- memories. Aang himself did not understand any of them, did not know the people, had never seen the places nor witnessed the events, but he knew that so many of the memories did not come from one person. A woman with a hood pulled over her heard, her cloaked form retreating away from him. With this memory, a warm sensation filled his chest, like a pleasant summer day, like the color gold . Next, he saw a white-faced spider-like monster that sent fear spiraling down to his core. This memory felt soft and clear, like a fresh snow, like the color blue . 

The memories alternated between the two feelings. A little girl with an evil smirk threatening to burn him. A round man with a kind smile and a tall teenaged boy who resembled him. A pond filled with turtleducks, quacking and demanding the bread in his hand. A man standing over him, a searching hot pain scorching the side of his face. All gold. 

A snowy-white city made from ice. Standing on a boat, the fresh cold sea air whipping into his face. A younger boy who might be a brother, who looks up to him with nothing but adoration. A soft voice urging him back to the world of the living. A faceless little girl. A dark-haired woman with a wide-brimmed hat, a painted face, and a beautiful smile. All blue. 

Then, there were those that felt like both. A demon-like blue mask and a pair of swords, the ones Aang had seen at the stronghold. A woman inside a small hut, with a stern face but kind eyes. An empty beach and two terrified men begging for their lives. 

They appeared in no particular order. He may have understood nothing, but he felt the emotions. Some joyous, some sad, some so terrifying that Aang himself flinched. But, through it all, a haze persisted. A confused, lost haze. 

Unfinished. Unwhole. Missing. Exhausted. Unaligned- 

Aang reeled his hand back with a gasp. He fell back, and Katara caught him. “What? Did you see something?” 

“I saw a lot of things.” Aang blinked. “There’s- there’s two.” 

“What?” Sokka said. 

“Two,” Aang repeated as Katara helped him to a stand.

“Two what?” Sokka said. “Two- “he made a motion in the air as he searched for the right word” -you know what, I’m not even sure what to ask.” 

“Two… “Aang made a face. “Consciences.” He nodded. “Yes. I think that’s the right word.” 

Sokka sighed. “Thanks, Aang. That clears up nothing.” 

Katara reached over Lee and swatted at him. “What do you mean ‘two consciences?’” 

“Exactly what I said.” There was no better way to describe it. 

Katara made a face. “So, does he have two different… “

“Personalities?” Sokka finished. 

“That, I guess,” Katara confirmed. 

Aang shook his head. “No. It’s not personalities. It’s more two wholes that have been disrupted and taken apart from each other. They need each other to be one whole, but something has interrupted that.” 

“So,” Sokka continued, “I’m hearing split-personalities.” 

“No, not that.” 

“So, that’s not what you said?” 

“No,” Aang insisted. “I can’t explain it. It’s more of a feeling.” 

“Oh no, Katara. Aang’s been infected with the I-refuse-to-tell-you-anything disease. Call the doctor.” 

Aang glared at him. “It’s his story to explain, Sokka.” He motioned to Lee. “And he can do that when he wakes up. It’s better if we don’t disturb him right now. He needs time to… realign, if that makes any sense.” 

“It doesn’t,” Sokka said oh-so helpfully. 

“It will,” Aang said. “We just need to give him time.” He looked to Katara for support. Thankfully, she nodded in agreement. 

And so, they hauled him back up to the stone building and laid him down on one of Appa’s fluffy legs. Momo watched from his perch atop Appa’s head, a curious expression in his bulbous eyes. Sokka told them to wait a second, then hurried back down the stone stairs. 

“What’s he on about?” Aang asked. Katara shrugged. 

As the word’s left Aang’s mouth, Sokka reappeared at the top of the stairs. He waved to them, something in his hand. “What is this?” he demanded as he approached Aang. 

“A mask,” Aang said obviously. 

Sokka gave him a well, duh, look. “My fault for not asking a clearer question. What I should have said --- where did this come from?” 

“It’s Lee’s,” Aang explained. “He was wearing it when he came to rescue me at the stronghold. He must have dropped it on the way in here. Why do you ask?” 

“Because I recognize it.” 

“You do?” 

Sokka nodded, passing the mask to Aang. “You’ve never seen this before?” 

Aang might have, a long time ago. Right now, his mind was still addled from his escape at the stronghold, Lee’s actions, and everything Aang had seen in his head. “Do you mind cutting all the pretense and telling me what this is?”

“I recognize it too,” Katara added. “From somewhere.” 

“Cool,” Aang snapped shortly. “What is it?” 

“It’s made in the shape of the Blue Spirit’s face,” Sokka explained. He paused, as if expecting this to be some huge bombshell or revelation. 

“The who?” Aang said. The name sounded vaguely familiar, but the weariness in his bones and his heavy eyelids could have cared less. 

“The Blue Spirit,” Sokka said aggravatedly. “You really have no idea what I’m talking about?” 

“Clearly, I don’t.” 

“It’s a story- well, it’s a lot of stories,” Katara corrected, “from the Water Tribes.” She took the mask from Aang, studying it. “Dad said that everyone around the world knows the stories, but they originated from the Southern Water Tribe.” 

“So, it’s a mask based on a character in a story.” Aang shrugged. “What of it?” 

“Some people say they are more than stories,” Sokka said. Katara passed the mask back to him. “That they actually happened, and that the Blue Spirit is real.” 

“Given everything I’ve seen, I’m sure he is. You guys go clean up,” Aang suggested, thoroughly ready to end the conversation. “I’ll watch him.” 

“Are you sure?” Katara tossed Lee a nervous glance. “What if he wakes up like that again?” 

“He won’t.” At her doubting expression, Aang steeled himself and firmly responded, “I’m sure he won’t.” 

Eventually, she conceded, but she still threw Lee another look as she and Sokka slowly trekked back down to the creek. 

Aang plopped down on one of Appa’s other legs, taking a moment to appreciate the peace and silence. All this time he had wanted to know what Lee’s deal was. Now, having seen pieces of it himself, he could not blame Lee for wanting to keep it a secret. It was… it was a lot, and that was an understatement. 

He replayed the ice shard moment in his mind over and over again. Lee was a firebender. Aang had seen it in action. It did not make sense- nay, it was impossible Lee was responsible for the ice shard. One person could not be both a firebender and a waterbender at once, not unless they were the Avatar. That simply did not exist, nor did it make sense. 

Who knows? Aang rolled over onto his side and curled his knees up to his chest. The world could have changed in the last hundred years. 

Waterbending was not Lee’s thing, though. Spirits were. He had yet to teach Aang much about spirits, but even the few interactions Lee and the spirit world had around Aang were enough for him, Aang, to know that spirits were his area of expertise. Did spirits and bending go hand-in-hand, in some way? 

He glanced over at Lee’s unconscious form. I don’t sleep. Did this count as sleeping? Come to think of it, Aang did not think he had ever seen Lee eat either… 

Aang pressed the heels of his hands into his tired eyes. Nearby, he heard the cawing of a blackbird. There was so much to understand, and none of it made sense. Although they had decided not to press when it came to things Lee did not want to tell them, this was it. The final straw. 

Maybe they were about to get some answers. 

Chapter Text

The Painted Lady. 

She was real. Sokha knew that. 

But Agni above, she had never expected Jang Hui’s guardian spirit to be standing right of front of her. To address her directly. To want to talk to her. 

So, naturally, Sokha did what any person would do when confronted with a literally spirit. She gracefully tripped over her own feet and tumbled back into the river. 

With a casual wave of the Painted Lady’s hand, a tendril shot up from the water and snatched Sokha by the waist, preventing her from falling in. 

“Sokha,” the Painted Lady said again, “I must speak with you.” 

Sokha’s mouth open and closed, no words coming out. Her mind was stuck on what exactly to say. What was she supposed to do in this situation? She had heard stories of spirits approaching mortals, there to test and trick them, to determine if they were worthy for some quest or, in the tricking case, for their own amusement. Sokha supposed that existing on a different plane meant that you had a free time to do whatever. 

“I- I don’t want this,” Sokha said, voice barely a whisper. 

The Painted Lady’s head tilted. “Want what?” 

“I don’t know,” Sokha responded. “I have people here I have to help. Please keep that in mind when you do whatever you’re planning to do to me.” 

The Painted Lady sighed. She drew her hand closer to herself, and the water tendril gently dropped Sokha back onto the dock. “I do not plan on doing anything to you, Sokha. I am here to help you.” 

Help. Okay. That was certainly not what she was expecting. “You- you already help me,” Sokha said with a nervous laugh. “More than I asked for. Well, I never even asked in the first place, and you still did. I could ask no more of you.” 

“You’ve helped me,” the Painted Lady replied. “The boy. I am sure you have never seen a patient with such a temperament as he has.” 

Sokha started to reply, then considered the statement. “No, I haven’t,” she admitted. “Why is he of any concern to you?” 

The Painted Lady stepped by Sokha, who took a lurching step back. She had seen glimpses of the Painted Lady here and there, but she had never been this close to her before. Or any spirit for that matter. There was something decidedly otherworldly about the Painted Lady, how her steps did not quite seem to contact the wooden planks, the soft and echoing tone of her voice, the fact that if Sokha squinted hard enough, her form was ever-so slightly transparent. 

The Painted Lady stepped out onto the surface of the water. She turned and held out her hand. “Walk with me.” 

Sokha glanced from the Painted Lady’s hand to the water. “Uh- “ 

The Painted Lady chuckled. “Don’t worry. I am not going to hurt you. I only want to talk.” 

Sokha swallowed her nerves. “Right. Um… can I have my bowl back first?” 

A swishing of water, and it flew right back into her hands. 

“Oh. Uh… thanks.” Hesitantly, she reached out to take the Painted Lady’s hand, but hers fell right through. 

A flash of disappointment passed over the Painted Lady’s face, almost as if she forgot this is something that would happen. “Just take a step out.” She motioned to the water. “Jang Hui will do the rest.” 

Okay. Sokha let out a shaky breath. Drawing in another that she held, she clutched her bowl tightly, then precariously stepped off the dock. As her foot hit the water, a small patch below solidified into ice. When she brought her other foot down, the same thing happened. 

Sokha let out a breath. “Wow,” she muttered, then looked up to the Painted Lady. “Won’t I slip?” 

The Painted Lady chuckled again, then started off. Sokha precariously started after her, patches of ice forming beneath each step. “Do you come here ever night?” Sokha called ahead. 

“Every night, there is someone you cannot heal.” 

“Oh.” Disappointment sank in Sokha’s stomach. “Sorry. I know, and I try, but I’m not always good enough- “ 

“Do not feel bad,” the Painted Lady interrupted. “This is my village. I swore to protect it.” 

“Do you- did you lie here?” Sokha asked. Did she ever live, or had she always been a spirit? Sokha had heard tales of both, of primordial being who had always existed beyond their world like Agni, Tui and La, and those who had once been mortal like herself. 

“Not when I was alive.” 

Was alive. The words echoed through Sokha’s mind, and she stopped walking. “Am I dead?” 

The Painted Lady stopped as well, turning to face her. “No. Why ever would you think that?” 

Have I offended her? “Well.” Sokha swallowed thickly. “My father, he used to tell me stories about spirits. He said that if you have died and passed into their realm, then you can see them.” 

Another amused chuckle. Sokha felt heat creeping up her cheeks. It wasn’t her fault she did not understand everything that was going on. “It depends, I suppose,” the Painted Lady said. “Spirits who stay in this world can choose to unveil themselves whenever they please. However, unless that is the case, no one can see us. Well… “she hesitated, biting her bottom lip. The tic was so real, so human, that Sokha did a double-take. “I’ll get there.” 

She started walking again, and Sokha followed, her footing more sure now. “I was born north,” the Painted Lady began. “Far north, at the top of the world.” 

“The North Pole?” Sokha guessed. 

“Yes. The North Pole.” She hummed. “That is what is was called.” 

Sokha thought about the ice beneath her feet and the Painted Lady’s affinity for the river. “Were you a waterbender?” She had only ever heard stories of them, had never truly seen one in person. 

“In life, no. Now, I am.” 

Sokha nodded. “Okay.” She was not entirely sure what to do with that information. 

“One day, a monster rose from the depths,” the Painted Lady continued as if Sokha had not spoken. “His name is Koh, the Face-Stealer. And, as his name might imply, he stole my face, taking my life in the process.” 

“Oh… “ Really not sure what to do with that information. “With all due respect, you still have a face.” 

“I got a new one,” the Painted Lady said simply, as if she were switching shoes or a shirt. “The night Koh stole my face- “ 

“Did it hurt?” Sokha blurted. 

“Did what hurt?” 

“When… “Heat crept up her cheeks again. What a childish question, but she had been unable to help herself. “When he stole your face?” 

“I believe I was too busy dying to notice.” 

“Oh,” Sokha said, unsure of what to say. 

“The night Koh stole my face, there were witnesses outside this world that saw. Tui and La, the Moon and Ocean Spirits. But there was a third spirit there that night. What he was doing there, I do not know, and yet he was the most important. He chased after Koh and tried to get my face back, but I had already died by that time. Even if I had not, he would not have been able to retrieve my face. 

“He convinced the Ocean Spirit to help me. La had taken pity on me and decided to follow through with his request, transforming me into a spirit. How, I do not know. Yet, it happened.” 

Sokha nodded, bile rising in the back of her throat at the thought of stealing faces. Her stomach turned over. All this talk was making her head hurt. 

“After that, I wandered, lost. It took the third spirit years to find me, but he did. He was searching for me this entire time. He helped to fasten me a new face. And from that day on, I became his companion. He helped me find this village and people I could help with my newfound abilities. Ever since that day, I have resided here. He left to travel the world as he had always done. But, from time to time, he returned.

“We forged a special bond. I always knew he was there, somewhere deep in my mind. I could always feel his presence, until one day… I didn’t. He was gone.” She narrowed her eyes. “Somewhere. Somehow.” 

“Oh. I’m sorry.” 

The Painted Lady stopped and turned back to face Jang Hui. They were a substantial distance from it by now. “The village is in unrest. I have heard the whispers and seen the posters. I take it you have seen them too?” 

For the first time, Sokha knew exactly what she was talking about. “I would,” she said. “It was about the Crown Prince. He died.” 

Only thirteen years old. Sokha could have cared less about the royal family, but the death of a child was something to be noted. Especially knowing the rumors about how he died, brought with trading ships from Caldera City. 

“Do you know what he died from?” 

Sokha shook her head. The rumors had not been that detailed, more focusing on the circumstances of his death as opposed to the actual cause. 

“Burn wounds,” the Painted Lady said. 

“Burn wounds.” Sokha nodded. “Right.” Although she was not sure how a firebender could burn. Was that not the whole purpose behind their training, to ensure such a future did not come to pass? 

Then, it clicked. “Wait- “ 

“I found him,” the Painted Lady said. “My companion. He arrived on your doorstep while looking for me.” 

“You brought him to me,” Sokha replied. 

The Painted Lady nodded.

But that did not make sense. “Wait, no.” Sokha shook her head. “Are you saying that kid and your companion are one in the same? And that kid is also the Fire Nation Crown Prince?” She shook her head again. Agni, her brain felt as though it was going to explode. “How does that work?” 

“You are correct,” the Painted Lady said. “They are all one in the same, somehow merged together. Both still in there, both still very much alive and existing. Yet… not so separate at the same time.” 

“So, he’s a spirit?” 

“Not entirely.” 

“Then how?” 

The Painted Lady shrugged. “I do not know, and neither does he. It will take some time to figure it out. I intend to help you do so.” 

“Help me?” 

She went silent, then sighed. “I want you to protect him.” 

Sokha froze. “What?” 

“Can I trust you?” The Painted Lady’s eyes were pleading, full of earnest. Almost begging, if Sokha read her correctly. 

“Why me?” Sokha asked. “Out of everyone, why me? Why not do this all yourself?” 

She bit her lip again, then smiled sadly. “Because I cannot offer him everything he needs. After merging, he was- is disoriented. He needs help sorting everything out. His memories, experiences, and abilities. He needs to learn how to be this new person. How to be a person, a mortal, again. Until that time, I cannot trust him alone in the world. He doesn’t know what he’s capable of, and unfortunately, I don’t either. And if someone were to find him… do you know what they would do to him?” 

It took Sokha a moment to realize the question was genuine rather than rhetorical. “No,” she answered firmly, “and I would rather not find out.” She turned her bowl over in her hands. The kid… the half-dead mass of scars that had stumbled into Jang Hui had once been called the Fire Nation Crown Prince. The one who should be dead, the one who was now… oh, what was the word the Painted Lady used… merged with a spirit? A spirit who was very important to the Painted Lady, the protector of Jang Hui. 

She would need a lot of time to full digest all that. 

“He doesn’t eat,” Sokha said, “doesn’t sleep. Doesn’t do anything a normal human would.” 

“Does that make him any less so?” the Painted Lady replied. “He still breathes. Has a heart and organs and blood flow. He’s a kid who grew up without someone like you, who spent years fending for himself and learning how to survive. Given this second chance at life, maybe it’s time he does just that. Lives, not survives.” 

There was no denying the fondness in which the Painted Lady spoke with, the desperation hidden in her eyes and in her words. It was the same one she had seen in parents begging her to save their children, friends and siblings pleading for each other to get through this. Something real and genuine, the reason why she did what she did. 

“I’ll- I’ll see what I can do,” Sokha relented. 

The Painted Lady only offered her a smile. 

Their trek back to Jang Hui was silent. The Painted Lady helped her back up onto the docks. Just as she turned to leave, a final question popped into Sokha’s mind. 

“What’s his name?” she asked. 

The Painted Lady laughed. “Do you not know the names of your own country’s royal family?” 

Sokha made an annoyed face. She had grown up in the colonies. The names of the Fire Lord’s family were the least of her concerns. Besides, she cared more about human lives than she did being an exemplary citizen. 

“He has gone by many names of the years,” the Painted Lady explained. “Many names, many lives, but I have found that the Crown Prince’s is the one he remembers best. The one he responds to.” 

“Which is?” 

“Zuko,” she said. “His name is Zuko.”

Chapter Text

The first thing that Zuko became aware of was that everything hurt. His skull twinged with pain, each minor movement and blinking of his eyes bringing burning stabs to his head, and his whole body was sore. His muscles were weak, like he could not lift or move them if he wanted to. Not to mention that his back hurt. 

Agni, I sound old. 

Old… 

He had the memories, the memories of both. He remember Koh, Ummi, Avatar Aang, Uncle, and- 

Zuko shot upright in a panic, touching his chest, then his arms. He stared at his hands, running them over each other. He seemed solid enough. 

He sighed in relief. He wasn’t dead, thank Agni, he wasn’t dead. He had lost consciousness four times in the last twelve hours. Having not done so in three years, the sensation of not being entirely aware of everything that was going on around himself was one he had become unaccustomed to. He rather liked being conscious and aware all the time. Sleep left him vulnerable. 

Not that he needed it, anyway. Really, it was more a waste of time than anything. 

He glanced at his hands again, focusing just enough. A tendril of blue-white energy circled around his arm, weaving between his fingers. His vision out of his left eye was still horrendously fuzzy, and there was still that normal slight ringing in his left ear. 

Another sigh of relief, another weight lifted off his chest. The fog had yet to clear from his mind, but at least he was back in alignment. 

He leaned forward, placing his face in his hands. Agni above, that had not been pleasant. He remembered some of it, bits and pieces. More flashes than full memories. They were the same flashes, but they felt disjointed and different. As if two separate people had been looking at them at the same time. 

Zuko shook himself. Now was not the time to have an existential crisis about his own existence. He had done that enough already. 

He gently ran a hand over his head, wincing when his fingers touched the bump. He made a mental note to avoid arrows at all costs. It would take some time for the residual pain and the bump to go away, but at least it was no longer affecting him. 

The next thing he took note of was his surroundings. He was sitting on something soft and fluffy. One of the sky bison’s- one of Appa’s legs, he realized a moment later. He was back in the crumbling stone building. The Avatar and his companions must have brought him back here after his little episode. Zuko considered it a miracle they had not dumped his unconscious body somewhere and got the hell away from him. 

Of course, the Avatar and his friends had surprised Zuko much lately. After so long of only experiencing the worst the world had to offer, it was strange to remember there were some kind souls left. 

Voices floated over to him. Zuko glimpsed the Avatar and his companions in the opposite corner of the building, their backs to him. They had not realized he was awake. His eyes lingered over the Avatar’s form for a moment, and a faint blue-white energy encompassed him. 

Zuko blinked, shaking his head. They had not realized he was awake. But when they did, they would want answers. Who wouldn’t, after what they had seen?

And he was not quite ready to explain everything to them. 

I need a short walk. He glimpsed down Appa’s leg, seeing his sword sheath resting against the bison’s foot. He slid down, keeping his movements as quite as possible, and grabbed it, swinging it over his head. 

The bison lifted his head and began to rumble to alter the Avatar- 

Panicked, Zuko turned toward Appa, catching his eyes. Don’t, he begged, reaching out to touch the bison’s mind. His own will sunk into Appa’s head, taking over the bison’s. 

The rumble never emerged. Appa gently put his head down and went back to snoring away quietly. Zuko hated having to force his own will onto animals. It was so simple, so easy. They did not know or understand how to combat him, how to force him out or resist him. It was unfair . 

To be fair, neither did many humans understand it, but they sometimes understood what was going on. They had a fighting chance. 

He just needed a little time to think. To come up with some explanation, to get the fog out of his brain and remember everything. His footsteps made no noise as he backed away, keeping his eyes on the Avatar and his friends the entire time. Growing up with his father, Zuko was an expert on masking any noise he made. That ability had only amplified since… since the incident. Now, Zuko doubted his footsteps would make any noise even if he tried. 

His heel nudged something. Zuko froze, glancing down. Behind his leg, Momo was curled up on the ground, sound asleep. Zuko slowly slid his foot away, stepped over, and was on the stone staircase. He kept moving backwards, down one stair, then the next, next, next, until the Avatar and his companions were out of sight. 

A third and hopefully final sigh of relief once he was at the base of the staircase. He started toward the foliage at the base of the mountain, pressing the heels of his hands into his eyes. Oh, how was he going to explain any of this? Zuko liked to think he was taking on a very certain and specific role in the group. Aang was the Avatar and the core of the group, Sokka was the planner and decision-maker, Katara was the voice of reason and the one who held everyone together, and he was the freaky spirit guy that had been picked up on the side of the road. It was a new thing he had come into, but he did not hate it. It would take some getting used to, yes, but he was sure he could do it. 

The worst part of it was that he found himself actually getting attached to these people. He had all but sworn off human attachment of any kind some time ago. Why did he have to start truly caring for them? Why did he have to start wanting to see them succeed, despite everything else going wrong? Why did he have to start believing in them, believing that three kids stood a chance against the rest of the world? 

Others had called him a fool, said he was infatuated with mortals. Mortals, who could change with the wind, who were never stable, always shifting and moving. He had always maintained that infatuation was the wrong word to describe it. It was more respect, a real relationship to the corporeal world. None of them had seen this world the way he had. That there was beauty to change, to the not knowing. That there was something worth it. 

The downside of that was the whole “caring about these people” part, he supposed. Caring for these people who would be mortified if they knew the truth. 

Would they though? After getting over the fact that he was a firebender, Katara and Sokka had been quite friendly to him. Aang was Aang. Aang was the Avatar. Aang would see a lot of weird stuff in his time in this world. Aang had not cared that he was a firebender. 

But it would just be something else on top of the firebending thing. Oh, and there was the slight waterbender issue in there too. An issue on top of an issue on top of an issue. 

He dropped his hands from his eyes, precariously stepping over a large tree root. “They’re going to be freaked out,” Zuko said to himself. “I mean, obviously. I would be if I had seen all that. But they’ve seen worse right. Hei Bai was a thing that happened, after all.” He stopped and sighed, this time in exasperation. “No, they’re definitely going to be freaked out.” 

He started forward again, wracking his brain for some answer. Oh, hey, you know how I know all about the spirit world? Guess what, there’s a reason for that. Yeah, I used to actually be a spirit, then some shenanigans happened, and now, I’m still a spirit, but I’m also human. Isn’t that just so funny? Anyway, what’s for dinner? Oh, wait, I don’t eat. Yeah, my body doesn’t exactly work the same way it used to since certain things happened. I’m not entirely alive, but that’s a whole other can of worms I don’t have time to open today. Isn’t that so funny? 

It sounded awful in his head. He did not even want to imagine what it would sound like out loud. 

Zuko found himself at the same creek, standing at the very edge. One final test, I suppose. With a small wave of his hand, he lit a flame in his palm. He tipped his hand over, letting the flame stretch out into a small strand of fire. A tendril of water leaped out from the creek, spiraling up and around the fire strand. 

Well, Zuko thought, extinguishing the flame and dropping the water tendril back into the creek, suppose I’m back. 

The hair on the back of his neck suddenly rose. Zuko dove out of the way, drawing his swords, as a spear tip appeared just where he had been standing. 

A Fire Nation scout stood where he once was, flourishing his staff. “You,” he growled. “I’ve seen you before.” 

“Oh, you have?” Zuko fired back, knowing full-well what the scout was talking about. 

“The Avatar.” The flourishing stopped, the spear tip pointed at Zuko. “Where is he?” 

Zuko moved first, faster than the scout could comprehend. Two swift slices of his swords, right through the spear tip and down half of the staff. He kicked out, the blow landing on the scout’s chest. He stumbled to the ground, defenseless. 

Zuko pointed the tip of one sword at him. “How many more are there?” he demand. 

Blue flashed through the scout’s eyes. “Th- three,” he answered. “There were four in our group. I don’t know where the others are.” 

“Where did you come from?” 

Another blue flash. “A local outpost. We were told the Avatar escaped from Pohuai. If we came back empty-handed by the end of the day, they would send the archers out.” 

The archers. That wouldn’t be good. “You didn’t find anything,” he told the scout, voice echoing through the air. “You were attacked by a wild animal. You lost your spear.” 

The scout nodded. 

Zuko sheathed his swords. “Now, go.” 

The scout scrambled to his feet and tore off through the woods. 

Zuko watched him leave, waited his retreating back had disappeared through the greenery. A dangerous ability, that one was. He had to get out of the habit of using it so much. 

“Lee?” 

It was a moment before Zuko remembered that was the name he was giving people. He turned as Aang emerged from the brush. 

Upon meeting his eyes, Aang stopped, holding his hands up. “Don’t run away from us. We don’t want you gone.”  

“I’m not running away,” Zuko replied. “And you can put your hands down. I’m not going to do anything to you.” 

“That’s what we thought last time.” Sokka’s voice came from the brush and was followed by Sokka himself a moment later. “Next thing I know, you’re tearing through the threes like a madman and throwing ice at us, going on about how you don’t know what you’ll do to us.” 

“You can trust I won’t do it again,” Zuko corrected, wishing he was unable to mentally relive what had to be the most embarrassing thirty minutes of his life. “Anything you would like to add, Katara?” 

After a moment’s pause, he wondered if he had been correct in his assumption. However, when she eventually pushed out from the brush, Zuko was quite thankful he had not made himself look like a fool. “If you weren’t running away, then where we you going?” 

Zuko shrugged. “Somewhere away from you three.” 

“Sounds an awful lot like running away,” Sokka commented. 

“Not permanently. I wasn’t- “he stopped himself before the argument could dissolve too much more. “I needed a little time to sort some things out, but I’ve done that now. Everything is fine. We should get moving.” He started to push through the group. 

Aang and Sokka practically leapt aside as he passed. Zuko swallowed his annoyance. “Wait,” Sokka said, “maybe we should take a second. Have a little talk?” 

“The Fire Nation is here.” Zuko turned to face Sokka. “They’re actively looking for us. I saw a scout not long before you guys showed up. If they don’t turn up anything by nightfall, they’ll send the Yuyan archers out.” 

“The Yuyan?” Katara asked. 

“Those are the guys who captured me,” Aang added. “What did you say about them? Silent, deadly, precise, something about something being morbid?”  

“Basically. They’re good at what they do,” Zuko summarized. 

Aang nodded. “That’s all we really need to know. Lee’s right, we should get moving before they catch up to us.” He started to take a step. 

Sokka flung an arm out in front of him, then looked to Zuko. “No, I’m serious about our chat. Sorry for being so forward, but I want answers, Lee.” He paused. “If that’s even your real name.” 

Zuko drew in a breath to speak but stopped. Everything after being hit by the arrow was a haze, but he distinctly recalled that. He had never meant to let that slip. What were the chances they knew his name and what it meant? Zuko was not exactly common in the Fire Nation, even less so after he had been born, what with new parents afraid of upstaging the royal family. Tahrik was a name only so few knew him by. It was too obvious and a name that belonged to a specific part of the world he was clearly not from. Lee was almost far-too common. Something short, easy, and forgettable to give to people. 

“I’ll take your silence as a ‘no?’” Sokka asked. 

Zuko glanced between the three of them. Their wide, curious eyes watched him eagerly. “No,” he admitted. “No, it’s not.” 

“So… you lied?” Sokka narrowed his eyes. “Have you lied about anything else?” 

“No.” Zuko considered the statement. “Not directly. I may have stretched the truth in some places, but that is not the same thing. Besides, is a lie really all that bad if it is for the right reason?” 

“What would the right reason for a lie be?” Katara said. 

“There really is no reason to.” He looked between the three of them once more before shaking his head and relenting. “I’m making this worse, aren’t I?” 

“Yes,” they answered simultaneously. 

He sighed. Whether he was ready or not to tell them the truth, he supposed it was time. For the last three years, Zuko had ran from place to place, village to village, city to city. Never staying too long, never getting too involved, always being on the move. Staying in one area for too long meant he ran the risk of landing himself in the exact situation he was in now. Too many weird happenings, too many questions, and no good explanation for why. 

Well, there was always the truth, but Zuko feared the truth would scare people more than simply not knowing. 

They wanted the answers. They wanted to know more about him, more probably for their own safety than anything else. He had lied to them, been purposefully and frustratingly vague, about everything. Trust did not come easily to him, but the trusting came with the caring. 

Because he trusted them. For the first time in so long, he found that he actually trusted someone. 

“You want answers?” Sokka nodded. “I’ll give you answers, but only if we can get out of here now.” 

“Done,” Sokka agreed. “See how easy that was?” 

“I wouldn’t say that yet.” 

Sokka raised an eyebrow. “Why not?” 

Zuko sighed, then bit the inside of his cheek. “Well, just… it’s a long story. Perhaps it will be better if we start moving.” 

“Give us an abridged version then,” Katara said, as if it were really going to be that simple. 

Abridged version. He could have scoffed. More like the abridged version of the abridged version. 

“Alright, well then, long story short, I died, merged with a spirit, and here I am. End of story. Alright, let’s get moving.” 

The words had barely left his mouth when they exploded into questions, startling a nearby flock of birds from the trees. Zuko could only pick out a few among the chaos.  

“Wait, what?” Aang said. “Is that why you can compulsionize people?” 

“Compel,” Zuko corrected, but it was lost in the shuffle. 

“You’re merged with a what?” Katara said. “Is that why you can waterbend?” 

“Not fully, but yes,” Zuko replied. 

“You’re a zombie?” Sokka pointed an accusatory finger at him. “And you were just going to leave us without context to that?” 

“I would have explained it eventually,” Zuko said. At Sokka’s doubting expression, he repeated, “Eventually. I still do not fully understand it myself.” 

Perhaps he should have clarified that he could answer their questions if they went one at a time. 

Sokka’s hands clutched in his hair, eyes wide with amazement. “How- how could you not know that about yourself? Wouldn’t that be a given?” 

“I’m the Avatar.” Aang raised a hand. “I don’t know everything about myself.”  

“Alright, fair enough… You’re a spirit?” Sokka poked Zuko in the shoulder. “But you feel fleshy.” 

“Sokka!” Katara scolded. 

“Spirits can be solid if they want to, I think.” Aang rubbed his arm. “Hei Bai felt pretty solid to me.” 

Zuko stepped out of Sokka’s range. “I’m not a spirit. Not fully. I’m a spirit but still human. I’m merged.” 

“Aaand you say that like I’m supposed to know what it means,” Sokka said. “I know stories about spirit-touched people. Is it like that? Also, why do you have a Blue Spirit mask? It’s weird that you have that after I talk about hearing his stories as a kid. Have you been watching us?” 

“No, being merged with a spirit is different than being spirit-touched,” Zuko explained, “and I have far better things to be doing that watching you every day.” The confusion, he could deal with. So long as they did not come at him with pitchforks and threaten to burn him at the stake. “You’ve gotten a few answers. Now, can we please move on?” 

They had questions. A lot of questions, most of which he was not prepared to answer. There were some he expected, the most basic ones. 

“Wait, so you died?” Aang asked. They had made it back to the crumbling stone structure and were loading their things up onto Appa. “When? How? Who- “ 

“One question at a time.” Zuko passed a sleeping bag up to Sokka. “When?” He considered his answer. “First time, about a thousand years ago. Second… three years ago, at this point.” 

“You died twice?” Katara piped up from her place at the back of the saddle, where she was securing their things. 

“Some spirits were once mortals who died and became spirits in the afterlife,” Zuko explained. “My first death was such, and the second was with the merging.” 

“So, the first death was the spirit’s?” Sokka said, and Zuko nodded. “And the second death was yours?” 

“No, they were both mine. Keep up.” 

Sokka opened his mouth, then thought the better of it. He shook his head and took the next item Zuko passed him. 

Then, there were the harder questions. The responses that Zuko himself tried not to think about. 

“Do you remember both of your deaths?” Aang said. “What happened, both times?” 

Zuko paused. “Uh… yeah,” he lied. Unbidden memories of cold steel, the smell of saltwater and the mention of a boat, and the sound of waves hitting the shore came back. He shook them away. “Yeah, I remember both of them, but the topic is not something I like to talk about.” 

“Understandably,” Katara said, changing the subject after seeing the color drain slightly from Zuko’s face. “The waterbending thing- “ 

“Yes!” Zuko said, more enthusiastically than he meant to, causing Sokka to jump. “Yes, that I can actually explain. I used to be a waterbender, a long time ago.” 

“When you say ‘I,’ you mean the spirit, right?” Sokka said. 

Zuko bit the inside of his cheek again. He hated referring to himself or having anyone else refer to him as “the spirit.” The merging meant that whoever the two halves of him had been, Zuko and Tahrik, and whatever he wanted to call himself, it did not matter. Both were a part of himself, and neither could stand without the other. 

“Yeah. That’s what I mean,” he continued. “I used to be a waterbender, but after the merging, it reduced to a smaller degree of control.” Which was fine by him. As much as he had loved his waterbending abilities, he found that he now rather enjoyed the firebending the merging brought.

“When you say merging, what does that mean?” Aang slipped off the saddle and landed in front of Zuko. “Is it almost like two consciences that are two halves of a whole? Like- “he lifted his hands up, then laced his fingers together. “Like that?” 

“Basically.” 

“Oh, I get it now. Two halves!” Aang lifted his hands up to show the others. “Do you remember everything the spirit remembered?” 

Zuko nodded. Sure, there were some things he could not recall. Like anyone else, he did not remember everything he had ever seen, said, or done. Aside from… aside from a few select memories, he remembered just as a mortal would. 

“I can’t remember anything from my past lives. Can you explain that?”

“No.” Aang’s face fell, and Zuko immediately felt bad. “Maybe it is because you are different than you. You have the Avatar Spirit. Every cycle, the Avatar regenerates into an entirely new person.” Was that not the beauty of it, of having someone who could change to become what the world needed? “I’m more of a mix. Not entirely a different person, just a person with some extra memories.” 

“You break it all down to something that doesn’t sound like the coolest thing ever.” Sokka dropped next to Aang. “The compulsion, it’s tied to the spirit-merging?” 

“It is,” Zuko confirmed. “I have a few abilities as such that are based in the spirit world.” 

“Like what?” 

“Compulsion.” He thought for a moment. “I can see spirits with a veil over them, ones that have passed into the corporeal world but have not shown themselves. I can also tell when there are those who are more in tune with the spirit world than others.” 

“The compulsion.” Katara finally dropped down. “What’s the extent of that?” 

Zuko had already explained it to Sokka at one point, but he remembered the other two did not know what the ability was. “I suggest things to people, and they see no reason to argue. Or, maybe they feel a strong need to give me the information I want.” 

“So… mind control?” Aang said. 

“No, no,” Sokka answered before Zuko could. “Not mind control --- compulsion.” He gave Zuko a sarcastic wink. 

“Do you know what spirit merged with you?” Katara asked. “The waterbender?” 

“I do,” he answered. “His mortal name was Tahrik.” 

“Mortal name? Did he have another?” 

Uh… He was hesitating on how exactly to answer that question when the sound of unfamiliar voices floated into his ear. “Hang on.” He pushed through the group and moved over to the top of the stairs, staring out over the forest. 

“What is it?” Aang came up beside him on his left, his voice the only indicator to Zuko that he was there. Despite the acute senses the merging left him with, the burns marring the left side of his body stubbornly refused to relent in their effects. He could see sharply out of his right eye, hear clearly from his right here, but his left eye and ear heard and viewed the world as if they were blocked by cotton. 

“It’s the scouts,” Zuko said. “They are closing in. We need to get moving.” 

“How- “ 

“Trust me.” 

Aang did not argue as he turned away, heading for Appa. 

Zuko squinted over the forest, hoping to glimpse any sign of movement through the thick foliage. In the distance, he could see small shapes moving around the banks of the creek. 

He had gone to refill Katara’s waterskin when he had learned Aang had been captured. Two scouts had emerged from the forest around. Zuko had doven into the brush to avoid being seen by them. 

“They’re creepy, y’know?” one said to the other, plopping down on a rock by the creekside. “Dead silent, don’t speak. You never know where they are. I’m not even sure that they breathe.” He shook himself. “Give me the shivers.” 

The other one shrugged, sitting down on the rock opposite to him. “At least the Avatar is their problem now, not ours.” 

Zuko’s blood frozen.

“Can you believe it?” the first scout said. “Here we are, having a regular old boring day, wondering just what our purpose is to the Fire Nation, and the damned Avatar himself blows by the tower?” He let out a low whistle. 

Oh, this isn’t good, he said to himself, dropping his swords off his back and hiding them within the greenery. Slowly, Zuko stepped out of the brush. “Excuse me- “ 

The scouts leapt to their feet instantly, spears pointed at him. Zuko thrown his hands up and given his best attempt at looking startled. “I’m sorry,” he said, letting his voice break, “but I think I’m lost. I heard voices, and I thought you might be able to help me?” 

The scouts ad done a double-take at his scar, as everyone always did when they first laid eyes on him. However, after taking stock of his pale complexion, dark hair, and mostly-golden eye, they dropped their weapons, recognizing a fellow Fire Nation citizen. (Nevermind what one was doing out here, closer to the reaches of the Earth King than the Fire Lord.) “Of course, our apologies,” the second scout said. “We’ve had a pretty tense day. Where are you trying to go?” 

Zuko shrugged. “The nearest civilization. I’ve been wandering for a few days. I lost my map in a big storm about a week ago.” He laughed awkwardly, hating every single pathetic lie that came out of his mouth. 

He believed the scouts would not buy his fibs, yet they had surprised him by doing so. “Well, you are pretty far from any semblance of civilization out here, kid,” the second scout replied. “The closest there is is Pohuai Stronghold, but I doubt you’ll get much help from there.” 

The first scout shifted from foot to foot, then narrowed his eyes at him, studying Zuko. 

Zuko stopped. “Pohuai?” Oh, shit. The home of the Yuyan archers. Of course, Aang would have been taken to the absolute worst possible place to break him out of. But he did not yet have the confirmation that was where Aang was. “Never heard of it.” 

“We can take you back to our watchtower,” the second scout offered as the first rifled around his uniform pockets. “We’re getting replacements tomorrow, and we’ll get to go back to- “ 

“Hey, wait a second.” The first scout pulled out a poster and unrolled it. He motioned to his comrade, who stepped back to look at the poster. The light of the sun reflected through, giving Zuko a brief glimpse at the characters on the other side. 

It was a wanted poster for the Avatar. One that detailed Aang himself, along with his companions. 

“Scar,” the first scout whispered, his other hand tightening on his spear. Zuko quietly cursed himself for leaving his swords behind. “One of them is scarred. He matches the description!” 

The second scout gave Zuko a nervous glance, then slowly raised his spear. “I’m going to have to ask you to- “ 

Zuko shoved his arms forward, releasing a gust of hot air that blasted into the scouts. They stumbled back. He sent two small fireballs toward each of their chests, knocking them to the ground. 

“The Avatar,” Zuko demanded. “Where did you take him?” 

“Pohuai!” the first scout answered. “We turned him over to the Yuyan!” 

Huh. And he did not even have to use the compulsion this time. “Forget this ever happened, and go.” 

The scouts’ eyes flashed blue. They scrambled to their feet, turned, and fled. 

“Hey!” 

Aang’s shout sharply dropped Zuko back into the present. 

“We’ve got to go, Lee- you never told us what your name was!” 

There were only two people in the entire world who knew his real name. Only two he had trusted enough until now. He supposed he could add three more to that. 

“Zuko.” He turned. “My name is Zuko, the Blue Spirit.” 

As he climbed into the saddle and Appa took off, Sokka whipped around to face him. 

“Wait, you’re who?!” 

Chapter Text

Several days had passed, and Sokka had yet to determine how Aang and Katara were just casually going along with all this. Yes, they had not known Lee --- no, Zuko he said his name was --- for very long and probably should have expected something big, given all the shady things he did and the secrets he kept. Yet, the two had the audacity to go along with this all as if it were normal. As if they met spirit-merged dead people every other day. Another walk in the park. 

Weirder stuff has happened, they said. No, not like this!

“Sokka, it isn’t as big of a deal as you’re making it,” Katara said when he completed his rant. 

“What do you mean it isn’t? Katara, he- “

“I think you’re just in shock,” she interrupted, “given who he claims to be.” 

In the river next to their campsite, a large green fish leaped out, flipping and twisting with grandeur, before diving back into the water. 

“Am not,” he fired back. They sat across from each other at the remnants of last night’s fire early in the morning. Aang was still asleep, and Lee- no, Zuko - well… who knew where he went. The guy seemed to be allergic to sleep or something in that vein. 

“Are too,” she argued. “Don’t pretend like you don’t remember your delirious ramblings. You talked about the Blue Spirit --- a lot.” 

Unfortunately, his cheeks warmed with embarrassment. There were some things he would rather forget. “He could be saying that to mess with me.” Sokka held up a hand. “We have no way of proving he’s telling us the truth. He could be any spirit!” 

“So, you aren’t in denial because he’s a spirit?” A grin played on her lips. “You’re in denial because he’s the Blue Spirit?”

She wasn’t getting it, was she? “I never said that,” he argued. “That isn’t the point of any of this. What I don’t understand is how you act like this happens to every other person. It’s weird. He’s weird. This is all weird.” 

Katara let out an annoyed sigh. She had been listening to his rant for the past half-hour and seemed to be on her last leg. “Then go ask Aang about it. Maybe he can confirm it for you.” 

“I don’t need confirmation that it exists. Besides, what does Aang know about the Blue Spirit? I can’t imagine much.” 

The fish leaped up again. 

“How would you know? Have you ever asked?” 

“I- “he huffed in defeat. “No, no, I haven’t… “

“I see.” She nodded. “So, I ask again, is this more about him being a spirit, or him being the Blue Spirit? You’re confusing me here.” Although, judging by the grin she was barely containing, that was not the case. “Are you worried someone might know more about the Blue Spirit than you do?” 

“wHaT?” he said, voice cracking. “No!” 

“Why don’t you go talk to him yourself?” Katara suggested. “I did some.” She considered that. “I tried, at least. He’s getting more comfortable with us, but I doubt he is ready to share much yet.” 

“I can’t just go up and ask him.” What was she expecting him to do, perform a miracle? 

“And why not?” 

“Because it’s awkward,” Sokka tried. “You heard him. He doesn’t want us to ask about his past!” 

“There’s a certain time in his life he doesn’t want to talk about, but he’s open to anytime before that. I doubt he will care if you ask about then.” 

“Oh, he’ll care.” 

“Are you sure?” she challenged. 

“Yes.” 

“Really?” a voice from behind Sokka said. 

He shrieked, heart skipping several beats, and scrambled away from the source of the voice. Katara burst into laughter as Sokka recovered his breath and wits, his dignity floating off somewhere in the sky. “Why do you insist on doing that?” 

Zuko shrugged, plopping down by the remains of the fire and crossing his legs. “A petty form of entertainment. That yell you do --- it’s hilarious.” 

A chitter sounded from around behind Zuko, and Momo emerged, drawn by the sound of their voices. He stumbled over to Zuko, climbed over his knees, and collapsed into his lap with a heaving sigh, arms clutched tightly around- 

“How does he still have that?” Sokka pointed to the Fire Sage hat. 

“Kids and their stuffed animals.” Zuko shrugged, resting his hand between Momo’s shoulders. 

“I heard noises.” Aang emerged from the tent, rubbing his eyes. “‘S ev’rythin’ alright?” 

“Fine.” Sokka glared at Zuko, who made a mocked-offended expression. “Completely fine.” 

A third time, the fish breached the water. Sokka turned just in time for its beady black eyes to make contact with his before diving back beneath the surface. 

“It’s taunting us,” he decided, pushing to his feet. He grabbed his fishing pole from Appa’s saddle. “If so, he is just gonna have to be breakfast.” Stepping closer to the riverbank, he reeled his arm back, then forward, intent on casting his line out into the abyss, taking down that smug asshole’s ego- 

Nothing happened. Sokka examined his rod. “Hey, where’s my fishing line?” 

“Oh.” Aang dropped his eyes, cheeks reddening. “You needed that?” 

Sokka fixed him with a deadpan expression. “Perhaps.” 

“Sorry. I couldn’t really sleep last night, so… “he pulled something from his jumpsuit and presented it to them. “I didn’t think you would need it.” 

Sokka’s heart sank. What had once been is beautiful, straight, and untangled fishing line was now all braided and twisted into a flower necklace. 

“No,” he muttered. “What use would I, a fisherman, possibly ever have for fishing line?” Enjoy starving then. What could have ever possessed Aang to do such a thing?

Aang turned to Katara. “I, uh, I actually made it for you.” He held it out to her with a shy, genuine little smile. So sweet, innocent, and naive. He was just a kid. How could Sokka ever wish starvation onto him? 

He then remembered what happened to his fishing line, and some of the anger fizzled back up. 

“Oh.” Katara gingerly took it, as if it were constructed from fragile porcelain. “Thank you.” 

Behind Aang, Zuko snorted. 

She shot him a glare. “There’s nothing wrong with it!” 

“That’s not- no, that isn’t what I’m- “Zuko shook his head. “Nevermind.” 

Katara rolled her eyes. “Thank you, Aang. I like it.” 

“How wonderful,” Sokka interjected as Katara slipped the necklace on. “Maybe instead of saving the world, you can go into the jewelry-making business.” 

Aang shrugged. “I don’t see why I can’t do both.” 

“It would be a nice side hustle,” Zuko commented, “in case this Avatar thing doesn’t work out.” 

“Yeah, let’s hope the Avatar-thing failing is not in the cards for us,” Sokka said. 

From over the trees, a loud growl sounded, drawing their group’s attention. Aang was the first one off, a gust of air sending him leaping up onto a  rock. “Someone’s being attacked by a platypus bear!” he called back, pointing in the direction. He waited for the rest of them to catch up before speeding off. 

They found the scene of the crime farther down the river, closer to a stretch of trees. A man stood with his back to the trees. The platypus bear roared, teeth bared within its bill, and reared up on two legs, stomping toward the victim. It raised a paw, claws swiping for the man, and Sokka shouted a warning- 

However, his voice died in his throat when he saw the man was… smiling? And calmly dodging out of the platypus bear’s strikes? As if this were something he did every day? 

What has the world come to? 

“Well, hello there!” he greeted, sliding out of the creature’s reach, the serene smile never falling. “Nice day, isn’t it?” 

“Make noise!” Aang suggested. “He’ll run off!” 

“No!” Sokka argued. “Play dead! He’ll lose interest!” 

The man did none of these things as the platypus bear bared down on him. “Wow, close one!” He chuckled as the claws missed him by mere inches. 

“What the hell?” Zuko muttered. 

“Run downhill, then climb a tree!” Katara shouted. 

“Punch him in the bill!” Sokka added. 

“Then run is zigzags!” Aang finished. 

“Or do none of it,” Zuko said. The man took his suggestion. 

“No need!” the man called. “It’s going to be fine!” He ducked as the bear’s claws took a massive chunk out of the tree behind him. 

Aang launched himself through the air, landing square between the man and the platypus bear. He slammed a hand into the ground, sending a wave of air up. “Woah, there!” 

The platypus bear growled, then reared on its hind legs- 

A whoosh of air, and Appa landed behind him with a roar. 

The platypus bear froze, egg dropping from his behind, then scurred off into the water. 

“That works too,” Zuko muttered, and the three of them hurried over to Aang. 

Sokka took the still-warm egg into his arms. “Lunch… “he said dreamily, earning him a side-eye from Zuko. “Lucky for you we came along.” 

“Not to worry,” the man said. “I had everything under control. Aunt Wu predicted I’d have a safe journey.” 

“Aunt who?” Aang asked. 

“No.” The man shook his head with a laugh. “Aunt Wu. She’s the fortuneteller from my village. Awful nice knowing your future.” 

“Wow, it must be,” Katara breathed with an air reverence. “That must be why you were so calm.” 

Zuko scoffed. 

“The fortuneteller was wrong, though,” Sokka argued. “You didn’t have a safe journey. You were almost killed.” 

“But I wasn’t! Aunt Wu said if I met any travelers to give them this.” He pushed a parcel into Aang’s hand. “Have a good one!” Without another word, he turned and strode off through the trees. 

The four of them stood still, thunderstruck at what just happened. “Was that real?” Sokka wondered aloud.

“Maybe we should go see Aunt Wu and learn out fortunes,” Katara suggested, eyes trailing on the man’s retreating back. “It could be fun.” 

“As I’m sure it would be,” Zuko said, “but don’t we have a Fire Lord to defeat? A comet deadline we have to meet, and a North Pole we need to get to? A need for this Avatar-thing not to fail?” 

“We could take a day.” She shrugged. “Besides, if the village is that way, then it’s in our path. We could take the chance to get some rest and stock back up.” 

Sokka shrugged. “I don’t know. Lee- Zuko makes a point. We’ve wasted enough time as it is, we need to get moving. Also, what if this Aunt Wu is a hoax? There’s nothing that proves you can see the future.” 

“What do you know?” Aang held the parcel’s contents up. “An umbrella?” He flipped it open. 

In the distance, thunder crackled. Sokka looked up to the sky, which had been cloudless moments before, and found it covered by blankets of gray. A single drop hit his face. Then a second. Third, fourth, fifth… until it busted out in pouring rain. 

Katara dove under the umbrella with Aang. “That proves it!” She pointed at the sky. 

“It proves nothing!” Sokka held the egg over his head, but it did little to shield him. “She got lucky. You can’t really tell the future.” 

“I guess you’re not really getting wet then,” Katara fired back. “Would you know if they’re real?” 

Zuko, deflecting the rain away from himself with a hand wave, sighed. “Not something I want to get into now… “ 

Momo skittered up onto Zuko’s shoulders, reaching curious hands out toward the droplets. 

“Come on, guys,” Aang said, motioning them to move forward. “Even if we aren’t going to get our fortunes told, maybe we can find some shelter from this.” 

“Of course, she predicted it was going to rain.” Sokka’s foot sank into the puddle with a loud squelch. “The sky’s been gray all day.” 

“No, it hasn’t,” Katara said with a scoff. “Just admit you might be wrong, and come under the umbrella.” 

Hasn’t she known him long enough by now to expect that he would do the exact opposite? “Look, I’m going to predict the future now.” He drew himself together, waggling his fingers mystically. “It’s going to keep drizzling,” he said with a shaky, theatrical air. 

And, miraculously, a second later, it still was. 

Sokka motioned around. “See?” 

The sun peeked through the clouds. The rain stopped as if it had never been there in the first place. 

Aang shrugged, dropping the umbrella to his side. “Not everyone has the gift, Sokka.” 

Sokka tossed a glare at the sky. “Screw you too.” 

“Might not want to say that too loudly.” Zuko came up beside him, eyes turned up to the clear blue as well. “The sky spirits could get angry.” 

Sokka stopped. “Sky spirits?” 

Zuko shrugged. “The weather has cleared up. We should keep moving.” 

“Right. No reason to stop now.” 

“We’re almost to the village now.” Katara pointed to the horizon. “Why not take the chance to stop? We’ve been moving constantly. Some time to breathe might be good for all of us.” 

“You’re right,” Zuko said. “Maybe we should let the comet know --- and the Fire Lord while we are at it.” 

Katara opened her mouth, but Sokka beat her to it. “Again, he’s right. It’s best if we keep on.”

“You just don’t believe in fortunetelling,” Katara argued, “among other things. What if Aunt Wu could tell us something good?” 

“Then we can spend the rest of our days wondering what exactly it is that she was referring to, perhaps never truly accomplishing anything worthwhile because we are waiting on a single event.” Zuko shrugged. “Or we could just learn we die horrible, painful, and tragic deaths. I can go three for three.” 

They collectively paused. “What were the other two?” Aang whispered very quietly. 

“So you don’t believe in fortunetellers either,” Katara said louder.

“I never said that,” Zuko replied. “I would simply prefer not to know at what exact point I will be finding myself with a knife between my ribs drowning in the Southern Ocean.” 

Another pause. The other three exchanged a look. He said things like that, jarring and morbid things, like this was all normal to him. Sokka doubted he would ever adjust to it. “That’s… oddly specific,” he commented, breaking the silence. “Have you- “ 

“Later.” Zuko waved him off, as if this were something that just happened to everyone. “Katara, my point being --- do you really need to know everything?” 

“I’m not learning everything.” Katara shrugged. “Just some things. Come on.” She motioned with her head, and her and Aang started forward once more. 

“There’s no winning this,” Zuko commented. 

“Nope,” Sokka agreed, and they followed the other two. 

They found the village settled at the base of a mountain. It was a charming little place, surrounded by rich green trees, with clean white houses and villagers bustling about. They passed two geese at the entrance, who raised their heads and quacked. 

“Excuse me,” Katara said, raising a hand to hail the first villager they saw. “But do you know where- “ 

“Aunt Wu is?” the man interrupted. “Yes, she is expecting you. She will be over there.” He directed them toward the tallest building in the village. 

“Did you hear?” Katara shot back at Sokka. “She is expecting us.” 

“Yes, I did hear,” Sokka fired back. “Believe it or not, my ears do work. I know how to listen.” 

“I never would have guessed… “

When they stepped inside, the smell of burning incense wafted into Sokka’s nose. The entrance parlor was low lit by candles strewn across the floor and side tables. Dividers were drawn between the parlor and whatever was on the other side. If they waited here too long, there was a high probability this room would put Sokka to sleep. 

A girl with black hair and pink robes stepped up to them, drawn by the sound of the door opening. “You must be the guests Aunt Wu was expecting?” At their collective nod, she dipped her head and introduced herself. “My name is Meng.” Sokka gauged that she was no older than twelve as he noticed a gap between her front teeth. 

Meng froze. An extended pause passed in which she did not move. “Hello?” Sokka asked, waving a hand. 

Meng jumped. “I’m Aunt Wu’s assistant,” she continued. “May I get you some tea or some of Aunt Wu’s special bean curd puffs?” 

“I’ll try a curd puff,” Sokka offered. 

“Just a second,” Meng said half-heartedly, her attention turning to Aang. “So, what’s your name?” 

“Aang.” 

The girl gasped. “That rhymes with Meng! And you’ve got some pretty big ears, don’t you?” 

He saw Katara wince out of the corner of his eye as red blossomed in Aang’s cheeks. “Uh… I guess?” 

Sokka snorted. “Don’t be modest. They’re huge! Like an elephant- “ 

Aang’s glare cut him off. He clapped his hands over his ears, face turning even redder. 

Meng, however, seemed unfazed by their little scrapple, unaware of the effects of her question. “Well, Aang it’s very nice to meet you. Very nice… “she stepped back behind the dividers. 

“I can’t believe we’re here,” Sokka muttered, “in this house of nonsense.” Several sitting cushions were laid out on the floor. The urge to curl up on one and fall asleep was quickly growing. “We could still be traveling.” 

“Try to keep an open mind,” Katara chided as she and Aang took a place on a cushion each. “There are things in the world that can’t be explained. Wouldn’t it be nice to have some insight into your future?” 

Zuko let out a loud sigh, scrubbing a hand over his face and turning away from them. “You guys have fun with this. Let me know what wonders and horrors you all learn.” 

“You’re not staying?” Katara called after his retreating back. 

“Nope!” Zuko called back cheerfully, and the door slammed shut behind him. 

***

His reasoning for not wanting to know the future? Very simple --- what he had told them earlier. There were some things better off not being known. Zuko did not need to be controlled by the expectation of something that would happen. He would take the present as it came and deal with the future tomorrow. 

Zuko waited outside the building with Appa and Momo, rolling the Fire Sage hat across the ground for the lemur to catch and retrieve. While Momo scrabbled off after it, he studied the mountain overshadowing the village. It was odd, to say the least. It wasn’t like most mountains. The top looks as though it had been shaved off. He swore he saw a puff of smoke release from the tip every so often. 

About thirty minutes later, the other three emerged from the building. “Well, now you got to see for yourselves,” Sokka was saying. “Fortunetelling is just a big stupid hoax.” 

Katara scoffed. “You’re just saying that because you’re going to make yourself miserable for the rest of your life.” 

“That woman is crazy! My life will be calm and happy and joyful!” Sokka kicked a nearby pebble into the air. It sailed into a sign, rebounding and smacking off the side of his head. Sokka cried out, sinking to his knees, arms wrapped around his head. “This doesn’t prove anything.” 

Katara grinned. “Well, I liked my predictions. Certain things are going to turn out very well.” 

“They sure are!” Aang added with a toothy smile. 

“Why?” Katara looked to him. “What did she tell you?” 

Aang blushed. “Oh, uh… it’s good. Just know that.” 

“You should have stayed there with us,” Katara said, her attention now turning to Zuko. “You don’t know what you might have learned. It could have been something good.” 

“That’s just it, isn’t it?” Zuko replied as they started off through the village. “It could have been something good. But it also could have been something bad. I don’t need to know how many more bad things are coming my way.” 

“Do bad things happen to you a lot, then?” 

“Katara, I’ve died twice. They say the third time is the charm too, so maybe it’ll stick.” 

Uneasy silence passed between the three. “Oh,” Katara said quietly. “Uh… right… “

His comment put a major dampener on the conversation. Whatever cheer Katara and Aang may have found in learning their fortunes seemed to have evaporated. He had told them once there was a reason- well, really there were many reasons why he stopped becoming involved with people like them. Perhaps not the best way to phrase it, but how do you use the word “mortals” on a bunch of people you barely know and expect them not to absolutely bombard you with questions? Questions that he never wanted to answer, questions he would not answer, and worse, questions he did not have the answer to. Him having died twice was something they needed to get used to. 

“Hey,” Sokka said, breaking the silence. “What’s going on here?” He pointed toward the town square to where people were gathering around a golden archway. They made their way over. Here, Zuko had a fuller view of the mountain. Thick clouds were gathering around the precipice of it. 

That’s not normal. 

“What’s up with the sky?” Aang said aloud as they approached. 

“We’re waiting for Aunt Wu to come and read the clouds,” a man from the village explained. “To predict the fate of the whole village.” 

“That cloud kinda looks like a fluffy bunny.” Aang pointed to one. If Zuko tilted his head the right way, he could see it. 

“You better hope that’s not a bunny!” the villager snapped, causing the four of them to jump. “The fluffy bunny forecasts doom and destruction.” 

“The cloud reading will tell us if Mount Makapu will remain dormant for another year or if it will erupt,” another woman from the crowd added. 

“Wait.” Zuko held up a hand. “Erupt?” 

The man and the woman both nodded. 

Mountains did not erupt, but volcanos did. He had seen them from time to time in his travels, mainly around the islands of the Fire Nation. So that’s why it looks familiar. 

“Wait, wait, wait.” Sokka waved his hands. “Are you saying that you rely on the superstition of some crazy old woman to determine if everything you care about is still going to be here year after year?” 

“She’s not some crazy old woman,” the man argued. “We used to have a tradition once a year of going up the mountain to check ourselves, but ever since Aunt Wu arrived twenty years ago, we have a tradition of not doing that.” 

“What, did you throw people down the hatch in the hopes that the volcano would be appeased?” Sokka shot back. The comment earned him a slap upside the head from Katara. 

“She’s coming!” Aang pointed to the space where the crowd was parting. Through the heads of the villagers, Zuko glimpsed an older woman wearing yellow robes gliding through the space. Aunt Wu, he presumed. The crowd cheered for her as she took her place on the stage underneath the golden arch. 

She unrolled a piece of parchment and took up to the sky. Clearing her throat, she announced, “Bending arrow cloud… good crops this year. Nice, big harvest.” 

That earned a cheer from the crowd. 

“I don’t see it,” Sokka muttered. His eyes were squinted so much that they were nearly shut. 

“Wavy moon-shape cloud. Let’s see… gonna be a great year for twins! And a cumulus cloud with a twisty nub coming off the end of it… the village will not be destroyed by the volcano this year!” She threw her arms wide, and cheers erupted from the cloud. 

But when Zuko looked up. All he saw were similar-looking, puffy, white clouds. 

“I can’t believe all these saps,” Sokka said as the crowd dispersed. “Someone needs to get some sense into them.” 

Aang glanced at the crowd around. “They seem happy,” he suggested innocently, but Sokka had already taken off. 

Oh, this will only end well. Zuko hurried after him, Aang on his heels. “What are you doing?” 

“I’m gonna prove Aunt Wu’s predictions are nonsense.” 

“Hey.” Zuko grabbed for his arm, but Sokka dodged his hand. “Senseless and happy or not, maybe this isn’t the best idea.” 

“And why not?” 

“You’ll be upsetting their normal balance of life?” Aang tried. 

“He gets it.” Zuko laid a hand on Aang’s shoulder. 

“No, I won’t be,” Sokka argued. “They’re blissfully ignoring the facts of reality around them. That’s all. Hey you!” He called to a man wearing light blue clothes and red shoes so bright they could have blinded someone from a mile away. Sokka pointed to the shoes. “I bet Aunt Wu told you to wear those, didn’t she?” 

“Yes.” The man raised an eyebrow. “She said I’d be wearing red shoes when I met my true love.” 

“Uh-huh.” Sokka nodded. “And how many times have you worn those shoe since you got that fortune?” 

“Every day.” 

Sokka’s face fell, then- 

“Then, of course it’s gonna come true!” 

“Really?” A hopeful light brightened the man’s eyes. “You think so? I’m so excited!” And with that, he skipped off away from them, steps light as a feather, as though he were floated. 

With a frustrated noise, Sokka kicked a nearby rock. Zuko did not quite see where it landed, but he had an idea when angry squawking assaulted his ears a moment later. Wings flapped, and a goose flew at Sokka’s head. Sokka shrieked, batting at it. 

Aang stepped forward to help, but Zuko held an arm in front of him. 

“Shouldn’t we help?” 

“No. I’m curious to see how this turns out.” After watching the fight for about a minute, he pulled his hand back. “Okay, you can go.” 

Aang hurried forward, waving his hands around to distract the goose. “Hey!” 

The goose let out an angry honk, then fluttered away. 

“Yeah, you better run!” Sokka yelled, his face littered with shallow scratches. 

“Learned your lesson yet?” Zuko asked. 

Sokka held up a hand. “No, no, I’ve got this.” 

“I don’t care what Aunt Wu told you!” Sokka yelled at the next guy. “You have to take a bath some time!” 

The man in question, who wild beard and unruly hair were caked with mud, twigs, and leaves, just chuckled and walked off, leaving a questionable smell in the air where he had once been. 

“Maybe you should stop,” Zuko suggested. 

“And why?” 

“You’re getting aggressive. Stopping now would be easier than dealing with assault charges later.” 

Sokka opened his mouth to argue, then paused. “Alright, that’s fair. But that doesn’t mean I’m stopping now.” 

“Hey, Sokka, can I ask you something?” Aang glanced sideways at Zuko. “Alone?” His brows were furrowed in a way Zuko had come to learn meant Aang had something on his mind. 

“Of course, Aang.” Sokka threw an arm over the Avatar’s shoulders. “That means scoot, fireboy.” 

“Oh, yes.” Zuko crossed his arms. “Toss me aside like I’m nothing.” My dad was really good at that. After everything depressing he had already said today, he felt the comment was best kept to himself. 

“Why don’t you go find Katara?” Sokka suggested. “I lost her somewhere in the crowd. We need to get moving again. The nonsense of this place is starting to get to me.” 

“Do you know where she might be?” Aang asked. 

“I have a sneaking suspicion,” Zuko said, then turned away to pursue it.

His sneaking suspicions turned out as they always did, that being that he was right. Zuko watched as Katara was being gently shoved from the Fortuneteller’s home by the Fortuneteller herself. “And you’ll be fine as long as you’ve got a scarf,” the woman was wearily saying as Zuko approved. The two geese by the door honked in protest as Katara invaded their space. 

“Alright, goodbye now.” Aunt Wu quickly stepped back between the doors, hurrying to shut them. 

“Wait, wait!” Katara held up her hands. “One more thing!” 

Aunt Wu’s shoulders fell slightly. “What now?” 

“Should I eat a mango or a papaya for breakfast tomorrow?” 

Aunt Wu raised an eyebrow. “You- you want me to decide that?” 

She nodded eagerly. 

Sparing the woman of having to be harassed anymore, Zuko cleared his throat. “Katara,” he said, placing a hand on her shoulder. “I think we’ve overstayed our welcome here. Let’s not harass the elderly anymore.” 

Katara blanched. “Zuko,” she scolded in a whispering hiss. “Don’t- “ 

But Aunt Wu bursted out in a cackle. “Aren’t you one to talk?” She motioned with her head. “Mind coming inside to do just that?” 

“Of course he would!” Katara answered before Zuko could, starting forward. “And I can join him! I- “ 

“Actually.” Aunt Wu held out a hand, halting her in her tracks. “I would like to talk to him alone. You may wait out here.” 

“I’m good.” Zuko held up his hands. “I don’t need my fortune told.” 

“No, he would love to talk.” Katara turned to Zuko with a grimaced smile and murder in her eyes. “Wouldn’t he?” 

No getting out of this one. Maybe they would be able to leave faster if he played along with this. Zuko offered Katara an identical expression. “Of course,” he replied venomously, stepping closer to the door. 

“Ask mango or papaya,” she hissed in his ear, then shoved him into the house, closing the door behind him. 

Zuko found himself standing face-to-face with Aunt Wu, who was studying him with a careful eye. 

“So.” He crossed his arms. “How did you know?” Normally, he would be more on the defensive about this sort of thing, but there was something different about Aunt Wu he could not exactly place. Call it a gut feeling that maybe there was more to her than the eye suggested. 

“You have a certain air about you,” she replied. “I have seen it before, but I do not believe we have met. Care to give me a proper introduction?” 

“I would care, meaning that I don’t want to.” Still, he was uncomfortable enough that she had found him out the moment she laid eyes on him. Having her know at all would have been bad enough, but having it happen so quickly was not ideal. His name and identity had always been a carefully guarded secret, and he had no intent of changing that now. 

She waited for him to continue, but he never did. With only a small dejected sigh, she motioned for him to follow her to the back of the house. “So sure are you that you do not want your fortune read? There is so much you may want to know that I could tell you.” 

“No, thanks, I’m good.” They reached her fortunetelling room. The back of the house was sweltering compared to the front, most likely due to the crackling fire in the middle of the room. 

“Don’t you want to let it vent a little back here?” Zuko commented as she slid the door shut. 

Aunt Wu hummed. “I did not think the heat would bother you. Oh, don’t think I wouldn’t know a firebender when I see one,” she added when he tensed. “You seem far more defensive about that than your… “she paused, her eyes staring at nothing in particular as she searched for the right word. “Spiritness,” she eventually decided. 

“People are a little nicer to spirits than they are to firebenders.” 

She raised an eyebrow. “Only a little?” 

“Only a little.” 

Aunt Wu hummed again, taking a place on a cushion by the fire. “Sit, please.” She held out a hand to the cushion on the other side. “Nothing is going to happen to you here.” 

Zuko, however, looked at the cushion as though it might bite him. “I prefer to stand.” 

She said nothing, instead gazing wistfully into the dancing flames. “Are you sure there is nothing you would like to know? I see a very long future ahead for you. I could tell you everything you are going to encounter. I could tell you if your friend the Avatar is going to succeed or not.” 

“I don’t need you to tell me that,” Zuko shot back. “Aang is going to succeed because he’s the Avatar, not because a fortuneteller said he would. Whatever he is going to accomplish is going to be done on his own.”

“I never said he would succeed. I only gave you an if.” 

“I- “Zuko cut off with an annoyed sigh. Why did everything have to be so difficult? “My point still stands. I didn’t come here just so you could sow doubt. Aang is going to succeed, and I’m going to be there to help make sure of it.” 

“He has to, doesn’t he?” Aunt Wu questioned. “For all our sakes, of course, but for yours as well? Is that not why you decided to travel with him?”

“What, no.” He shook his head. “My sake is not important at all in this. What Aang is doing is to help set things right with the world.” 

“And you stay because?” 

He let out a frustrated huff. “What are you trying to get me to admit? I stay because it is my choice. Aang is going to eventually need a firebending teacher. It’s not like one is going to walk up and willingly offer that nowadays. Besides, he needs a spirit guide. He’s already mistakenly found himself in the spirit world once. I’m not letting him get lost there again.” 

Then, Aunt Wu laughed. Zuko stood there, bewildered and wondering what exactly he said that was so funny. “And how do you know you would be the only willing firebender? The only one who would do all of this for the Avatar? There could be others out there.” 

“Doubtful,” he snapped back. Unlike her, he had actually seen the state of the world change over the past hundred years. “Are you suggesting that there is something wrong with me teaching him?” 

“I never said that.” 

“You insinuated it.” 

“Did I?” She shrugged. “It wasn’t my intent. We can be masters of our own fate rather than it being in control of us. We do that by making the choices and decisions that define us. You know what it’s like to be robbed of those important decisions, hm?” 

His heart jumped. “Excuse me?” 

Her eyes drifted to the fire, searching the flames for something he could not see. “You life could have been very different, but that was taken from you, Prince Zuko?” 

He froze, blood turning to ice. “Stop.” 

She got to her feet. “I didn’t mean to- “ 

“Just stop,” he commanded. The words rung through the air, and her eyes flashed blue. 

They stood in silence for several long moments, the only sound filling the air being the crackling of the fire. “Papaya,” Aunt Wu finally said. 

“Papaya,” Zuko reported bitterly to Katara as he headed from the house. 

“Aw, I hate papaya,” she muttered, following him. 

“So? Defy fate and eat a mango.” The hairs on the back of his neck stood, as if the house was watching him as he made his way back to the town square. Aunt Wu’s gray eyes peeked out from each dark alleyway and peered around each corner. 

How did she know? How could she have known? As far as he was aware, the Fire Nation now pretended he had never existed. Katara had said his name, but it was so low, he doubted Aunt Wu had heard her. 

Freaky fortuneteller magic, his mind supplied. He knew he shouldn’t have gone and spoken with her. 

“What did she tell you?” Katara asked, hurrying up and falling in stride with him. “What did you learn?” 

“Nothing I didn’t already know.” 

Katara hummed, disappointed. They continued their walk in silence, but he sensed an expectant air from her. “What did she tell you?” he deadpanned. 

“Oh, I just had some questions about my future husband.” 

“Future- “he stopped walking. “Wait, what?” 

“My future husband,” she repeated airly, a dreamy look filling her eyes. “She told me during my first fortunetelling that the man I’m going to marry is going to be a powerful bender. I wanted to know more about him. Among other things.” 

“Or you could just marry a regular old dude.” Zuko shrugged, starting back toward the square. “Really, it’s all up in the air.” 

Katara sighed. “Why are you such a pessimist?” 

“I’m not a pessimist, I’m a realist. It just so happens to be that reality sucks.” At her annoyed look, he continued, “Consider it a consequence of dying twice.” 

“Oh.” She averted her eyes, fixing them on the sidewalk. 

It was Zuko’s turn to sigh. “Go ahead --- ask.” 

“I don’t want to be rude!” she quickly covered. 

“Yes, but you want to know. Ask before I change my mind.” 

“You’re temperamental, aren’t you?” 

“Like the wind.” 

She shook her head. “So, the whole knife between the ribs comment was- ?“ 

“The first time? Yeah.” 

“And the second was- ?” She motioned to the left side of her face. 

Not entirely. While the burn scar certainly got him most of the way dead, Zuko had a suspicion the very thin white line slashed across his throat had been what finished him off. Maybe I wasn’t dying fast enough for someone’s liking, he thought morbidly, but that was more than he was willing to share. For now, the burn was a good enough explanation.

When he nodded, she asked, “How far does it go?” 

He lifted his hand to show her where his middle and ring finger were fused together. The color drained from her face, and she dropped her eyes again. “I’m sorry,” she said quietly. 

He shrugged. “Don’t be.” Robbed of choices. He scoffed internally. Aunt Wu acted like this was the worst possibility for his life when really, there had to be worse options out there. At least in this one, he was still breathing, even if not fully living. “The last thing I want is someone else’s pity.” 

“Oh, hey, Katara,” Aang interrupted, appearing out of nowhere. He was leaning against a building, one foot planted against the wall with his hands resting on the belt of his jumpsuit. “I didn’t see you there.” 

Katara just waved at him and kept walking. 

“Oh, that’s okay!” Aang called after her. “I’m busy with my own stuff.” 

“What is that?” Zuko motioned to him. “You look- “